Square Foot Gardening

Contents
Introduction 9
SFG, New and Improved
27
Plan Your Garden
41
J Building Boxes and Structures
53
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success . . . 87
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden
107
Growing and Harvesting
131
Vertical Gardening
145
Extending the Seasons
165
Special Gardens & Gardeners
179
Appendix
188
iiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIiiiIii
^ W h y w r i t e a n u p d a t e d v e r s i o n o f the best selling g a r d e n i n g b o o k of all time? T h e o l d s a y i n g goes, " I f it ain't b r o k e , don't fix it." W e l l , Square F o o t G a r d e n isn't b r o k e n , b u t the all new m o d e l is s o superior, s o m u c h simpler, a n d s o i m p r o v e d that y o u c a n n o w forget all a b o u t the original b o o k a n d the original S q u a r e F o o t Gardening method! W h a t ' s so n e w a b o u t the All New Square Foot Gardeningbook? T h e original c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d the M o d e l T o f S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g . T h i s n e w o n e . . . like the latest Cadillac! T h e y are b o t h cars a n d they b o t h m o v e d o w n the road . . . b u t o h b o y w h a t a difference! In this e x p a n d e d a n d revised b o o k on Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , y o u t o o can learn, as millions of others already have, h o w to b e c o m e a successful g a r d e n e r the s i m p l e a n d painless way. T h i s easy-tou n d e r s t a n d m e t h o d w i l l r e v o l u t i o n i z e the w a y y o u t h i n k a b o u t gardening; a n d the n e w ideas f o u n d in this revised edition will awe and inspire y o u as I share insights on h o w the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d can, a n d is, c h a n g i n g the w o r l d .
For Experts Only

A reporter o n c e asked me if I t h o u g h t I h a d i n v e n t e d " g a r d e n i n g for d u m m i e s , " referring, o f course, t o the p o p u l a r S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d I developed in 1 9 7 6 . " N o , " I answered. Actually, w h e n I i n v e n t e d the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g ( S F G ) m e t h o d , I t h o u g h t it w o u l d be for expert gardeners. My m e t h o d was very precise a n d detailed, yet v e r y simple a n d easy to understand, and it p r o v i d e d all the c o n d i t i o n s necessary for successfully g r o w i n g a broad variety of plants in a v e r y different way. It also eliminated all of the wasteful, inefficient practices of traditional s i n g l e - r o w gardening. I t h o u g h t the experts w o u l d s h o u t " E u r e k a ! " a n d immediately bless all of the n e w ideas a n d advantages of this n e w h o m e gardening m e t h o d .
Beginners Understood
As it turned o u t , the experts never u n d e r s t o o d this u n i q u e m e t h o d . A p p a r e n t l y it w a s t o o simple a n d easy. B u t the b e g i n n i n g gardener,
10
ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING
a n d those discouraged by previous failed attempts, u n d e r s t o o d it completely. T h e y immediately saw the simplicity o f S F G . T h e beginner's instant response was "I can do this!" while the experts c o n t i n u e d t o q u e s t i o n every aspect o f this revolutionary g a r d e n i n g m e t h o d . T h e y just couldn't a d m i t that h o m e g a r d e n i n g c o u l d b e that easy.
Two Hours or Two Weeks

In my lectures, I like to reassure audiences that if they are n e w at g a r d e n i n g , or perhaps afraid or o v e r w h e l m e d by the idea of starting a garden, t h e y will be able to learn this s i m p l e m e t h o d of gardening in just an h o u r or t w o . H o w e v e r , if t h e y are already "expert" gardeners, it will p r o b a b l y take t h e m a b o u t t w o weeks! After the laughter dies d o w n , I r e m i n d my a u d i e n c e that beginners readily accept the m i n i m a l a m o u n t o f technical i n f o r m a t i o n n e e d e d t o b e c o m e successful gardeners because t h e y w a n t t o k n o w h o w t o successfully garden. T h e "experts," on the other h a n d , are so entrenched w i t h the idea of s i n g l e - r o w g a r d e n i n g as u s e d in f a r m i n g , w i t h all of its wasteful m e t h o d s , that t h e y just can't see it a n y other way. Y o u m i g h t say, " T h e y are stuck in a rut." As a result, I've learned to leave the experts alone a n d c o n c e n t r a t e o n the beginner, o r the tried-but-failed, gardener, and even the afraid-to-start person. S F G appeals to other large groups of w o u l d - b e gardeners. Years ago, I read s o m e very interesting statistics (and I'm sure the percentages are similar today) a b o u t these gardeners.
75 Million vs. 10 Million

Every year there are about 15 million people w h o : w o u l d like to begin gardening. tried the traditional single-row gardening m e t h o d , b u t failed. don't w a n t to begin gardening because they have heard of all the hard w o r k , time, and cost associated w i t h gardening. are d o i n g single-row gardening b u t are tired of the hard w o r k , time, a n d cost associated w i t h this impractical m e t h o d . are unable to c o n t i n u e caring for their b i g single-row gardens.
C o m b i n e d , that's an estimated 75 million p e o p l e ready for a g a r d e n i n g revolution c o m p a r e d t o a b o u t 1 0 million single-row gardeners w h o are c o n t e n t w i t h their m e t h o d a n d don't w a n t to change.
Twenty-Five Years and One Million Books Later

T h e first b o o k I w r o t e on S F G in 1 9 8 1 lasted twenty-five years and sold over one million copies, b e c o m i n g the best selling gardening
Introduction b o o k in A m e r i c a . H e r e is the story b e h i n d h o w I came to invent a better w a y to garden, a n d the ultimate success of S F G .
11
It Started in 1975
It all started in 1 9 7 5 after my retirement f r o m my consulting engineering business in N e w Jersey. In celebration, I m o v e d my family to a waterfront h o m e on the N o r t h Shore of L o n g Island. After a year of rebuilding the house and another year of landscaping a n d i m p r o v i n g the grounds, I decided to take up gardening as a hobby. My first step was to attend a lecture on c o m p o s t i n g given by a local environmental group. It was a w a r m spring d a y in A p r i l a great time to be o u t in the garden. A small g r o u p milled a r o u n d at the advertised m e e t i n g point, b u t no instructor ever s h o w e d u p . So, rather than disband, I suggested to the g r o u p that we each share o u r k n o w l e d g e w i t h each other a n d tell w h a t little w e k n e w a b o u t c o m p o s t i n g . W e h a d a w o n d e r f u l time a n d actually learned a little bit from each other. As we prepared to leave, s o m e o n e asked m e , " C a n we do this again next w e e k ? " A n d I said, "Sure, w h y not?" T h u s began m y n e w career o f teaching gardening w h i l e I was still a novice myself.
Community Garden
T h e n e x t step w a s o r g a n i z i n g a c o m m u n i t y garden for this same e n v i r o n m e n t a l g r o u p . I f o u n d s o m e land a n d c o n v i n c e d the t o w n to c u t d o w n all the w e e d s a n d fence it in. A local farmer delivered t w o t r u c k l o a d s o f well-rotted m a n u r e , a n d , after the g r o u n d w a s all fertilized a n d p l o w e d u p , w e laid o u t plots a n d aisles a n d o p e n e d for business. A l l of the spaces were q u i c k l y taken by p e o p l e in the c o m m u n i t y , a n d e v e r y o n e started w i t h great e n t h u s i a s m . S i n c e m o s t of the participants didn't have a garden at h o m e a n d were novices, t h e y w e r e enthusiastic a b o u t o b t a i n i n g i n s t r u c t i o n a n d insights o n g a r d e n i n g . So I initiated a S a t u r d a y m o r n i n g g a r d e n i n g w o r k s h o p a n d presented i n f o r m a t i o n on a different subject each w e e k w h i l e everyone sat around on bales of hay listening. I was teaching basic single-row gardening because that's all anyone k n e w back then. I was b u s y s t u d y i n g a n d l e a r n i n g g a r d e n i n g myself, t r y i n g t o k e e p a h e a d o f everyone's questions! T h e local c o u n t y agricultural a g e n t h e l p e d o u t and everything w e n t well until a b o u t m i d s u m m e r . It was a b o u t then that o u r once-enthusiastic gardeners stopped c o m i n g o u t to the garden. H o w e v e r , the weeds k e p t c o m i n g a n d growing! Pretty s o o n the place w a s o v e r g r o w n a n d l o o k e d a mess.
First Red Flag

I was discouraged a n d t h o u g h t I had better do s o m e research to figure o u t w h y we h a d failed, so I visited m a n y backyard gardens.
12
W h a t I f o u n d was a b i g space w a y o u t in the farthest corner of the yard, a b o u t as close to the neighbor's property line as possible. In m o s t cases, these individual gardens were also filled w i t h overgrown weeds. T h e f i r s t red f l a g w e n t u p i n m y m i n d , indicating that there was s o m e t h i n g w r o n g w i t h traditional single-row gardening. I began to t h i n k a b o u t all the conventional gardening practices we'd been taught and began to question the efficiency of each.
Three-Foot Aisles
I questioned w h y fertilizer is spread over the entire garden area, b u t the plants are o n l y placed in long, s k i n n y rows w i t h 3-foot w i d e aisles on b o t h sides. I w o n d e r e d w h y y o u were supposed to till up all the soil in an entire garden area w h e n those 3-foot w i d e aisles c o n s u m e over 80 percent of a garden area, a l t h o u g h plants in rows require less t h a n 2 0 p e r c e n t o f the garden space. T h e n I w o n d e r e d w h y y o u w o u l d w a l k all over the rest of the garden area again, p a c k i n g d o w n all that newly tilled soil? A n d , w h y is an entire garden area watered w h e n plants are o n l y located in a 6-inch w i d e r o w in the center of a 6-foot w i d e strip?
Too Many, Too Much

As I analyzed these traditional gardening m e t h o d s , I realized that there is o n l y o n e o u t c o m e y o u can expect w h e n y o u fertilize a n d water a 3-foot w i d e aisle w i t h n o t h i n g planted in itweeds! T h e following is a conversation I h a d w i t h a friend of m i n e w h o was an agricultural agent. " W h y a 3 - f o o t w i d e aisle o n b o t h sides o f the p l a n t e d r o w ? " I asked.
Introduction " S o y o u have r o o m t o get i n t o the g a r d e n t o h o e the w e e d s , " he replied. " B u t I don't w a n t to h o e the w e e d s , " I protested. " T h a t ' s t o o much work." " W e l l , " he said, "let's face it. G a r d e n i n g is a lot of hard w o r k . " T h i s triggered another red flag in my m i n d . G a r d e n i n g shouldn't be a lot of hard w o r k . G a r d e n i n g should be fun! There's s o m e t h i n g w r o n g here. T h i s led t o further questions. W h y d o the p l a n t i n g instructions o n p a c k a g e s o f seeds direct the gardener t o p o u r o u t a n entire p a c k e t a l o n g a r o w o n l y to have y o u later go b a c k a n d tear o u t 95 percent o f the seeds y o u p l a n t e d o n c e t h e y sprout? W h y use u p a n entire $ 1 . 8 9 p a c k e t o f seeds for every r o w y o u plant? Isn't that rather wasteful? W h y w o u l d t h e y instruct u s t o p l a n t that w a y ? W h o ' s in charge here, anyway?
13
Thirty-Foot Rows
T h e next question I asked was w h y plant an entire r o w of everything? Just because my garden is 30 feet long, for example, do I really w a n t o r n e e d a w h o l e r o w o f cabbages? T h a t w o u l d b e t h i r t y cabbages spaced 1 2 inches apart. T h i s brings m e t o a n o t h e r c o m m o n s e n s e revelation that no o n e seems to have t h o u g h t about. W h y w o u l d I w a n t thirty cabbages to ripen all at the same time? If everything is planted at o n e time, won't it also be ready to harvest all at once? It sounds like farming to m e , b u t that's too m u c h to enjoy at the same t i m e for a h o m e o w n e r . H o w m a n y p e o p l e g o t o the g r o c e r y store and b u y thirty heads of cabbage o n c e a year? Do you? So w h y g r o w it that way? T h e r e m u s t be a better w a y to stagger the harvest, a n d the obvious solution is to stagger the time of planting w h e n e v e r possible and to plant less.
Because That's the Way

I soon realized that I h a d a lot of questions w i t h very few answers, so I traveled all over the c o u n t r y seeking o u t the best experts: agricultural college professors, c o u n t y agricultural agents, garden writers, radio a n d T V gardening personalities, gardening publishers, b o o k writers, garden c l u b s a l l those w h o were supposedly knowledgeable people in the field of gardening. I sought answers to all the gardening questions I h a d a n d , no m a t t e r w h e r e I traveled t h r o u g h o u t the c o u n t r y f r o m M a i n e to California, I kept receiving the same answer. C a n y o u i m a g i n e w h a t that answer was? I t s o o n b e c a m e a p p a r e n t that the o n l y reason traditional s i n g l e - r o w g a r d e n i n g m e t h o d s c o n t i n u e d to exist was, "Because that's the way we've always done it!" R i g h t then and there I said, "I'm g o i n g to invent a better w a y to garden."
Farming
Part of the p r o b l e m , I realized, w a s that s i n g l e - r o w g a r d e n i n g w a s n o t h i n g b u t a h a n d - m e - d o w n t e c h n i q u e f r o m large-field c r o p f a r m i n g . Single rows m a k e sense w h e n y o u d e p e n d u p o n a m u l e o r a tractor to p l o w up the soil a n d t e n d the crops because those b i g h o o v e s o r w h e e l s take u p a lot o f r o o m . B u t w h y h a d n o o n e ever realized that in a h o m e g a r d e n , there is no l o n g e r a n e e d for all that w a s t e d space. T h e r e o n l y needs t o b e r o o m for t w o f e e t y o u r s ! Yet, every single direction for h o m e g a r d e n i n g still instructs, " S p a c e rows 3 feet apart." Perhaps that's really the g a r d e n i n g m e t h o d for d u m m i e s !
Efficiency
T h e next step I t o o k was to list all of the ineffective, inefficient, and unnecessary steps that have been consistently taught for traditional single-row gardening and then find a better a n d m o r e efficient w a y to accomplish the same task. I should m e n t i o n here that besides b e i n g a civil engineer, I was also an efficiency expert. Before I sold my engineering c o m p a n y , my j o b was to travel to construction sites or m a n u f a c t u r i n g facilities to analyze current processes in order to identify a n d correct inefficiencies in facility operations. In other w o r d s , to find a better way. T h u s , the challenge of inventing a n e w w a y to garden was right up my alley. T h e sequence of questions I asked a n d simple solutions I developed was actually very easy and straightforward, b u t it involved a little out-of-the-box thinking. F o l l o w m e along now.
One Thousand Seeds

I have fun w h e n teaching a class or seminar by asking, " H o w m a n y seeds do y o u t h i n k are in a packet of leaf lettuce?" S o m e guess fifty, o n e h u n d r e d , t w o h u n d r e d , a n d s o m e even venture a guess as h i g h as five h u n d r e d seeds. I t h e n a s t o u n d t h e m by s a y i n g that I o n c e o p e n e d a p a c k e t a n d c o u n t e d t h e m , a n d there w e r e w e l l over o n e t h o u s a n d seeds! W h y p l a n t h u n d r e d s o f seeds i n o n e l o n g row, a n d then turn a r o u n d w h e n they sprout a n d t h i n t h e m o u t t o o n e plant for every 6 inches? It doesn't m a k e sense, does it? It's a terrible waste o f seeds a n d t i m e a n d w o r k a l l useless, unnecessary w o r k . M y first s o l u t i o n w a s t o lay d o w n a y a r d s t i c k a n d p l a n t o n e seed every 6 inches. T h e n , I h a d n o t h i n g further to do a n d no w a s t e d seeds. T h e next t h o u g h t was, if you're g r o w i n g , for e x a m p l e , lettuce, a n d the seed packet says to thin plants to 6 inches apart in the row, h o w far a w a y does the next r o w really need to be? T h e answer, of course, is 6 i n c h e s n o t 3 feet!
Introduction
15
Single Row, Double Row, Triple Row

Eager to test my reasoning, I p l a n t e d t w o rows, 6 inches apart, to see h o w well the plants w o u l d d o . I t w o r k e d ! T h e plants g r e w just as well in t w o rows as they d i d in a single row, as l o n g as each p l a n t had 6 inches all around. N e x t I tried a triple r o w t h r e e rows where I placed all the plants 6 inches apart in all directions. A g a i n , it w o r k e d ! H o w w i d e c o u l d I m a k e this, I asked? T h e answer is, as w i d e as y o u can reach in to maintain y o u r garden; in other words, as l o n g as y o u r arms. But I still had a harvest too large to utilize.
Depending on the mature size of each plant, space a couple of seeds or transplants one, four, nine, or sixteen per square foot.
Shorten the Rows

S o w h a t was the o b v i o u s solution? S h o r t e n the rows! A n d they k e p t getting shorter a n d shorter, until they were o n l y 12 inches l o n g and 12 inches w i d e a square foot planting area. H o w m a n y plants could y o u g r o w in that square f o o t if each p l a n t was 6 inches apart? T h e simple answer: four plants per square foot.
16
Plant Spacing
S o , i n s u m m a r y , i f plants s h o u l d b e t h i n n e d t o 1 2 inches apart, p l a n t o n e per square foot. If plants s h o u l d be t h i n n e d to 6 inches apart, p l a n t four per square foot. If plants s h o u l d be t h i n n e d to 4 inches apart t h e n y o u can g r o w n i n e w i t h i n the space of that o n e square foot. If plants are t h i n n e d to 3 inches apart, y o u can g r o w sixteen in that same square foot. D o e s n ' t it all m a k e sense a n d seem easy e n o u g h ?
Never Walk on Soil

1 then w o n d e r e d just h o w far s o m e o n e c o u l d reach in to maintain a garden w i t h o u t c o m p a c t i n g the soil by w a l k i n g all over it. S o , I g o t a little old lady and a b i g h u s k y m a n and measured h o w far they c o u l d easily reach. I f o u n d that b o t h c o u l d c o m f o r t a b l y reach in 2 feet w i t h o u t l o s i n g balance. In order to reach in 2 feet a n d w a l k all the w a y around y o u r garden, y o u e n d up h a v i n g a 4 x 4 - f o o t area. N o w , the o n l y soil that needs t o b e d u g u p , i m p r o v e d , w a t e r e d , a n d fertilized is a 4 x 4 - f o o t g a r d e n area a n d n o t all the aisles. T h a t r e d u c e d the actual g r o w i n g area i n the g a r d e n b y 8 0 percent. A n d , an a d d e d benefit is the g r o w i n g soil in the 4 x 4 - f o o t area is never p a c k e d d o w n , so y o u don't have to h o e or d i g up the g r o u n d to keep loosening the planting soil.
Soil Improvement
T h e next step w a s h o w t o i m p r o v e the soil. A f t e r listening t o agricultural agents a n d reading b o o k s o n soil i m p r o v e m e n t a n d c o n d i t i o n i n g , the o n l y o p t i o n seemed to require a great deal of w o r k , time, a n d money. My research indicated that average soil conditions a r o u n d the c o u n t r y w e r e n o t w e l l - s u i t e d for g r o w i n g h e a l t h y v e g e tables a n d beautiful flowers. T h u s , in m o s t areas soils h a d to be greatly i m p r o v e d to obtain the best gardening results.
Horse Manure
M o s t soils o n l y c o n t a i n a b o u t 3 or 4 p e r c e n t o r g a n i c material. T h u s , the traditional f i r s t step for i m p r o v i n g soil i n preparation for g a r d e n i n g w a s to d i g or till up the soil in the entire g a r d e n as d e e p as y o u c o u l d a n d t h e n a d d soil enhancers s u c h as c o m p o s t or w e l l - r o t t e d m a n u r e f o l l o w e d later b y c o m m e r c i a l fertilizers. T h i s initial step r a n g a bell w i t h me because, as a teenager, I w a s the o n e w h o h a d t o t u r n over m y mother's g a r d e n , d i g g i n g the w h o l e t h i n g u p every year. M y father h a d t o b r i n g h o m e b u s h e l baskets full o f horse m a n u r e i n his b r a n d n e w C h r y s l e r . A f t e r w e d u m p e d it into the garden area, I h a d to do all of the spreading, m i x i n g , a n d t u r n i n g . A s laborers i n M o m ' s g a r d e n every spring, m y d a d a n d I were n o t h a p p y campers, a l t h o u g h she w a s thrilled w i t h the results.
Introduction
17
The Seven-Year Itch

I o n c e c o n d u c t e d a survey, asking gardeners h o w l o n g it t o o k t h e m to i m p r o v e their soil until t h e y g o t it just the w a y t h e y w a n t e d it. T h e average answer was a b o u t seven y e a r s s e v e n years o f h a r d w o r k t o p r o p e r l y c o n d i t i o n the soil for g a r d e n i n g ! A n d d o y o u k n o w w h a t statistics say the average h o m e o w n e r does after seven years? T h e y m o v e ! A n d guess w h o b u y s that h o m e ? S o m e o n e w h o doesn't even garden! Y o u c a n p r o b a b l y i m a g i n e t h e c o n v e r s a t i o n b e t w e e n the n e w h o m e o w n e r s . " H e n r y , let's pave over that garden area; it w o u l d m a k e a great p l a c e to park the trailer." Seven years w o r t h of effort lost. There's s o m e t h i n g definitely w r o n g w i t h this scenario.
Start Right in a Single Day

I started t h i n k i n g , " W h y n o t have great soil d u r i n g the first year of y o u r g a r d e n , a n d every year thereafter, n o m a t t e r w h e r e y o u live?" O f course, w i t h traditional b i g g a r d e n areas, h a v i n g the best soil conditions right a w a y m a y b e t o o costly a n d entail t o o m u c h time a n d effort. R e m e m b e r that after I d i d the m a t h , I f o u n d that by switching f r o m a traditional single-row garden to a 4 x 4 - f o o t layout w h i c h will p r o d u c e the same h a r v e s t 8 0 percent o f the garden area c o u l d be c o m p l e t e l y eliminated. T h i s means that y o u can g r o w 1 0 0 p e r c e n t o f the harvest i n o n l y 2 0 p e r c e n t o f the space. T h a t 80 percent of a single-row garden is wasted s p a c e s p a c e that doesn't need t o b e fertilized, w a t e r e d , o r i m p r o v e d , b u t i t d o e s have t o b e w e e d e d . T h i n k o f it. W i t h the S F G m e t h o d , seven years w o r t h o f w o r k can s u d d e n l y be c o n d e n s e d into as little as a single day w i t h o u t all the effort!
The 4x4-Foot Garden

M y f i r s t b o o k s h o w e d h o w y o u c o u l d reduce the w o r k b y laying o u t a 4 x4-foot area, then d i g g i n g o u t 6 inches of existing soil a n d m i x i n g in 2 inches of p e a t m o s s , 2 inches of v e r m i c u l i t e , a n d 2 inches of c o m p o s t . T h e s e i n g r e d i e n t s are available a t a n y nursery. M a n y gardeners even m a k e their o w n c o m p o s t at h o m e f r o m kitchen scraps and other plant material. M i x i n g the ingredients together w i t h the soil that y o u r e m o v e d , y o u n o w h a v e 1 2 inches o f 5 0 p e r c e n t improved soil. M y t h i n k i n g w a s that 1 2 inches o f i m p r o v e d existing soil w o u l d be all that n e w plants w o u l d need to thrive w i t h the plant roots staying w i t h i n these 12 inches of i m p r o v e d soil. B u t the experts I consulted said that m o s t vegetable plant roots need to keep g r o w i n g d o w n w a r d , searching for water a n d nutrients many, m a n y feet b e l o w the surface of the soil. " B u t , " I t h o u g h t , " i f plants are p r o v i d e d a g o o d g r o w i n g soil c o m p o s e d o f m o r e than 1 5 percent organic matter, a n d if vermiculite a n d peat moss are m i x e d in, h e l p i n g to retain water
18
in the soil, plant roots w o u l d no longer need to c o n t i n u e g r o w i n g d o w n w a r d in search of additional moisture a n d nutrients." Besides that, I w o n d e r e d if they were right a b o u t the roots n e e d i n g to g r o w deeper than 12 inches, h o w c o m e m o s t ro to tillers dig d o w n less than 6 inches? W e l l , it turned o u t they were w r o n g . O u r gardens thrived w i t h less t h a n 1 2 inches o f i m p r o v e d soil a n d that w a s just the beginning! W a i t until y o u read C h a p t e r 2, w h i c h describes the latest advances in this "out of the b o x " type of t h i n k i n g .
Stagger the Harvest

I also realized that if each square f o o t c o u l d be p l a n t e d w i t h a different crop c o n t a i n i n g either one, four, nine, or sixteen plants, all properly spaced, it wouldn't be necessary to plant a w h o l e r o w of just o n e crop. So, w h y n o t stagger y o u r vegetable plantings, so that y o u r harvest is also staggered? M a k e s sense, doesn't it? Yet we've b e e n t a u g h t all o u r lives to p l a n t e v e r y t h i n g all at o n c e in l o n g r o w s another h a n d - m e - d o w n technique f r o m large-field crop farming. If you're farming for commercial purposes, y o u w a n t everything to ripen at o n c e so it can be harvested together and taken to market. B u t w i t h h o m e gardening, y o u w a n t to stagger y o u r p r o d u c e so y o u can use it t h r o u g h o u t the season for daily c o n s u m p t i o n . O f course, I'm n o t t a l k i n g a b o u t c a n n i n g , freezing, a n d o t h e r h o m e - s t o r a g e measures, a l t h o u g h S F G is a practical g a r d e n i n g m e t h o d for these purposes also. However, I've f o u n d that people are n o t storing h o m e g r o w n p r o d u c e to the extent they did in the past. R e m e m b e r , I grew up in the days of the "victory garden," a result of W o r l d W a r I I w h e n A m e r i c a n s were encouraged b y the g o v e r n m e n t a n d by society to h a v e a b i g g a r d e n that used the o l d single-row p l a n t i n g m e t h o d s . M o s t p e o p l e w h o g r e w u p d u r i n g those years hated gardening because of all the w e e d i n g and hard w o r k it entailed. T h a t carried over into a w h o l e generation of people w h o stayed a w a y f r o m gardening just because of the negative m e m o r i e s associated w i t h m a i n t a i n i n g a large traditional garden. A n d , I m i g h t add, also f r o m all the w o r k of c a n n i n g a n d freezing. So w h y does the g o v e r n m e n t still teach the same o l d system m o r e than 60 years later?
Stop Planting So Much

I m e e t m a n y mature couples where the h u s b a n d p r o u d l y states, "I have a b i g single-row garden, and I g r o w a lot of p r o d u c e . " A n d the w o m a n responds, " O h , b u t I w i s h he'd stop. H e g r o w s all this p r o d u c e that we really don't need a n y m o r e . T h e n I have to can a n d freeze it. I'm tired and don't w a n t to do it a n y m o r e . We don't need it b u t he just keeps g r o w i n g it!" W i t h S F G , y o u don't have to g r o w so m u c h at a time that it becomes o v e r w h e l m i n g .
Introduction
19
Location
I began t o realize a n o t h e r great advantage o f S F G b y r e d u c i n g the garden size by 80 percent, it increases the n u m b e r of places w h e r e a garden w i l l fit. A g a r d e n no l o n g e r has to be w a y o u t b a c k , s n u g l y p u t u p against y o u r neighbor's p r o p e r t y line. A n d since y o u don't have to fertilize, water, a n d w e e d the aisles, it c a n n o w be l o c a t e d near the h o u s e .
Up Close and Personal

"Closer is better" is o n e S F G m o t t o . W h e n a garden is closer to the front o r b a c k d o o r o f y o u r h o m e , y o u pass b y the garden m o r e often. T h i s m e a n s i t i s easier t o t a k e care o f a n d c a n b e m o r e r e a d i l y e n j o y e d , all of w h i c h results in a b e t t e r g a r d e n a n d a h a p p i e r gardener. T h e w h o l e package fits together nicely. T h e r e are so m a n y advantages to Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , and the benefits and efficiencies of the c o n c e p t o n l y c o n t i n u e to increase.
20
The Square Foot Gardening Story

Community Garden
W e l l , we tried all these n e w ideas in the c o m m u n i t y garden the next year, a n d , guess w h a t ? T h e y w o r k e d ! E v e r y o n e u n d e r s t o o d a n d grasped the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g concepts q u i c k l y a n d easily, a n d since m o s t o f the participants w e r e b e g i n n i n g gardeners w h o w e r e w e l l a c q u a i n t e d w i t h the disastrous experience f r o m the p r e v i o u s y e a r i n c l u d i n g the overgrown w e e d s a n d m o u n d s o f zucchini a n d r o w s o f c a b b a g e that r i p e n e d all a t o n c e t h e y w e r e v e r y w i l l i n g t o try a n o t h e r o p t i o n . T h a t next year, 1 9 7 6 , w e w e r e able t o e n j o y a v e r y attractive a n d w e l l - r u n c o m m u n i t y g a r d e n u s i n g the n e w l y developed Square F o o t m e t h o d . T h e Bicentennial year o f 1 9 7 6 was a h u g e celebration across the c o u n t r y a n d w e also celebrated m y y o u n g e s t son's July Fourth birthday. I decided to do three things: o n e for m y country, o n e for m y family, a n d o n e for myself. T h e official p r e s e n t a t i o n o f Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g w a s m a d e a t a h o m e t o w n e v e n t that i n c l u d e d a s c h o o l project that I h a d o r g a n i z e d . A l l t h e schools g r e w sunflowers, w h i c h were planted a l o n g M a i n Street as a b e a u t i f i c a t i o n project. W e h a d a n all-day c e l e b r a t i o n o f displays, talks, b o o t h s , a n d d e m o n s t r a t i o n s o n t h e n e w S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d I h a d developed. I a n n o u n c e d this w a s my gift to the c o u n t r y a better w a y t o garden.
Sharing Ideas, 1978 to 1980

Because of the o v e r w h e l m i n g success of the project and the u n i q u e S F G m e t h o d , m a n y people encouraged m e t o write a b o o k sharing
cc
You have forever changed gardening for me.

Kanas from California
my ideas.
First, t h e local n e w s p a p e r asked me to w r i t e a g a r d e n
column. T h e n I began writing and producing pamphlets. Soon, magazine representatives started c o m i n g o u t t o p h o t o g r a p h m y h o m e garden a n d t o write stories a b o u t m y n e w ideas a n d the S F G m e t h o d . T h e m e d i a attention grew a n d grew, so I t h o u g h t , " W h y n o t write a b o o k ? " I drafted an outline a n d sent it to t w o publishers, w h i c h b o t h accepted the " h o w t o " b o o k o n successful gardening using the n e w S F G method.
Garden Consulting, 1981 to 1984

At the same time, I also began d o i n g gardening consulting w o r k for several companies. Y o u can imagine h o w "retired" I was now. O n e was a fence c o m p a n y , and, using their products, I began to develop vertical gardening m e t h o d s , originally for tomatoes b u t later for all v i n e crops. A n o t h e r c o m p a n y w a n t e d t o start a g a r d e n i n g t o o l catalog. So my j o b was to search the w o r l d for u n i q u e a n d unusual tools, test a n d evaluate t h e m , m a k e r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , a n d then
Introduction arrange the w r i t i n g o f s a m p l e descriptions for the catalog. D u r i n g this t i m e , I w o n d e r e d w h y w e n e e d e d s o m u c h stuff just t o g a r d e n . A n d , as you'll learn, I discovered that y o u don't.
21
PBS One Minute, 1981 to 1986

M y publishers predictions for m y b o o k were very modest, s o they didn't p r o m o t e m y b o o k the w a y I h a d h o p e d o r even send m e o u t for talks a n d appearances. Fortunately, s o m e of the companies I w a s c o n s u l t i n g for d i d s e n d m e o n tours a n d a l l o w e d m e t o s h o w the b o o k and talk a b o u t Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g if I also explained and demonstrated their products. T h i s proved to be a very valuable and r e w a r d i n g p e r i o d , a n d it wasn't l o n g before a local P B S television station asked if they c o u l d send their camera crew o u t to my garden to shoot "A M i n u t e in Mel's G a r d e n " segment for the evening news. I was delighted t o have the o p p o r t u n i t y t o share the S F G m e t h o d . T h e response to that short segment was explosive. T h e television station received so m u c h mail a n d so m a n y telephone calls that they w a n t e d to tape a s h o w for broadcast every w e e k night. So, once a w e e k they came t o m y garden a n d taped f i v e different segments. T h a t again proved so p o p u l a r that later they asked if I w o u l d be interested in a thirty-minute national show. Y o u bet I was!
Thirty-Minute PBS TV Series, 1982 to 1986

To m a k e a l o n g story short, my s h o w aired the following year on P B S and was p i c k e d up by e n o u g h stations along the East C o a s t to p a y for itself. T h e f o l l o w i n g year I started my o w n p r o d u c t i o n c o m p a n y a n d distributed the thirty-minute Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g s h o w t h r o u g h o u t the entire P B S s y s t e m . W i t h i n three years i t w a s p i c k e d u p b y every P B S station i n the c o u n t r y a n d received the h i g h e s t rating o f any g a r d e n show. T h i s i n v o l v e d a lot of travel, b u t it w a s all v e r y exciting. M y oldest s o n , Steve, b e c a m e the s h o w director, a n d w e traveled a r o u n d the c o u n t r y to different viewers' gardens that w e r e particularly w o r t h y o f sharing w i t h o u r a u d i e n c e . W e w e r e also invited to D i s n e y W o r l d to s h o o t d u r i n g the winter, an o p p o r t u n i t y we couldn't pass up. A l l of this excitement a n d activity m a d e it a very rewarding a n d exciting period o f m y life.
More Television Opportunities

I n a d d i t i o n t o all the a b o v e activity a n d travel, m a n y o t h e r opportunities occurred w i t h T V networks like C N N o u t o f Atlanta, Georgia, C B N i n V i r g i n i a Beach, Virginia, and several appearances o n A B C , G o o d M o r n i n g B o s t o n , G o o d M o r n i n g Philly, a n d m a n y other TV spots all a r o u n d the country. A l l of that b r o u g h t in a t o n of mail (whoever h a d heard of e-mail b a c k then?) a n d activities w i t h companies interested i n d e v e l o p i n g S F G products i n c l u d i n g s o m e
22
b i g companies such as R u b b e r m a i d . T h i s was exciting a n d eventful, y e t a t times stressful a n d e x h a u s t i n g . T h r o u g h all o f it, m y w i f e G i n n y courageously t o o k care o f everything a t h o m e and even p u t u p w i t h y e t never quite g o t used t o t h e f i l m crews c o m i n g o n c e a w e e k t o f i l m the P B S T V show. I t w a s b a d e n o u g h t o have the c o n s t a n t activity o u t s i d e i n the g a r d e n , b u t t h e y even i n v a d e d her k i t c h e n t o d o the c o o k i n g s e g m e n t . S i n c e s u c h a b i g part o f gardening is in the harvest and f o o d preparation, I c o n v i n c e d P B S to let us h a v e the first c o o k i n g s e g m e n t on a g a r d e n show. N o w , of course, they all do that.
TV Book Tag
I originally offered the p r o g r a m to P B S free of charge if they w o u l d give m e a o n e - m i n u t e b o o k tag a t the e n d o f each show. A t that t i m e , P B S was commercial-free a n d h a d n o corporate sponsors. B u t t h e y were f i n a l l y c o n v i n c e d that i t w o u l d b e w o r t h w h i l e , a l l o w i n g me to be the first p e r s o n to have a b o o k tag on a P B S show. As a result, a t r e m e n d o u s n u m b e r o f orders for the S F G b o o k w e r e received. We h a d to set up a toll-free n u m b e r a n d a fulfillment c o m p a n y to process these orders. A f t e r six years, the o p e r a t i o n b e c a m e fairly routine a n d the challenge o f creating s o m e t h i n g n e w was over. A t the same t i m e , s o m e P B S stations started talking like t h e y s h o u l d share in the profits of the b o o k sales, y e t t h e y still w a n t e d the s h o w free. R a t h e r t h a n c o m p r o m i s e the initial agreem e n t , I d e c i d e d to take the s h o w o f f the air a n d retire for the s e c o n d t i m e . T h i s t i m e , m y retirement w a s "for sure."
Discovery Network 1989 to 1991

A few years later, an agent c a m e to me a n d said that he c o u l d get the TV s h o w back on the air. I didn't w a n t a n y t h i n g to do w i t h it; I w a s happily retired. B u t w h e n he offered to do all the w o r k and take care of all the details, I t h o u g h t , " W e l l , w h a t h a r m could there be?" ( W e never learn, do we?) I finally agreed, a n d he sold the s h o w to the D i s c o v e r y N e t w o r k where it ran for t w o years a n d then on T h e Learning C h a n n e l for another year. I again t o o k the s h o w off the air. I decided that that was i t I really was retiring for good! (Yeah, sure!)
California Schools, 1996

Five years later, w h e n I was traveling in northern California, s o m e o n e invited me to c o m e see a school garden. "It's a Square F o o t G a r d e n , " they explained. I w e n t a n d t h o u g h t it was so impressive. T h e children were really enjoying the gardening experience, a n d the teachers loved it so m u c h that I b e g a n to t h i n k that perhaps I really shouldn't be r e t i r e d I should b e o u t teaching S F G t o school children. S o , again,
Introduction
One of the truly great features of SFG is how easy it is for children (of all ages!) to participate.
23
I came o u t of retirement (you k n o w the saying "fools rush in") a n d established a nonprofit f o u n d a t i o n to design a p r o g r a m for teachers e x p l a i n i n g h o w t o teach S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g t o s t u d e n t s . T h e foundation also built a n d distributed n u m e r o u s gardens t h r o u g h o u t the c o u n t r y . W e called the p r o g r a m " A S q u a r e Yard i n the S c h o o l Yard" since the children's gardens are sized at 3 x3 feet.
Utah Schools, 1998

T h i s phase of my life also involved a lot of travel. As I developed n e w staff m e m b e r s , we w e n t f r o m school to school d o n a t i n g gardens all the w a y f r o m M a i n e t o Florida and o n t o the California coast. W h e n offering S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g t o schools i n U t a h , w e tried s o m e t h i n g new. R a t h e r t h a n g o i n g f r o m teacher t o teacher a n d s c h o o l t o s c h o o l , w e w e n t straight t o the state b o a r d o f e d u c a t i o n . T h e y liked o u r idea so m u c h that they said, " W e ' l l take a garden for every single g r a m m a r school in the state of U t a h . " We g u l p e d and said, " W e l l , let's see w h a t we can d o . "
Thanksgiving Point, 1999 to 2001

O v e r the next t w o years, we were able to do just that. N e x t , the school board asked if I w o u l d write a lesson plan for U t a h teachers a n d students. I d i d , a n d it has n o w b e e n m o d i f i e d for h o m e schooling as well. We were then invited to p u t up a public display Square Foot G a r d e n at T h a n k s g i v i n g Point near Salt L a k e City. T h o u s a n d s visited the garden and, since Salt Lake C i t y is h o m e to the C h u r c h o f Jesus C h r i s t o f Latter-day Saints (the L D S c h u r c h o r M o r m o n s ) , S F G gained the attention o f m a n y L D S church leaders. T h e y invited the f o u n d a t i o n t o teach S F G a t the L D S Missionary
24
Training C e n t e r i n Provo, U t a h . W e s h o w e d missionaries h o w t o instruct people living in T h i r d W o r l d countries to b e c o m e m o r e self-sufficient by g r o w i n g their o w n food using the Square Meter G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d , w h i c h w e had converted f r o m the Square Foot Gardening method.
Square Meter Gardening: SFG Humanitarian Efforts Go Global, 2001 to 2002

O p p o r t u n i t i e s for the S F G f o u n d a t i o n just kept on g r o w i n g as we b e c a m e involved w i t h additional humanitarian organizations that sent aid overseas, m a n y of w h i c h began i n c l u d i n g the Square M e t e r G a r d e n i n g system in their programs. S M G was designed to appeal to families in T h i r d W o r l d countries a n d improve nutrition by a d d i n g fresh vegetables to their diets. It is s o m e t h i n g that c a n be readily d o n e , as the soil that is used in this p r o g r a m is pure c o m p o s t since peat moss and vermiculite is either unavailable or too expensive to obtain overseas. An a d d e d advantage is that m a k i n g c o m p o s t cleans up the e n v i r o n m e n t a n d gets all the family m e m b e r s involved.
SFG International Training Center in Homestead, Florida

S i n c e g a r d e n i n g in U t a h is at a standstill all winter, the logical d i r e c t i o n t o g o that t i m e o f year i s s o u t h . T h r o u g h o u r w o r k w i t h several i n t e r n a t i o n a l organizations h e a d q u a r t e r e d in W a s h i n g t o n , D . C . , the o p p o r t u n i t y c a m e to spend the winter in southern Florida w h e r e w e set u p a n S F G International T r a i n i n g C e n t e r i n H o m e stead. T h i s p r o v e d v e r y e d u c a t i o n a l for us because the weather, plants, a n d t e c h n i q u e s w e r e m u c h m o r e like C e n t r a l a n d S o u t h A m e r i c a . We p r o v i d e d a three-day t r a i n i n g s e m i n a r for the p e o p l e h e a d i n g to those countries as representatives of various humanitarian organizations. T h i s enabled Square M e t e r G a r d e n i n g to be taken to quite a variety of people and places.
Overseas
W h e n w o r k i n g w i t h people overseas, the first step is to teach t h e m c o m p o s t i n g . Since m o s t T h i r d - W o r l d countries are l o c a t e d i n tropical regions of the w o r l d , it's very easy to find materials that can be used to generate c o m p o s t . O n e of the biggest successes in Square M e t e r G a r d e n i n g is a project developed in India. It illustrates h o w easy it is to offer m e a n i n g f u l foreign aid to countries w i t h o u t s p e n d i n g millions of dollars. It is also a successful w a y of e n c o u r a g i n g i n d e p e n d e n c e rather t h a n d e p e n d e n c e o n g o v e r n m e n t a l bureaucracies. T h i s success story b e g a n after a priest n a m e d Father A b r a h a m received the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g b o o k . H e read i t a n d said, " W e c a n do this!" As a result, he n o w operates a sizeable, w e l l - o r g a n i z e d 6-acre training center w h e r e h u n d r e d s p e r h a p s
Introduction t h o u s a n d s o f p e o p l e h a v e c o m e t o learn the Square M e t e r G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d . T h e p e o p l e are learning t o successfully g r o w crops t h e y can n o t o n l y use a t h o m e b u t c a n take t o m a r k e t w h e r e they earn t w e n t y times m o r e t h a n t h e y d i d previously g r o w i n g crops the traditional single-row way.
25
Single Rows Throughout the World

Believe it or n o t , m a n y people a r o u n d the w o r l d still garden a n d grow crops in single rows. W h e n I was in the m o u n t a i n s of N e p a l , I observed the farmers g r o w i n g corn one spindly stalk spaced 1 meter (approximately 3 feet) apart f r o m the next spindly stalk, w i t h the next row 1 meter away. T h r o u g h the interpreter I asked w h y they space and plant their crops this way. T h e answer, as y o u can probably guess, was "That's the w a y we've always d o n e it. M y father taught m e , a n d that's the w a y his father taught h i m . " Just t h i n k of all the g o o d that will be accomplished w h e n Square F o o t / M e t e r G a r d e n i n g is a d o p t e d all over the w o r l d . It w i l l a l l o w families to g r o w five times as m u c h for their o w n use, t h e r e b y i m p r o v i n g their h e a l t h t h r o u g h better n u t r i t i o n ; f a m i l y life w i l l i m p r o v e w i t h t h e n e w a b u n d a n c e . I t w i l l d r a w families closer together as they b e c o m e involved in a viable a n d productive project, and they can sell the excess at market. T h e w o m a n of the family is our p r i m a r y target for this project, as she is m o s t concerned w i t h the children's nutrition.
Your method has given me the confidence to try veggies again after a few feeble attempts."
Anne from Florida
Certified SFG Teachers

W e h o l d w o r k s h o p s t o train teachers a n d people w h o w a n t t o help others learn this s i m p l e , easy, i n e x p e n s i v e m e t h o d that a n y o n e , anywhere in the w o r l d can do. Just t h i n k w h a t if every w o m a n in the w o r l d started just o n e Square Foot/Meter Garden? T h o s e nine crops c o u l d i m p r o v e the nutrition of her children; m a n y c o u l d even expand by p l a n t i n g m o r e gardens for larger harvests a n d even to g r o w cash crops. O n e o f o u r trainees w h o t o o k o u r course for certification then w e n t on a mission to teach schoolchildren music at orphanages in an African country. At the same time, she started m a n y S F G projects; her stories of success were h e a r t w a r m i n g a n d inspiring.
Garden of Eden
After enjoying three v e r y p r o d u c t i v e years w i t h o u r S F G D i s p l a y Gardens at T h a n k s g i v i n g Point, Utah, we had to make a decision because developers w e r e g o i n g t o b u i l d a n e w b u i l d i n g w h e r e o u r gardens w e r e located. R a t h e r t h a n m o v e the gardens t o a n o t h e r location, I decided it was t i m e to get a w a y for a sabbatical to do s o m e p l a n n i n g a n d w r i t i n g a n d discovered the beautiful, small m o u n t a i n c o m m u n i t y of E d e n , U t a h . I intended to o n l y stay and write for a
26
few m o n t h s . K n o w i n g I w o u l d need s o m e clerical help, I placed an ad in the local n e w s p a p e r a n d received an o v e r w h e l m i n g response f r o m p e o p l e w a n t i n g t o h e l p w i t h S F G . T h o s e initial f e w m o n t h s stretched into years, and E d e n b e c a m e an appropriately n a m e d h o m e base for spreading S F G t h r o u g h o u t the w o r l d . T h r o u g h the developm e n t of the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g website and e-mail contacts, the w o r l d has literally b e c o m e m y next-door neighbor.
The Story Goes On And On

Recently, a representative f r o m Guadalajara, M e x i c o , e-mailed asking for o n e of our representatives to visit and advise h i m in the developm e n t o f a large u r b a n S F G project that w o u l d teach a n d enable w o m e n to help their families. A really b i g and impressive project has b e e n started i n Sri L a n k a . O t h e r s h a v e recently w r i t t e n f r o m U k r a i n e , M o n g o l i a , E g y p t , Iraq, Jordan, a n d A f r i c a requesting training in the S F G m e t h o d because they see and k n o w w h a t a great difference it can m a k e in their respective countries. I receive reports f r o m successful S F G projects t h r o u g h o u t the w o r l d . S u c h a report c a m e f r o m o n e of o u r certified teachers, a professor f r o m Tennessee, a l o n g w i t h p h o t o s o f her international project in Ecuador. Letters c o m e f r o m people in Switzerland, France, G e r m a n y , Spain, Argentina, a n d C h i n a volunteering to help translate o u r website and b o o k into different languages. T h e v i e w e r c o m m e n t s sent t o o u r w e b s i t e a t www.squarefoot gardening.com are p h e n o m e n a l a n d the stories are n o t o n l y heartw a r m i n g , b u t s o m e are v e r y funny. O n e l a d y said the o n l y g o o d t h i n g she got i n her divorce was m y S F G b o o k ! A n o t h e r told o f the family b o n d that was forged as he sat w i t h his father ( n o w deceased) w a t c h i n g m y P B S T V s h o w i n the early '80s. H e still has his father's original b o o k . An entire S F G generation has passed by since I started. Boy, am I getting that old? A n d n o w in the electronic age, we have the website a n d e-mail t o replace the T V s h o w and snail mail. B a c k t h e n , we offered a free g a r d e n tips flyer a n d a p a c k e t of seeds ( m y favorite, marigolds) i f viewers sent i n a S A S E . D o y o u y o u n g e r gardeners k n o w w h a t that stands for? A s k y o u r parents. We received ten t h o u s a n d letters a n d sold o n e thousand b o o k s every w e e k . W h a t a hectic, exciting experience! B u t n o w that's all history, a n d it's time for an all new S F G book for a n e w generation of gardeners.
Why an All New Square Foot Gardening Book Now?

T h e answer is s i m p l e I have made so m a n y n e w improvements to the original basic S F G m e t h o d . M o s t of these improvements are so major they m a k e the first S F G b o o k obsolete. Just look at the next page and see w h y All New Square Foot Gardening can help y o u w i t h your garden!
Ten Major N e w Improvements to the Original Square Foot Garden Method

1. New LocationClose to the House 2. New DirectionUp, 3. New SoilMel's Not Down
Mix
4. New DepthOnly 6 Inches Deep 5. No FertilizerYou Don't Need It 6. New BoxesAbove the Ground 7. New AislesComfortable 8. New Width
GridsProminent and Permanent
9. New IdeaDon't Waste Seeds 1 0 . New OpportunitiesTabletop Gardens
All New Square Foot Gardening offers ten n e w m a j o r i m p r o v e ments t o the original S F G m e t h o d . N o w , w i t h these i m p r o v e m e n t s , anyone c a n be a successful gardener. Yes, it's true; this i m p r o v e d gardening m e t h o d makes gardening even easier than before. You're going to love every o n e of these improvements. Y o u will n o w be able to reduce the size of y o u r S F G so m u c h that y o u can locate it close to y o u r house for better care a n d m o r e enjoym e n t . You'll never h a v e to d i g up y o u r existing soil a n y m o r e as y o u n o w b u i l d y o u r n e w garden o n t o p o f it. N o m o r e hard w o r k o r heavy-duty tools needed. A l l you'll need is 6 inches of a perfect soil m i x from three c o m m o n ingredients available everywhere. T h i s m i x never needs c h a n g i n g a n d no fertilizer is ever n e e d e d u s i n g this natural, organic m e t h o d . You'll use b o t t o m l e s s boxes m a d e f r o m c o m m o n l u m b e r , h a v e aisles that are w i d e e n o u g h to c o m f o r t a b l y m o v e a b o u t in, a n d each b o x will h a v e a p e r m a n e n t g r i d for that u n i q u e S F G l o o k a n d use. You'll use a m i n i m u m of seeds, so y o u won't have to b u y n e w packets every year. Best of all, s o m e of y o u r boxes can have b o t t o m s so y o u can m o v e t h e m or place t h e m at tabletop or railing heights for easier care and u n i q u e locations.
28
N e w Location-Close to the House
Single-Row Gardens Are Too Big

O n e of the biggest problems of single-row and b e d gardens is their size. They're big! T h e y take up so m u c h r o o m that they are usually l o c a t e d w a y o u t back. T h a t usually m e a n t i t w a s o u t o f sight, resulting in out of m i n d . It became less and less tended as the year w e n t o n . But, guess w h a t still grew? Weeds! A n d these pesky plants c a n q u i c k l y i n u n d a t e a n d c h o k e o u t y o u r crops. W i t h o u t y o u r attention they'll take over the garden.
No More
A l l that has been changed for the better. S F G takes o n l y 20 percent of the space of a s i n g l e - r o w garden. T h a t m e a n s it can be located m u c h closer to the h o u s e w h e r e it will get m o r e a t t e n t i o n a n d care, resulting in a b e t t e r - l o o k i n g garden a n d a m o r e usable harvest.
Split It Up for Best Location

In a d d i t i o n , y o u r garden doesn't have to be all in o n e place. Y o u no l o n g e r have to rototill or w a t e r o n e b i g g a r d e n area all at o n c e . Y o u can split up y o u r S F G so that a b o x or t w o are located next to the kitchen door, while more boxes can be located elsewhere in the yard. Small, i n d i v i d u a l garden boxes a l l o w y o u m u c h m o r e f l e x i b i l i t y i n d e t e r m i n i n g l o c a t i o n . N o w y o u r garden can b e located near w h e r e y o u w a l k a n d sit, or w h e r e y o u can v i e w it f r o m the house. It c a n even be located in a patio or p o o l setting, where y o u relax. Your S F G becomes a c o m p a n i o n rather than a burden.
The key to success of the All New Square Foot Gardening method is to avoid the poor qualities of local soil by building up rather than ' down.
29
2 N e w DirectionUp, Not Down!

Build Up, Don't Dig Down
T h e s e c o n d i m p r o v e m e n t involves l o c a t i n g y o u r g a r d e n o n top o f y o u r existing soil rather t h a n d i g g i n g down. M o s t o f o u r readers c o m p l a i n a b o u t the terrible soil in their areas. In fact, as I lecture a r o u n d the c o u n t r y a n d the w o r l d , the q u e s t i o n I hear m o s t is, " W h a t c a n w e d o a b o u t o u r local soil? I t i s s o hard t o w o r k a n d garden in." T h e original Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g b o o k explained h o w to dig d o w n 6 inches a n d i m p r o v e y o u r existing soil by a d d i n g equal amounts o f really g o o d ingredients. Even t h o u g h y o u had t o d o that o n l y the first year a n d it p r o d u c e d a fairly g o o d soil, p e o p l e c o m p l a i n e d that it was still a lot of w o r k involving heavy tools and a great deal of effort. Everyone w a n t s a simple, easy w a y to garden. So, back to the d r a w i n g board. T h i s g o t me to t h i n k i n g . C o u l d I find a better w a y ? S o , I asked myself, w h y d o w e really n e e d t o i m p r o v e o u r existing soil i f it's s o bad? C o u l d n ' t we just start w i t h a perfect soil m i x a b o v e g r o u n d a n d eliminate the n e e d t o ever d i g u p o r i m p r o v e o u r existing b a c k y a r d soil? Y o u p r o b a b l y c o u l d if y o u r g a r d e n wasn't so b i g . . . b u t hey, S F G isn't b i g . In fact, it's one-fifth the size of c o n v e n t i o n a l gardens. S o , i f w e c o u l d f i n d a perfect soil m i x , there w o u l d b e n o m o r e d i g g i n g a n d no m o r e tilling. D o e s n ' t that m a k e a l o t of sense? It became possible w i t h A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g to have a v e r y condensed n o - w o r k gardening m e t h o d a n d never have to be c o n cerned again a b o u t w h a t k i n d o f soil y o u have i n y o u r yard. W o w !
No Sweat
Just t h i n k o f t h e i m p l i c a t i o n s i f y o u forget a b o u t t r y i n g t o i m p r o v e y o u r existing soil. I t n o l o n g e r matters w h a t k i n d o f soil y o u have! U s e the t i m e y o u save to start a c o m p o s t pile instead. If y o u start w i t h a perfect soil m i x , it w i l l save a lot of t i m e a n d m o n e y . Y o u don't have t o h a v e y o u r soil a n a l y z e d a n y m o r e , a n d y o u don't h a v e to have a pH test m a d e . . . y o u don't even have to k n o w w h a t p H is! Y o u don't h a v e t o b u y a n y h e a v y tools o r g o t o the expense o f h a v i n g s o m e o n e rototill y o u r g a r d e n every single year. Y o u don't have t o b u y special ingredients t o l o o s e n y o u r clay soil o r solidify y o u r s a n d y soil. A n d m o s t i m p o r t a n t l y , y o u n o l o n g e r h a v e t o d o a n y hard w o r k . You'll h a v e t o find a n o t h e r w a y t o get s o m e exerciseso go m o w the lawn. T h i s major advance in h o m e g a r d e n i n g c h a n g e s all o f the rules o f g a r d e n i n g a n d eliminates all o f the hard w o r k a n d undesirable parts o f s i n g l e - r o w gardens. Hey, gardening can be fun now!
30
So, if y o u are n o t g o i n g to use y o u r existing soil but instead use a perfect soil mix, w h a t is it a n d h o w a n d where do y o u get it?
So, if y o u are n o t g o i n g to use y o u r existing soil but instead use a perfect soil mix, w h a t is it a n d h o w a n d where do y o u get it?
N e w S o i l - M e l ' s Mix
What's In It?
T h e r e are three characteristics of a perfect g r o w i n g m i x . First of all, it's lightweight, so it is easy to w o r k w i t h a n d easy for plants to g r o w in. N e x t , it is n u t r i e n t - r i c h a n d has all the minerals a n d trace elements that plants need w i t h o u t a d d i n g fertilizers. Finally, it holds moisture, yet drains well. After m a n y experiments, I f o u n d that three of my favorite ingredients m a d e the perfect m i x w h e n c o m b i n e d in equal portions: h Peat MossAvailable at any garden center or supermarket.
l
V3 VermiculiteBuy the coarse grade in large 4-cubic-foot bags at a n y garden center or h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t store. P h o n e ahead to be sure it's available in that size.
h Blended C o m p o s t I f y o u don't have y o u r o w n c o m p o s t
operation, then b u y bags of c o m p o s t at the garden center to get started. T h e n , start y o u r o w n c o m p o s t pile as soon as possible. I'll explain some simple steps for f o o l p r o o f c o m p o s t i n g later in the b o o k . However, o n e w o r d of caution here: Y o u must have a blended c o m p o s t , so don't b u y all the same kind. P i c k o u t o n e b a g o f this and o n e b a g o f that. But, m o r e a b o u t that i n C h a p t e r 5.
What Do These Ingredients Do?

A l l three of these ingredients are n a t u r a l n o t manufactured. T h e y all drain well, so there are no puddles to w a t e r l o g the plant roots; b u t they also h o l d large a m o u n t s of moisture so the plants will g r o w well. T h i s m i x is a pleasure to w o r k w i t h , has a light fluffy texture, a n d smells g o o d . T h e first t w o ingredients have n o nutrients, b u t the l a s t c o m p o s t - i s l o a d e d w i t h all the nutrients a n d minerals that y o u could imagine. C o m p o s t i s the m o s t i m p o r t a n t i n g r e d i e n t o f the three, a n d m a k i n g y o u r o w n i s g o o d for b o t h the e n v i r o n m e n t a n d the g a r d e n . T h i s is a b o u t as o r g a n i c as y o u c a n get. If y o u don't t h i n k this perfect soil m i x will w o r k in the garden, ask yourself, " W h a t do professional greenhouse growers use for g r o w i n g crops o n their benches? D o t h e y g o o u t a n d d i g u p the fields for soil?" O f course n o t . Professional growers m i x u p a perfect p o t t i n g soil f r o m several o t h e r ingredients a n d never use local o u t s i d e soil.
SFG, New and Improved W h e n y o u b u y a w i n d o w b o x a t the store, w h a t d o y o u f i l l i t w i t h y o u r yard soil? O f course not. Y o u b u y a b a g o f perfect p o t t i n g soil. S o w h y can't w e d o the s a m e for o u r v e g e t a b l e garden? W e l l , there are t w o reasons: One, n o o n e ever t h o u g h t o f i t a n d two, i t w o u l d b e prohibitively expensive for the typical single-row garden that everyone has been using all of these years. S o , h o w c a n w e d o i t n o w ? Because S F G reduces the g a r d e n size d o w n to o n l y 20 p e r c e n t (that's one-fifth as large), so it is n o w possible to c o n s i d e r u s i n g a perfect soil f r o m the v e r y start. An additional reason is f o u n d in the next major i m p r o v e m e n t to Square Foot G a r d e n i n g .
31
"Go deep," they said. "Don't bother," I said.

For years, experts said y o u r garden soil had to be improved at least 12 inches deep; s o m e even said 18 inches. B u t my experiments were proving otherwise, especially w h e n I used g o o d h o m e m a d e c o m p o s t as one-third of the m i x . I asked myself, " I f six inches of perfect soil is g o o d e n o u g h for w i n d o w b o x e s a n d c o m m e r c i a l greenhouse benches, w h y n o t i n backyard gardens?" A n d w h y dilute i t b y a d d i n g the m i x to p o o r existing soil? W h y n o t use this perfect soil m i x in y o u r garden and forget all a b o u t the soil underneath? W e l l , the experts still p o o h p o o h e d the idea. B u t guess w h a t ? I t works! O f course, e v e r y o n e realizes that y o u couldn't do that in a h u g e , old-fashioned, single-row garden or even in raised b e d gardening, b u t it can easily be d o n e in a small-space Square F o o t G a r d e n ! C a n y o u really g r o w vegetables a n d flowers in o n l y 6 inches of soil regardless of h o w g o o d it is? I've been d o i n g it for the last ten years i n m y display a n d h o m e garden, a n d i t really w o r k s . O f course in my lectures w h e n I m e n t i o n the 6 inches, I can see the audience squirming in their seats, heads shaking and hands rising w i t h the usual question, " H o w can y o u g r o w l o n g carrots or potatoes in just 6 inches of soil?" It's a g o o d q u e s t i o n , so we d e v e l o p e d a special feature of S F G w h e r e y o u b u i l d a 1-foot x 1-foot b o x one foot tall for l o n g root crops. W h y o n l y 6 inches deep? W h y n o t b e safer a n d g o 1 2 inches deep? T h e m a i n reason is there is no need to do so. In addition, it is m u c h cheaper, easier, a n d less w o r k . Just t h i n k i t is one-half of the cost and one-half of the w o r k , so w h y d o u b l e the depth? B u t if you're still skeptical go ahead a n d use y o u r time a n d m o n e y to go 12 inches deep, b u t it's really n o t necessary.
a
We owe much of our love of gardening to the simplicity of SFG."

Manjajrom Oregon
32
T h e next question is, " H o w c o m e all of the experts have been so w r o n g for so long?" It is n o t that they were w r o n g , it is just everyone in the garden industry h a d trouble t h i n k i n g outside the b o x or even questioning all the traditional m e t h o d s . Stuck in a rut they were a n d in a single-row rut at that! Here's a n o t h e r startling revelation I am g o i n g to m a k e . It is g o i n g t o s h o c k a n d d i s m a y the g a r d e n i n g w o r l d , b u t y o u are g o i n g to love it.
No FertilizerYou Don't Need It
S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g needs n o fertilizer ever! H o w c a n that be? A f t e r all, the g a r d e n i n g i n d u s t r y i s b u i l t o n u s i n g fertilizer. T h e original S F G b o o k e x p l a i n e d all a b o u t f e r t i l i z e r o r g a n i c a n d c h e m i c a l t y p e s h o w t o measure a n d rate it; all a b o u t N P K a n d w h a t that m e a n s ; a n d the list goes o n a n d o n . T h a t w a s necessary because a t that t i m e w e w e r e just i m p r o v i n g o u r existing soils, a n d t h e y still n e e d e d fertilizer. A l l the experts agreed. B u t m y o w n e x p e r i m e n t s a n d t h o u g h t s a b o u t an all new out-of-the-box idea o f n o t i m p r o v i n g y o u r existing soil b u t rather o f starting w i t h a perfect soil m i x w a s w o r k i n g so w e l l that I b e g a n to consider a n o t h e r n e w i d e a t h a t y o u don't n e e d t o a d d fertilizer. T h e c o m p o s t w a s p r o v i d i n g all o f the nutrients a n d trace e l e m e n t s the plants n e e d e d . Besides, c o m p o s t w a s all-natural a n d couldn't b u r n o r h a r m the plants. T h e p r o o f o f the p u d d i n g w a s t o just l o o k a t my g a r d e n . It w a s o n e of the best gardens I h a v e ever h a d a n d has r e m a i n e d so ever since. T h i s was w h e n I was able to simplify my original book's formula for the perfect soil m i x t o o n l y three ingredients: / 3 each o f peat
]
moss, vermiculite, a n d blended c o m p o s t , a n d c o m p l e t e l y eliminate the use and expense of fertilizer. So m u c h simpler than the original one-page formula and w h a t a savings! W e l l , again, all the experts p o o h - p o o h e d t h e idea a n d still d o , b u t guess w h a t ? It works! I haven't used a n y k i n d of fertilizer in m y h o m e , display, o r d e m o n s t r a t i o n gardens for m o r e t h a n ten years. If y o u go to o u r w e b s i t e at www.squarefootgardening.com, y o u ' l l see h o w b o u n t i f u l a n d beautiful the gardens l o o k . A n d this is n o t just g a r d e n i n g the first year b u t year after year after year. Just t h i n k n o more tilling, no more digging, and no more fertilizer! T h e o n l y t h i n g we ever a d d to o u r soil is a little m o r e c o m p o s t . Is this great or what? N o w all w e need i s s o m e w a y t o h o l d o r contain o u r a b o v e g r o u n d 6 inches of perfect soil mix. So, h o w a b o u t a box?
33
6 New B o x e s - A b o v e the Ground

I t h i n k h a v i n g y o u r g a r d e n c o n t a i n e d in a b o x adds u n i f o r m i t y and structure, n o t o n l y t o y o u r garden b u t t o y o u r life. O n c e limits are p l a c e d on a l m o s t a n y t h i n g , y o u will find it m u c h easier t o take care o f a n d therefore y o u will b e m o r e c o m f o r t a b l e w i t h i t and enjoy it m o r e . T h e basic 4 x 4 - f o o t bottomless boxes are easy to build o u t of c o m m o n lumber, bricks, blocks, or even stone. T h e s e small boxes, filled w i t h the perfect soil mix, will g r o w five times as m u c h as the same space in a single-row garden. So, y o u don't need m a n y of the boxes. T h e r e are no weeds to hoe. No existing soil to till. W h y , o n c e your boxes are built and y o u r perfect soil is added, there is virtually no w o r k at all. I f y o u place the b o x o n t o p o f the existing g r o u n d , y o u eliminate all o f the usual g a r d e n i n g concerns a n d w o r k o f i m p r o v i n g y o u r existing soil. It also eliminates the great deal of g a r d e n i n g k n o w ledge that y o u w o u l d need i f y o u were g o i n g t o b e c o n c e r n e d w i t h using y o u r existing soil. You'll see as we go a l o n g that there are so m a n y advantages o f n o t using y o u r existing soil. You'll w o n d e r w h y no one ever t h o u g h t of it before. T h e 4 x 4 - f o o t boxes have been chosen because it's a size y o u can w a l k a r o u n d a n d easily reach into to tend y o u r plants; this eliminates the need for s t e p p i n g on the g r o w i n g soil a n d p a c k i n g it d o w n , w h i c h then eliminates the need
Once you build the basic 4v.4 SFG box with rotated corners, add six inches of Mel's Mix, and add the square foot grid. Now, you're ready to plant.
34
to d i g or loosen it. See h o w e v e r y t h i n g in S F G is interrelated a n d w o r k s so w e l l together? For bigger gardens, y o u can always p u t s o m e of the boxes e n d to e n d to create a 4 x 8-foot or a 4 x 12-foot garden b o x that y o u will still be able to w a l k around, yet reach in. If y o u r b o x is located next to a wall, fence, or building, keep the boxes o n l y t w o feet w i d e so y o u can reach all the w a y to the back. T h e y can be a n y length. Boxes can be m a d e f r o m a n y type of w o o d . T h e best is free w o o d that is f o u n d at a construction site. Just ask the foreman of the project if y o u can have the scrap 2 x 6 - i n c h boards. I f y o u are g o i n g t o b u y y o u r l u m b e r , boxes c a n be m a d e f r o m p i n e or fir for the least cost, or cedar or r e d w o o d for l o n g e r lasting use. I f y o u d e c i d e t o treat o r p a i n t the w o o d , be careful n o t to paint inside the boxes w h e r e the Mel's M i x c o m e s into contact w i t h the w o o d ; y o u don't w a n t a n y t h i n g harmful to leach into the soil. I do n o t r e c o m m e n d using pretreated w o o d for the same reason.
New Aisles-Comfortable Width
T h e w i d t h o f y o u r aisles i s a n o t h e r i m p r o v e m e n t I h a v e m a d e for the A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d . T h i s i s m o r e i m p o r t a n t for c o m f o r t , safety, a n d looks, than for efficiency. If y o u notice the garden on the cover of the original Square Foot Gardeningbook, there were no boxes and the aisles were 1 x 1 2 - i n c h boards separating the 4 x 4 - f o o t areas. I designed it that w a y to be the m o s t space-efficient b u t , a s s o m e o n e o n c e said, " T h i s i s o n e t i m e w h e n M e l w a s t o o efficient!" B u t the w o o d was free, so hey, can y o u b l a m e me?
Straight and Narrow

T h e 1 2 - i n c h w i d e board was difficult t o maneuver o n , and y o u h a d to k e e p a p r e t t y g o o d b a l a n c e to stay u p r i g h t . I f o u n d that the average gardener needs t o h a v e m o r e r o o m t o m o v e a b o u t o n t h a n those 12 inches. In addition, y o u couldn't get close to each 4 x 4 - f o o t p l a n t i n g area if y o u w a n t e d to use a w h e e l b a r r o w , g a r d e n cart, or harvest basket. C a n y o u just p i c t u r e t w o p e o p l e w o r k i n g i n that garden w i t h 1 2 - i n c h w i d e paths, and one says to the other, "Excuse m e , I need to get t h r o u g h . " C a n y o u imagine the answer to that?
The Ideal Width

So w h a t is the ideal aisle w i d t h ? T w o feet is still a little t i g h t , so I r e c o m m e n d a m i n i m u m of three feet between y o u r boxes. It turned o u t that for accessibility, kneeling, w o r k i n g , and harvesting, the ideal distance w a s 3 or even 4 feet b e t w e e n boxes. In fact, if y o u r g a r d e n has several b o x e s , y o u c a n v a r y the aisles. Play a r o u n d w i t h s o m e ideas on p a p e r t h e n , o n c e y o u r boxes are built (and before y o u fill
SFG, New and Improved them w i t h soil, I should add), y o u can m o v e t h e m a b o u t until y o u get t h e m just right. T h i n k of it as arranging furniture in y o u r yard.
35
Dress It Up
T h e aisle space b e t w e e n y o u r boxes can be left in grass or covered w i t h any type o f g r o u n d cover. I n o u r T V show, w e tried all sorts o f things to create s o m e v e r y interesting l o o k i n g aisles. At other times, we just removed any weeds or grass, then laid d o w n w e e d cloth a n d covered it w i t h materials that were comfortable for w a l k i n g on such as crushed stone, c o m p o s t , or g r o u n d bark.
Forget what the experts have been telling us for years, fill youi boxes with just 6 inches of Mel's Mix, add a grid, and start planting! You won't be sorry; in fact, you'll be amazed at the results.
8 N e w Grids
Prominent and Permanent
W h e n I w r o t e the first b o o k on Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m o r e than twenty-five years ago, I advocated laying o u t a 12 x 12-inch grid for the garden. T h e n , in my travels a r o u n d the country, I heard a lot of people say, " O h , I do Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , " or "I have a Square Foot G a r d e n . " B u t w h e n I w e n t to see t h e m , the size was right b u t they had no grid! In our introductory film, we s h o w the people in o u r class h o w a 4 x4-foot garden looks w i t h o u t a grid a n d ask t h e m , " H o w m a n y plants could y o u plant there? H o w m a n y different crops?" T h e y draw a blank because it looks like a small area that isn't g o i n g to contain very m u c h . As s o o n as we lay d o w n the grid, they suddenly light up and say, "Aha! I see! Sixteen spaces, so it'll take sixteen different crops! Later, as s o o n as o n e square is harvested, I can a d d a trowel full of c o m p o s t and replant that square foot w i t h a different crop w i t h o u t disturbing a n y t h i n g else a r o u n d it." Bingo!They see the light.
36
T h e r e are many, m a n y interrelated reasons for the "different crop in every Square Foot" rule, and y o u will see and understand these as we go along. T h e y deal w i t h nutrients used, limiting over-ambitious p l a n t i n g , staggered harvests, w e e d a n d pest c o n t r o l , b e a u t y o f the garden, c o m p a n i o n planting, simplification of crop rotation, cutting p l a n t i n g t i m e in half, a n d m a n y m o r e factors that result in a v e r y unusual and innovative gardening system. W h e n y o u have no grid, y o u r garden has no character. If you're having visitors over, they m a y n o t even notice y o u r garden if it's laid out in plain beds. But if it's a Square Foot G a r d e n w i t h very p r o m i n e n t and visible grids, they will say, "Hey, what's that in y o u r yard? It looks great!"
Grid Materials
In the past, whenever I used string or twine as a grid, it eventually got dirty, rotted, and finally broke. In addition, y o u had to drive in nails to tie the string to, and it just never looked g o o d . I talked w i t h m a n y others w h o had the same bad experience so I experimented w i t h all k i n d s of different materials for m a k i n g grids. If I c o u l d c o n d e n s e thirty years of experience into my current advice, it w o u l d b e d o n ' t use string or any other floppy material. A firm, rigid, p r o m i n e n t , and visual grid permanently laid on every one of y o u r boxes will m a k e all the difference in the w o r l d as others see it but mostly in h o w y o u use and enjoy y o u r garden. W i t h a very visible grid, y o u r garden takes on a u n i q u e character. It will n o t only look spectacular, but you'll be able to immediately visualize y o u r planting squares. Without a grid, your garden is not a Square Foot Garden.
9 New Idea
Don't Waste Seeds
New Seed Planting Idea

W h e n I first started gardening, I f o u n d the traditional m e t h o d of p o u r i n g o u t an entire p a c k e t of seeds a l o n g a single r o w w a s so wasteful that I couldn't believe that's the w a y we've always d o n e it. Didn't the pioneers have to carry their o w n seeds all the w a y across the country? T h e y couldn't order a n e w batch over the Internet from a seed c o m p a n y every year, could they? Didn't they teach everyone to be frugal a n d n o t wasteful? W h y w o u l d a n y o n e tell us to waste a w h o l e p a c k e t of seeds a l o n g a l o n g , lonely, single row, especially k n o w i n g that we w o u l d have to go back and thin o u t 95 percent of the sprouted plants in order to leave only o n e plant every few inches. D i d no one ever think, "Let's just plant a few seeds every 3, 4, or 6 inches?" I guess it t o o k s o m e o n e outside of the garden industry to think of it.
When your seeds sprout from the pinch of seeds you planted in your squares, snip out all but one of them.
38
In the first S F G b o o k , I a d v o c a t e d single seed p l a n t i n g at the proper s p a c i n g for that particular plant, b u t m a n y p e o p l e f o u n d it tedious a n d even difficult, especially w i t h small, u n u s u a l l y shaped seeds. Besides, as s o m e o n e once teased me and said, " I f a packet of leaf lettuce contains one thousand seeds and I o n l y plant four in each square f o o t , h o w o l d will I be before it is t i m e to b u y a n o t h e r packet?" She'll have to leave her seeds in her will! So back to the d r a w i n g board I w e n t . H o w a b o u t just a few seeds in each h o l e j u s t a pinch of seeds? After testing this idea w i t h m a n y p e o p l e a n d c h e c k i n g their dexterity a n d ability to p i c k up just a p i n c h (two or three seeds), this seemed to be the answer.
A Snip, Not a Tug

B u t I was against t h i n n i n g t h a t ' s w h e n y o u pull out all the seedlings except the one plant y o u w a n t to g r o w to maturity. T h i n n i n g is a lot
The best feature of the All New Square Foot Gardening method is that it makes gardening accessible to everyone.
SFG, New and Improved o f w o r k a n d also seems t o d i s t u r b the roots o f the r e m a i n i n g plant, a n d that's n o t g o o d . B u t t h e n I t h o u g h t o f a n absolutely perfect solution. I f y o u p l a n t just a f e w s e e d s a p i n c h - i n e a c h h o l e a n d t w o o r three seedlings c o m e u p , y o u j u s t take a pair o f scissors a n d snip off all b u t the strongest one. T h a t eliminates any disturbance of the plant y o u w a n t to keep, a n d you're n o t t e m p t e d to replant the others. T h e o n l y t h i n g y o u need to do is just muster the courage to make that initial snip a n d it's all over. S o n o w w e ' v e b e e n able t o i m p r o v e the single-seed p l a n t i n g and, at the same time, end up w i t h o n e strong plant in each l o c a t i o n , w h i c h i s j u s t w h a t w e w a n t e d . A t t h e s a m e t i m e we're n o t w a s t i n g a l o t o f seeds. A f t e r p l a n t i n g that square f o o t , p u t the packet in safe storage, a n d if stored p r o p e r l y that p a c k e t w i l l be g o o d next year, a n d the year after, a n d the year after. M a n y seeds last u p t o f i v e years i f stored properly. (So, h o w c o m e n o o n e ever told us that before?)
39
10. New Opportunities Tabletop Gardens

Make Them Portable
N o w that w e n o l o n g e r n e e d t o i m p r o v e o u r existing s o i l a n d S F G takes u p o n l y 2 0 p e r c e n t o f the space for 1 0 0 p e r c e n t o f the h a r v e s t a n d w e n e e d o n l y 6 inches o f l i g h t w e i g h t soil m i x , w e can b u i l d a 4 x 4 - f o o t b o x , a n d a d d a p l y w o o d b o t t o m drilled w i t h drainage holes. T h i s means y o u can carry it to a n y location y o u w a n t , even m o v i n g it to suit weather, climate, an event, a situation, or even a person's needs, abilities, or disabilities. If the size or w e i g h t seems too m u c h for y o u to handle, t h i n k a b o u t using a 3 x 3-foot, a 2 x 2foot, or even a 2 x 4-foot b o x for ease in m o v i n g .
James, Bring Out the Good Boxes

Smaller sized S F G boxes c a n b e c o m e w o n d e r f u l patio boxes, and it's even possible to p l a n t several so there is always o n e or t w o w i t h flowers in full b l o o m or salad crops ready for harvest. T h e rest can be k e p t s o m e w h e r e less visible. W i t h a system of rotation, there will always be a f e w garden boxes ready to b r i n g o u t to s h o w off. There's n o t h i n g like the visual i m p a c t of a beautifully p l a n t e d b o x filled w i t h vegetables, flowers, and/or herbs. If you're g i v i n g a talk or d o i n g a p r e s e n t a t i o n on g a r d e n i n g , t h e " s e e i n g is b e l i e v i n g " t e c h n i q u e w i l l c i n c h y o u r talk. A n d j u s t t h i n k , y o u w o n ' t h a v e t o a n s w e r the usual q u e s t i o n a b o u t S F G , like " H o w o n earth c a n y o u g r o w a g a r d e n i n o n l y 6 i n c h e s o f soil?" O r , " H o w c a n y o u g r o w w i t h o u t fertilizer?" N o w , y o u j u s t p o i n t a n d smile!
-K)
R E A S O N S TO M O V E YOOR PORTABLE SFG BOX

WEATHER-To protect it from: EVENTS-Move it to:
Frost Thundershowers Hurricanes Hail Snow Wind Heavy rain Intense sun
Enhance or decorate for a poolside party or barbeque Behind the garage for a start-up nursery
SITUATIONS-Place the box:
On a tabletop for a sit-down gardener In the garage if you're expecting extreme weather On the deck to clear the yard for a football g a m e
PERSONS-You can:
CLIMATE-Move your SFG box for:
Take it to Grandma's for a birthday gift Take it to school for show-and-tell Take it to class for teaching SFG Take it to school for the science fair
More shade for a spring crop as the weather gets hotter More sun in early spring More shade in summertime in desert areas
Best of All
S o there y o u have i t t h e ten n e w major i m p r o v e m e n t s t o the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d . Each o n e makes the entire system m o r e productive, the w o r k m u c h easier, and the cost of gardening lower. At the same time, the beginner finds gardening m u c h easier to understand. I t h i n k Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g ' s best feature is that it n o w m a k e s g a r d e n i n g available to just a b o u t a n y o n e y o u can t h i n k of, regardless of their age, circumstance, location, ability, or d i s a b i l i t y anyone, anywhere, can now garden u s i n g the A l l N e w Square Foot Gardening method.
Plan Your Garden

This
chapter is g o i n g to talk about three basic c o m p o n e n t s o f Square Foot G a r d e n i n g . Size Location Design
Size
Y o u r g a r d e n w i l l b e laid o u t i n square o r rectangular b o x e s separated b y w a l k i n g aisles. B u i l d y o u r b o x e s f r o m materials like w o o d , bricks, o r b l o c k s . I f y o u d o n ' t like the idea o f c o m m o n w o o d , w h i c h w i l l e v e n t u a l l y rot o r be eaten by t e r m i t e s , use a m o r e e x p e n s i v e w o o d like c e d a r o r r e d w o o d . Y o u c a n e v e n use s o m e o f the m a n m a d e c o m p o s i t e " w o o d " o r recycled plastic o r v i n y l . T h e w o o d I like best is free w o o d . Y o u c a n u s u a l l y get it f r o m any c o n s t r u c t i o n site, b u t a l w a y s ask the foreman first. I f y o u d e c i d e t o use l u m b e r , you'll b e h a p p y t o k n o w the advantage of 4 x 4 gardens is that all l u m b e r comes in 8-foot lengths. M o s t h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t centers will cut it in half for y o u at little or 1 0 cost. Your boxes can b e m a d e f r o m just a b o u t any material except treated w o o d because the chemicals used to treat the w o o d are n o t something y o u w a n t leaching into y o u r garden.
How Much Is Enough?

If you're figuring a S F G for an adult, r e m e m b e r that: 1 . O n e 4 x 4 Square Foot G a r d e n b o x (equal t o 1 6 square feet) will supply e n o u g h p r o d u c e to m a k e a salad for one person every day of the g r o w i n g season. 2 . O n e m o r e 4 x 4 b o x will supply the daily supper vegetables for that person.
42
3 . Just one m o r e 4 x 4 b o x will supply that person w i t h extra o f everything for preserving, special crops, s h o w i n g off, or giving away. S o , each adult needs o n e , t w o , o r three large boxes o f 4 x 4 , d e p e n d i n g o n h o w m u c h t h e y w a n t . I n square feet, that i s 1 6 , 3 2 , o r 4 8 square feet.
If you're figuring a S F G for a child, r e m e m b e r that: 1 . O n e 3 x 3 Square Foot G a r d e n box (equal t o 9 square feet) will supply e n o u g h produce to m a k e a salad for o n e child every day of the g r o w i n g season. 2 . O n e m o r e 3 x 3 b o x will supply supper vegetables for that child every day. 3 . Just o n e m o r e 3 x 3 b o x will s u p p l y the child w i t h extra o f e v e r y t h i n g for s h o w - a n d - t e l l or science projects at s c h o o l , special crops, s h o w i n g off, or g i v i n g away. S o , each c h i l d needs o n e , t w o , o r three small boxes o f 3 x 3 , d e p e n d i n g o n h o w m u c h they will eat. I n square feet, that's 9 , 1 8 , o r 2 7 square feet. Suggestion: Since the kids will g r o w into teenagers, y o u m a y just w a n t t o m a k e everyone's box a 4 x 4 . O n the other hand, different sizes m a k e the garden l o o k interesting and m o r e personable. T h e 3 x 3 can later on be stacked on top of a 4 x 4 to start a p y r a m i d g a r d e n b u t m o r e about designing y o u r garden later.
Your Family-Your Garden

A c c o r d i n g to surveys of h o m e o w n e r s , the average conventional single-row garden measures 20 feet w i d e by 35 feet long, w h i c h equals 7 0 0 square feet. To g r o w the same a m o u n t , a Square Foot G a r d e n will need o n l y 20 percent or one-fifth of that g r o w i n g space to equal 1 4 0 square feet. That's quite a difference isn't it?
Plan Your Garden
43
YOUR FAMILY
Number of Boxes or Square Feet Mom Dad Grandpa or Grandma Brother Sister Pets* Other Salad
YOUR GARDEN
Supper Extra Total
*Well, some dogs eat veggies and cats love catnip.
You can enter the number of boxes-big for adults, small for kids or square feet.
Down to Size
W h e n e v e r I'm g i v i n g a lecture I like to illustrate the difference between a c o n v e n t i o n a l garden a n d a Square F o o t G a r d e n . I'll w a l k d o w n the m i d d l e of whatever r o o m we're in and, standing in the center, stretch o u t my arms sideways, as I say, " I f this w h o l e r o o m were o u r garden, w h e n y o u switch t o Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , you'll n o longer need everything o n this side." T h a t cuts the r o o m in half. T h e n I turn to the side that remains, cut it in half w i t h my arms again, and say, " E v e r y t h i n g on that side we don't n e e d . " T h a t cuts that half in half again. A n d t h e n I a d d , " T h a t ' s still t o o m u c h r o o m . W e c a n still c u t d o w n this r e m a i n i n g corner even m o r e s o w e e n d u p w i t h o n l y 2 0 percent o f the total r o o m . W e can g r o w a s m u c h in this size of a Square F o o t G a r d e n as we previously c o u l d in this entire r o o m . " Try it in the r o o m you're in right n o w and see if y o u aren't impressed. Y o u suddenly begin to think of the reduced a m o u n t of w o r k , equipment, supplies, a n d fencing. T h e n y o u begin to see m a n y of the advantages of being able to locate the garden where y o u wish and all the possibilities in y o u r yard. Visualizing the great difference of space needed for a Square Foot G a r d e n is really the first step in learning a n d appreciating the entire system. T h e n y o u can b e g i n t o take advantage o f all the o t h e r attributes y o u will discover w i t h S F G .
44
All That in One Box

H o w m u c h salad c o u l d y o u pick every day from this little garden? More than you can imagine. So as an illustration, I've listed below examples o f w h a t y o u can harvest from just o n e 4 x 4 b o x i n o n e spring season:
Start Small
O n c e y o u decide on the final size and layout of y o u r garden, keep in m i n d y o u don't have to build the entire garden right at the start. T r y a three-phase plan instead. I f y o u b u i l d a n d p l a n t just o n e - t h i r d o f y o u r u l t i m a t e garden boxes a n d g r o w for o n e s e a s o n f o r e x a m p l e , the spring s e a s o n y o u can then see h o w m u c h you'll harvest and see if you've correctly j u d g e d the a m o u n t y o u really need. T h e n y o u can go into phase t w o , or the s u m m e r crop, and build more boxes according to y o u r layout o r master plan. A t the e n d o f the s u m m e r c r o p , m o v e o n t o phase three, b u i l d i n g m o r e boxes if y o u still need t h e m , to prepare for p l a n t i n g a fall c r o p .
Plan Your Garden Yes, it's o k a y to lay o u t the w h o l e area and to design it for the ultimate, d e p e n d i n g o n h o w b i g y o u r family i s a n d h o w m u c h y o u think y o u w a n t to harvest. Just don't do everything the first season. I've seen so m a n y people start o u t t o o ambitiously, and they b e c o m e o v e r w h e l m e d because t h e y u n d e r e s t i m a t e h o w m u c h t h e y c a n actually g r o w in such a small area. T h e i r gardens are actually larger than they need so there is m o r e to take care o f a n d all while they're learning a n e w system. Take it easy and start small. If y o u have a single-row garden and don't really w a n t to give it up yet, I suggest t a k i n g o n e small corner of y o u r o l d - f a s h i o n e d g a r d e n and p l a n t i n g i t i n j u s t o n e o r t w o 4 x 4 boxes, m i x the correct soil (don't just shovel y o u r existing soil i n t o the boxes n o m a t t e r h o w g o o d y o u t h i n k i t is), p u t d o w n the grid, a n d try p l a n t i n g this way. N e x t year, I'll b e t y o u ' l l p r o b a b l y be ready to c o n v e r t y o u r entire garden into a S F G .
45
Overall Size of the Boxes

O n c e y o u decide on the overall size and n u m b e r of boxes, the next step is to determine the d i m e n s i o n of the aisles. We'll cover this in m o r e detail later, b u t for n o w y o u c a n figure on a 3 - f o o t aisle between all 4-foot boxes. Y o u c o u l d also decide n o w if y o u w a n t to join several boxes together e n d to e n d to create a rectangular b o x of 4 x 8, or 4 x 1 2 . T h i s will save a lot of yard space b u t y o u m a y n o t like the look or y o u m a y find w a l k i n g a r o u n d a l o n g b o x inconvenient. I w o u l d never m a k e a b o x longer than 16 feet or you'll e n d up trying to cross it in the m i d d l e a n d t h e n w h o o p s ! t h e r e y o u are, stepping in y o u r garden. I h o p e no o n e saw y o u ! If y o u are g o i n g to be p u t t i n g some boxes against a fence or wall a n d can't w a l k all around to reach in, those boxes s h o u l d be o n l y 2 feet w i d e . Everyone wants to m a k e them 3 feet w i d e (I will never k n o w w h y ) b u t then they always c o m e back and c o m p l a i n it was t o o w i d e because they couldn't reach in that far.
"Gardening has always seemed too overwhelming. Now with your method, I cant wait to start."
Alejiendrafrom Venezuela
Don't Forget the Aisles

T h e w h o l e idea o f S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g i s t o w a l k a r o u n d y o u r garden boxes a n d reach i n t o t e n d y o u r plants. T h i s way, the soil never gets p a c k e d d o w n a n d y o u eliminate digging it up to loosen it again. In fact, the o n l y tool y o u really need o n c e y o u fill y o u r boxes w i t h Mel's M i x is a small h a n d trowel. (It doesn't have to be the strong, expensive k i n d f r o m S w e d e n . T h e o n e dollar variety w o r k s just fine and can last a lifetime.) So h o w w i d e should y o u r aisles be? It depends a lot on h o w m u c h r o o m y o u have a n d w h a t k i n d o f a l o o k y o u w a n t for y o u r garden. I f you're g o i n g t o have m a n y b o x e s r e m e m b e r , w e suggest y o u begin using only a small n u m b e r because y o u can always a d d m o r e l a t e r
46
U.I I I I I I
THINK TWICE Your aisles should be 3 feet wide. I would caution against 2-foot wide aisles because once the plants grow, some cascade over the sides or get bushy. Those 2-foot aisles begin to shrink down to maybe just 18 or even 12 inches. At the beginning, when nothing is planted or growing, it's hard to imagine what it will look like in midsummer with everything growing like crazy and taking up a lot more space. Pretty soon you're sorry that you made the aisle so narrow. But by then, it's too late to move the boxes. Since SFG takes up so little room, why crowd all your boxes together? The more spacious your All New Square Foot Garden is, the more time you are likely to spend there enjoying it.
y o u m a y w a n t to have, for example, a center aisle that is 4 feet w i d e so y o u can easily get in w i t h a garden cart or wheelbarrow, or so several people can w a l k d o w n the aisle at once. (Hey, h o w a b o u t a garden party or a wedding?)
Plan Your Garden
47
Draw It Up
O n c e y o u get a rough idea of h o w m u c h space you'll need, m a k e a quick sketch m o r e or less to scale. Y o u don't need graph paper (unless you're a designer or w a n t to use it); just draw the 3-foot aisles slightly smaller t h a n the 4 - f o o t boxes. N o w you're ready t o t o u r y o u r p r o p e r t y l o o k i n g for nice o p e n areas near the h o u s e . Later in this chapter we'll discuss design in m o r e detail.
Location
T h e r e are five major things to l o o k for w h e n t o u r i n g y o u r property for a S F G location. U s e these as a test for the area you're considering for y o u r A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n . (Remember, convenience is king so m a k e sure y o u follow Rule 1.) 1. Place it close to the house for convenience. 2. Pick an area that gets six to eight hours of sunshine daily. 3. Stay clear of trees a n d shrubs w h e r e roots and shade m a y interfere. 4. T h e area s h o u l d n o t p u d d l e after a heavy rain. 5. T h e existing soil is n o t really important, since y o u won't be using it.
1. Close to the House

W i t h the A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g M e t h o d , y o u have s o m a n y m o r e places to p u t y o u r garden than ever before. K e e p in m i n d foot traffic a n d sites w h e r e y o u will often notice and enjoy y o u r garden. If y o u r S F G is near traffic paths, you'll w a l k past the garden m o r e often, hence take better care of it ( r e m e m b e r n o need t o c h a n g e i n t o g a r d e n i n g clothes, o r r u n a n d get s o m e tools). T h i s m e a n s it will always l o o k nice a n d the e n d result will be that you'll enjoy it m o r e as will every other m e m b e r of the family. ( C h a p t e r 10 covers different l o c a t i o n s like hillsides or heavily w o o d e d areas.)
I Can See Clearly Now

W h e n y o u t h i n k a b o u t observing y o u r garden, consider where y o u can frequently see i t e s p e c i a l l y from inside the house. W h a t r o o m are y o u in the most? C a n y o u see the garden f r o m there? T h e reason is n o t o n l y for y o u r pleasure b u t for protection. If it is close, y o u will see problems (like deer, w i l t i n g plants, a neighbor's d o g or cat) w h e n they begin rather than hours later after all the d a m a g e is d o n e . R e m e m b e r the Square F o o t G a r d e n w a y is to treat y o u r plants just like y o u treat y o u r c h i l d r e n o r g r a n d c h i l d r e n , a n d y o u k n o w y o u
48
w o u l d be glancing o u t the w i n d o w at t h e m . I believe that every plant out there is constantly seeking y o u r attention by saying, " L o o k at m e , l o o k at my n e w blossom, l o o k h o w big I'm getting." Isn't that just like children? P l a c e m e n t o f y o u r Square F o o t G a r d e n o p e n s u p s o m a n y d o o r s to the w a y y o u care for, enjoy, a p p r e c i a t e , a n d harvest it. Plus you'll s h o w i t o f f m o r e often a n d get the w h o l e family i n v o l v e d . It's even possible to split up y o u r g a r d e n a n d place s o m e of y o u r boxes in different locations for perhaps a different visual effect or a different p u r p o s e .
NURSERY RHYME?
One for the One for the One for the And one for blackbird. mouse. rabbit. the house.
So they're suggesting you plant four times as much as what you really want or need. Well, that's cute, but what a waste of resources and energy.
2. Sunlight
T h e next t h i n g to c o n s i d e r in selecting a l o c a t i o n is s u n l i g h t . G r o w i n g plants need sunlight. H o w m u c h they need depends on the type of plant. In general, large-flowering or fruiting plants need a l o t a t least eight hours a day. T h e s e types of plants are referred to as a " s u m m e r crop" or "warm-weather plants" and include most of the
Plan Your Garden favorite things that people grow, such as tomatoes, peppers, squash, beans, and sunflowers. In d e t e r m i n i n g the a m o u n t of s u n l i g h t an area receives, k e e p in m i n d that it c h a n g e s t h r o u g h o u t the year w i t h the seasons. In early spring a n d again in late fall the s u n is l o w e r in the sky t h a n in the summertime. A n d of course, there are n o t as m a n y hours of light in the day in the spring a n d fall as there are in the summer.
49
If You Only Have Shade

I f y o u have s h a d y c o n d i t i o n s a n d n o o t h e r place t o locate y o u r garden, y o u can still have a thriving garden b u t you'll have a limited selection of crops to grow. S o , obviously, you'd stay a w a y f r o m the tomatoes, peppers, a n d squash a n d plant the root a n d leaf crops like radishes, spinach, a n d lettuce. Of course, there are m a n y flowers a n d herbs that love shade, so c h e c k w i t h y o u r local nursery if y o u are in this situation.
Too Much Sun

Sometimes y o u m i g h t have a location that gets full sun all d a y l o n g , from sunup t o s u n d o w n . T h a t w o u l d actually b e too m u c h for s o m e o f the c o o l w e a t h e r a n d leafy c r o p s , a s w e l l a s m a n y f l o w e r s . O f course, w i t h a b i g , h u g e g a r d e n there's n o t m u c h y o u c a n d o . B u t w i t h a Square F o o t G a r d e n , it's v e r y easy to p r o v i d e shade by b u i l d i n g a s i m p l e s u p p o r t a n d c o v e r i n g the 4 x 4 b o x w i t h s o m e shade c l o t h . T h a t ' s all c o v e r e d in C h a p t e r 4.
CC
I want to
convert my entire garden to your method."
Guy from Utah
3. Avoid Trees and Shrubs

W h e n c h o o s i n g y o u r S F G location, stay clear o f trees a n d shrubs for two reasons. T h e first is shade as we just discussed. S e c o n d , if they sense a well-watered perfect soil nearby, these roots will c o m e straight as an arrow into y o u r soil. If that's the o n l y location y o u have, then there is a w a y to counteract that situation. P u t a p l y w o o d b o t t o m on your boxes a n d raise t h e m up o f f the g r o u n d . Y o u can raise t h e m up by just p u t t i n g a brick u n d e r each corner and one in the center. Or y o u can use a c e m e n t block, or even t w o blocks and b u i l d little piers and have it as a g a r d e n y o u sit d o w n beside to harvest. T h e n , of course, the tree's roots won't even k n o w that the garden is there. T h i s is a nice w a y to have a shade garden right under a tree along w i t h a bench or a few l a w n chairs. K e e p in m i n d that shrubs are just as b a d as trees as far as providing shade a n d root interference. M o s t shrubs are m o r e shallowrooted than trees. K e e p in m i n d , t o o , that as trees and shrubs grow, their shade will increasingly cover a larger area.
50
4. No Puddles, Please
R o o t s will d r o w n in accumulated and stagnant water, so y o u don't w a n t to locate y o u r S F G in an area that holds water after a rain. T h e materials in Mel's M i x , t h o u g h t h e y drain well a n d h o l d a lot of m o i s t u r e , will soak up all the w a t e r in a s t a n d i n g p u d d l e a n d y o u r p l a n t roots will b e h a r m e d . A r e a s that p u d d l e also p r o m i s e m u d i n the aisles, w h i c h makes gardening less fun. If y o u have no other place and can't drain the area, then of course y o u c o u l d fill in the l o w area w i t h sand to raise y o u r b o x slightly and/or y o u c o u l d again p u t a b o t t o m on it a n d raise it up w i t h stones, bricks, cinder blocks, or s o m e t h i n g similar.
5. Existing Soil Who Cares?

W h e n you're c h o o s i n g a location, it doesn't really matter a b o u t the c o n d i t i o n of y o u r existing soil. M a n y of the other gardening b o o k s tell y o u h o w to go around the yard and dig test holes and see w h a t k i n d of soil y o u have. S o m e t i m e s you're even supposed to m a k e a
i i
i i
i i
i i i-
d^
Once you choose the spot, you'll love Square Foot Gardening for so many reasons. It's simple and easy to understand. It's quick and practical to do. It has every benefit you can think of. It fits anywhere in an existing or planned landscape; anyone can do it regardless of abilities. It costs very little. It requires few tools and equipment. And the best part of all is that you don't have to be an expert gardener!!
Plan Your Garden percolation test, in w h i c h y o u have to dig a hole, fill it w i t h water, see h o w l o n g i t takes t o drain, b l a h , b l a h , blah . . . . O r , h o w a b o u t all the unnecessary advice on h o w to take a soil test and w h a t the results mean? Forget a b o u t all that now. Y o u don't h a v e t o k n o w a b o u t i t because we're n o t g o i n g to use y o u r existing soil. We're g o i n g to b u i l d bottomless boxes above the g r o u n d . Y o u can even p u t y o u r boxes on the pavement or a patio a n d it won't m a k e a n y difference.
51
The Envelope, Please

T h e best location is w h e r e y o u can see y o u r garden m o r e often f r o m more directions. T h i n g s like sunlight and avoiding trees and shrubs are merely precautions to help m a k e y o u r garden m o r e successful. So w a l k around y o u r yard a n d t h i n k a b o u t the best place to locate a n d enjoy y o u r garden.
Design
N o w that you've d e t e r m i n e d h o w m a n y boxes you'll have a n d strolled a r o u n d y o u r yard to find the best spot(s), it's t i m e to t h i n k a b o u t design. Y o u c a n lay o u t y o u r boxes s o t h e y t u r n corners, even intersect each other, b u t k e e p i n m i n d traffic a n d w a l k i n g a r o u n d . Don't m a k e dead ends or narrow places. K e e p 3- or 4-foot aisles, and leave bigger areas for chairs, benches, a n d entranceways. H e r e is a fun idea: explain to the entire f a m i l y the basic size a n d l a y o u t t h e n let each m e m b e r d r a w u p ideas a n d plans. M a y b e everyone c o u l d have an area to d e s i g n , b u i l d , a n d p l a n t . W o u l d n ' t that be a great f a m i l y project? T h e n , take a p i c t u r e a n d s e n d it to me so we c a n share all kinds of designs w i t h others.
Line Them Up
Y o u can p r o b a b l y guess that, b e i n g a former a r m y officer, I am g o i n g to w a n t all the boxes l i n e d up neatly a n d precisely, even p e r h a p s having t h e m i n a r o w (oh, w h a t a n unfortunate w o r d ) e x c u s e m e in a line. I m i g h t w a n t the entire area to be a square or at the v e r y least a rectangle . . b u t that's just m e . H o w a b o u t y o u d o y o u w a n t a U-shape or an L-shape? Do whatever appeals to y o u .
Gardens Aren't Just for Yards Anymore

Here's another i d e a n o matter the season, y o u can build a S F G b o x w i t h a p l y w o o d b o t t o m a n d place it on y o u r patio or picnic tabletop near y o u r b a c k door. Y o u m a y w a n t to use smaller S F G boxes on the patio or d e c k such as 2 x 2 or 2 x 4.
52
Be Creative
Y o u don't have to be a landscape architect to measure a n d draw up w h a t y o u imagine. T h e design is just as i m p o r t a n t as the size. You're g o i n g t o b e s p e n d i n g a lot o f y o u r time i n y o u r S F G n o t w o r k i n g or w e e d i n g , but just enjoying and relaxing. Be sure to m a k e r o o m for s o m e chairs, a b e n c h , a water fountain, or a bird bath. O n e of the advantages of a Square F o o t G a r d e n is that y o u have options in h o w y o u p u t it together so that it's perfect for y o u . S e e i n g a picture is so h e l p f u l . If y o u w a n t to see w h a t others h a v e d o n e i n their y a r d w i t h S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g , g o t o www.squarefootgardening.com a n d c l i c k o n " N e i g h b o r h o o d G a r d e n s . " Everyone likes to see w h a t others have d o n e , so take the garden tour and see w h i c h o n e y o u like the best. A n d then let y o u r imagination help y o u create the Square F o o t G a r d e n that is perfect for y o u .
If y o u like to b u i l d things, y o u are g o i n g to love this chapter. A Square F o o t G a r d e n can be a lot like w o r k i n g w i t h Erector sets, L i n c o l n Logs, or Legos. Since S F G grows so m u c h in so little space and is m a d e w i t h readily available materials, the basic b o x projects o u t l i n e d in this chapter w o n ' t take all y o u r t i m e , space, or money.
Why Boxes?
Just as a reminder, there are several reasons we build boxes for o u r Square F o o t Gardens. 1. Looks neat and tidy. 2. Organizes and simplifies your gardening chores. 3. Holds a special soil mix aboveground. 4. It's easy to add protective features. If y o u r garden is b o x e d in, it has already-established limits for y o u . A n d if y o u m a k e sure to a d d a grid, it establishes n o t o n l y a pattern but a formula for success. Boxes also h o l d y o u r perfect soil m i x so that it doesn't spill o u t or wash away in a heavy rainstorm. W h e n garden beds have no borders b e t w e e n p l a n t - g r o w i n g soil a n d w a l k w a y s , there's a greater c h a n c e that s o m e o n e w i l l step i n t o the g r o w i n g s o i l a b i g n o - n o for this S F G method. Let's start w i t h the basic 4 x 4 S F G box. Examples o f b o x materials that can be used include: Natural w o o d Manmadewood Recycled plastic Vinyl Or any other m a n m a d e material available in l u m b e r sizes
SFG more than a hobby, it's a movement."

Ross from South Carolina
E709X-K01-NHXD-QQDF-F8
1 x 6-inch lumber for the most economical, l o w traffic garden; or 2 x 6-inch lumber for sturdier boxes or heavy traffic garden areas.
Building Boxes and Structures
55
56
Stack your lumber like steps. Once you drill the top piece, slide the board back to expose the next one.
A l l types o f l u m b e r c o m e i n 8-foot lengths a n d multiples o f 2 feet thereafter. Since m o s t S F G s will be 4 x 4 feet, ask the l u m b e r c o m p a n y t o c u t y o u r 8 - f o o t - l o n g w o o d i n h a l f w h e n y o u b u y it. T h e y usually do this for free. T h e n it's easier to take h o m e , quicker to assemble, and eliminates any need for sawing. A l l types of w o o d can be used: pine, fir, cedar, or even r e d w o o d (which is m o r e expensive but longer-lasting), but don't use treated lumber.
Rotate Corners
My idea of the best kind of wood is free wood. Go to any construction site, tell the foreman you are building a Square Foot Garden, and ask if they have any scrap lumber. Chances are they will be throwing out just what you need. They may even cut it for you if you ask nicely. Then your box is free.
W h e n constructing y o u r S F G b o x , cut all four pieces o f y o u r w o o d sides t o the same l e n g t h , and then rotate the corners to ensure y o u e n d up with a square box. If y o u w a n t a different l o o k than the rotated corners, measure the thickness o f the l u m b e r and subtract that from t w o o f the sides and a d d it to the other t w o sides so y o u still end up w i t h a square box. It is n o t critical that y o u r garden b o x be exactly 48 inches either inside or outside, b u t it s h o u l d be square so each square foot planting area is the same size. A t t a c h y o u r b o x w i t h coarse-thread deck screws that are twice as l o n g as the thickness of the lumber. Use three screws per corner. Predrill y o u r holes in the first piece of the t w o pieces you're c o n n e c t i n g ; the threads will e m b e d themselves into the second.

This is an example of corner
57
construction; the side of one board is attached to the end of another, with three deck screws.
Construction Details
W o r k on a hard s u r f a c e l i k e a driveway, p a v e m e n t , or s i d e w a l k and keep y o u r frame flat so it w o n ' t e n d up c r o o k e d or twisted. W h e n y o u r frame is all s c r e w e d together, carry it to the garden area, lay it d o w n , a n d see h o w it l o o k s . If y o u w a n t to preserve the w o o d , y o u c o u l d use linseed oil. It's also possible to paint or stain the b o t t o m , outside, a n d t o p . Leave the inside u n p a i n t e d so there's no possible c o n t a m i n a t i o n to the g r o w i n g m i x .
z yy> if you're starting with used lumber and it already has paint on it, you must make sure that it's not old paint especially if it's peeling or crumbling; some older paints contain lead, which is toxic. You don't want that in your garden. I also don't recommend using pretreated timbers or lumber because it also can leach chemicals.
58 For proper drainage, drill holes in the plywood bottom of your tabletop gardenone per square foot and one extra in each corner.
Other Box Materials

S F G boxes can also b e c o n s t r u c t e d w i t h brick, c e m e n t b l o c k s , prefabricated stone, o r large rocks. S t o n e for y o u r S F G b o x can b e m a n m a d e p r e f o r m e d sizes or natural slate, r o u n d , riverbed, or a n y o t h e r t y p e of decorative stone that is easy to place and f o r m s an interesting border.
Plywood Bottom
If y o u decide to create a b o t t o m for y o u r S F G , use p l y w o o d sheeting a n d drill / 4 - i n c h drainage holes, o n e per square foot plus an extra
1
h o l e i n each corner. Y o u attach this b o t t o m b y p u t t i n g i t o n t o p o f the assembled b o x sides, s c r e w i n g it d o w n , then flipping it over so the box sides are sitting on top of the p l y w o o d b o t t o m . P l y w o o d thickness d e p e n d s o n the size o f the b o x . A 2 x 2 o r 2 x 3 b o x a n y t h i n g s p a n n i n g less t h a n 3 f e e t n e e d s '/2-inch p l y w o o d . Y o u r 4 x 4 - f o o t boxes n e e d / s - or even ^/4-inch p l y w o o d
5
b o t t o m s . Use the /4-inch p l y w o o d if y o u are g o i n g to m o v e it often.

3
If the box is g o i n g to rest on sawhorses or c e m e n t blocks a n d span a large, u n s u p p o r t e d distance, it requires thicker p l y w o o d . I use regular p l y w o o d although some like to spend extra for the longer lasting, b u t m u c h m o r e expensive, marine o r w a t e r p r o o f p l y w o o d .
59
Special Structures
For out-of-season gardening, y o u can create spring, summer, fall, and/or winter boxes. T h e s e are just 4 x 4 foot standard garden boxes or smaller 2 x 4 size that can be modified for special uses; we'll explain that i n C h a p t e r 9 . D e p e n d i n g o n the t i m e o f year, boxes can b e equipped with double decks, extensions, covers, or special modifications to allow a longer g r o w i n g season. Usually these modifications are weather-related items like covers to shade tender seedlings in the s u m m e r or a frost p r o t e c t o r either in spring or fall. Y o u will determine the best m o d i f i c a t i o n s , d e p e n d i n g o n y o u r particular weather and e n v i r o n m e n t a l c o n d i t i o n s .
Railing Boxes
If y o u have flat railings, it is very easy to set a b o x right on top of it. For stability, it should be bolted to the w o o d railing. If y o u can't bolt your boxes d o w n and you're higher than the first floor, I w o u l d place the boxes on the floor. C o n s i d e r the strength and size of y o u r railing and the surrounding e n v i r o n m e n t , and m a k e sure y o u r railing boxes aren't too big.
You can build a Square Foot Garden box that bolts to your deck railing.
60
R a i l i n g boxes m a k e a v e r y decorative a n d excellent g a r d e n , particularly if y o u add trailing types of plants that add some color and character. T h e r e are various holders sold at h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t stores that snap o n t o your railings to a c c o m m o d a t e standard-sized boxes. H a n g the b o x over the o u t s i d e e d g e , a n d i t w o n ' t take u p a n y o f y o u r valuable d e c k space, a n d , s h o u l d i t drip w h e n you're w a t e r i n g , the w a t e r will bypass the d e c k below. H o w e v e r , if y o u r b o x is on the inside of the railing, it w o u l d be m u c h safer.
Pyramid Boxes
B e creative and m a k e y o u r S F G uniquely yours. W h y n o t get fancy and stack o n e o n top o f another t o create pyramids? W h y w o u l d y o u do that? Because they're spectacular, and they will be the highlight and focal point of y o u r entire garden. C o n s t r u c t i o n is v e r y simple w i t h just a few braces for stability.
Step Up, Young Lady

T h e next fancy garden layout w o u l d be to m a k e a standard 4-foot w i d e by any length box but every 2 or 4 feet step up by o n e level. T h e r e are m a n y arrangements y o u c o u l d design, and they w o u l d be limited o n l y by y o u r imagination. Build t h e m the same w a y as the corner p y r a m i d w i t h an inside brace for every 4-foot section.
One-foot-square boxes are the perfect size for the steps leading to your font door.
61
Make Boxes Extra Deep

M a k i n g boxes that are extra d e e p m e a n t h e y are extra d r a m a t i c . I k n o w I've told y o u that 6 inches of Mel's M i x is e n o u g h for all plants, b u t y o u r g a r d e n b e c o m e s m o r e d r a m a t i c w h e n the container is extra tall. If y o u d e c i d e to b u i l d y o u r b o x taller, just use 8-, 1 0 - , or 1 2 - i n c h l u m b e r instead of the n o r m a l 6 inches. T h e o n l y d r a w b a c k is cost. B u t no m a t t e r y o u ' r e after a d r a m a t i c , spectacular l o o k n o w . S i n c e the p l a n t s d o n ' t n e e d m o r e t h a n 6 inches o f Mel's M i x , don't s p e n d y o u r m o n e y o n filling the entire d e p t h w i t h Mel's M i x . U s e sand (cheap a n d available a t a n y h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t center) o n the b o t t o m layer. "I'll just use m y existing yard soil," s o m e o n e says " a n d save even m o r e m o n e y . " Don't! M o s t soils don't drain w e l l a n d h a v e weed seeds. R e m e m b e r weeds? W e don't have t h e m a n y m o r e i n S F G , s o i f you're g o i n g t o m u l t i p l e layers for y o u r g a r d e n boxes, fill a n y space b e l o w 6 inches w i t h just ordinary sand.
A Special Box for Carrots, Leeks, and Potatoes

There is one last item that y o u m i g h t w a n t to c o n s t r u c t y o u r h i g h rise boxes for carrots, leeks, and potatoes. T h e s e root crops need deep soil so instead of d i g g i n g d o w n as in m o s t gardening m e t h o d s , we take the easy w a y and build u p . B u i l d a 1 x 1-foot b o x either 6, 9, or 1 2 inches tall o u t o f p l y w o o d o r a n y t h i n t y p e o f l u m b e r . See Chapter 6 for details on planting a n d g r o w i n g .
Grids and Materials

Grids are a must. Every b o x s h o u l d have its o w n p e r m a n e n t a n d prominent grid. I'm so a d a m a n t a b o u t h a v i n g a grid on every b o x I tell people that if y o u r S F G doesn't have a grid, it is n o t a Square Foot G a r d e n . B u t w i t h a grid, it's an attractive, unusual, and u n i q u e garden. It tells the story of S F G in one glance. In addition it has m a n y unseen benefits, so stick w i t h me on this one a n d build a grid for all of y o u r boxes.
Blinds
T h e first P e n n y Pincher tip is slat-type or Venetian blinds. T h e y c o m e i n m a n y w i d t h s a n d lengths, and if y o u visit a local thrift shop y o u can usually find a used set at a great price. F i n d o n e that's at least 4 feet w i d e . C u t off the strings a n d lay o u t the strips. T r i m the ends w i t h a pair of scissors so they fit y o u r b o x , drill holes at the h a l f a n d
62
quarter points, and attach t h e m together w i t h s o m e sort of screw, nail, or snap-fastener. T h e o n e p r o b l e m I've f o u n d w i t h blinds is their w e i g h t . W h e n y o u f i r s t start y o u r g a r d e n i n the spring, it's usually w i n d y . S o m e t i m e s the blinds b l o w a r o u n d a little just because the garden is e m p t y a n d they have no p r o t e c t i o n f r o m the w i n d . O n e s o l u t i o n is to attach t h e m to the soil w i t h a l o n g galvanized nail at every 1 2 - i n c h intersection. T h i s helps h o l d t h e m d o w n so they don't b l o w away.
Wood Lath
T h e s e c o n d inexpensive material is w o o d lath, w h i c h is sold in h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t centers. Believe i t o r n o t , t h e y already c o m e 4 feet l o n g w i t h square ends. S o m e t i m e s they're a little c r o o k e d , filled w i t h k n o t s , or break easily, so sort t h r o u g h t h e m . B u t they're very, v e r y i n e x p e n s i v e l e s s than a quarter each. O n c e y o u lay t h e m o u t a n d drill holes at the 1 2 - i n c h intersections, they're v e r y easy to c o n n e c t together w i t h a n u t a n d bolt or s o m e other type of
Drill a hole through both pieces of wood at each grid intersection.
63 Next, insert some kind of hardware to loosely hold the grid together.
Drill a hole through the end of the center grids and add 4 deck screws.
64
Once the grid is attached, your square foot garden is ready for planting.
fastener. Because the w o o d lath is rigid, it can span f r o m o n e side of the b o x to the other side in case y o u r Mel's M i x is n o t level w i t h the t o p of the box. O t h e r w i s e , it can just lie on t o p of the soil. If y o u r grid spans across the b o x sides, keep the grid f r o m m o v i n g a b o u t by drilling a hole in the ends of the t w o center slats a n d screwing t h e m
to y o u r w o o d e n b o x . S o m e people like to take the w o o d lath grid up for the w i n t e r so it doesn't get w e t a n d rot as easily. U n s c r e w the four screws, fold the grid, a n d h a n g it on the garage w a l l . P u t the screws in a plastic b a g a n d h a n g it up w i t h the grid to keep the screws safe a n d d r y over the winter.
65
Fun Ideas
You m a y be able to find other scrap w o o d strips a r o u n d . C a r p e n t e r s often have strips left over. Y o u just have to k e e p y o u r eyes o p e n . " Q u i c k , H e n r y , stop the car. I saw s o m e t h i n g b a c k there." O r , if y o u have a table saw, it's easy e n o u g h to cut strips of w o o d yourself. T h e w o o d o r b l i n d grids can b e painted, w h i c h kids love t o d o , creating fancy c o m b i n a t i o n s of colors. For the best visual effect, I think plain w h i t e is best. (Kids will say, "Blah!") Y o u can also write on t h e m . (Kids will say, " C o o l ! " ) S o m e p e o p l e like to record w h a t they've planted. It's fun to have visitors sign y o u r grid, especially children and g r a n d c h i l d r e n . L e t t h e m p i c k o u t w h i c h square they like best, and tell t h e m it can be theirs. W h e n they call, y o u can tell them h o w their plants are d o i n g . I bet they'll call m o r e often.
Protecting Your SFG

To protect o n e or m o r e squares next to each other f r o m weather or pests, the first step is to m a k e a wire U - f r a m e cage to fit over those squares. Y o u m a y w a n t to m a k e several U-frames of different sizes that can be used for 1, 2, or 4 square feet a n d another for an entire 4 x 4 block of 16 square feet. Basically, y o u w a n t to m a k e a wire cage that will fit over the top of each of these areas. Later y o u can attach a covering m a d e f r o m a n y n u m b e r of materials to protect those squares from a variety of hazards. I've f o u n d that the easiest cage is made from plastic-coated wire fencing. T h i s can be cut w i t h wire
To build a protective cage for your 4* 4garden, you'll need: four one inch by two inch boards, 4 feet long; chicken wire; plastic ties; cutting shears; and a power drill.
Arrange your boards as shown in this photo and drill two holes in one end of each board.
Attach the boards with two coarse-thread deck screws using your power drill.
67
pliers and easily b e n t over a straight edge to almost any shape. Y o u can m a k e a four-sided wire b o x from t w o U-frames or just a t w o sided one. T h e r e is quite a variety of fencing wire to choose f r o m so check o u t w h a t is available. It c o m e s in rolls of different w i d t h s a n d lengths as well as different o p e n i n g s a n d wire thicknesses. Y o u m a y w a n t to call ahead to several places to find the best choice.
Roll out one long piece of chicken wire and place your frame close to the center. Bracing the frame with your foot, bend the chicken wire up. Then, do this again for the other side. Remember to wear gloves!
Chicken Wire
A n o t h e r c o m m o n material I like to use is chicken wire. It comes in smaller 1-inch o p e n i n g s or larger 2 - i n c h o p e n i n g s . T h e 1-inch size is m u c h stronger b u t will cost a little m o r e . T h e 1-inch size also takes a little longer to b e n d into shape b u t will keep o u t m o r e critters than the 2-inch size. C h i c k e n wire can be cut w i t h pliers or cutting shears. It's sharp, so be sure to wear gloves. Y o u can b u y a w h o l e roll of it, 3 or 4 feet w i d e . In m a n y hardware stores y o u can b u y whatever length y o u w a n t from their roll, a n d they will cut it for y o u !
Full Cage
A chicken wire cage over the entire 4 x 4 makes it fairly easy to protect y o u r garden against u n w a n t e d rabbits, birds that d i g up a n d eat newly planted seeds, cats that like to dig in the soil, too m u c h sun on newly planted and delicate seedlings, or strong w i n d gusts d u r i n g the w i n d y season. B u i l d y o u r wire cage to fit the plants' mature sizes. ( O n c e plants start g r o w i n g t h r o u g h the wire, it is very difficult to
68
take the cage off.) G r a b the cage wire w i t h y o u r fingers and lift the w h o l e t h i n g off, tend to the plants, and then p u t it b a c k d o w n . A full cage needs a w o o d e n - f r a m e b o t t o m for support, b u t it then fits nicely o n y o u r w o o d e n garden b o x frame. See h o w everything i n S F G f i t s together so nicely, just like Legos.
Construction
To m a k e a w o o d e n b o t t o m for a w i r e cage, attach four pieces of 1 x 2 i n c h p i n e l u m b e r 4 feet l o n g i n a b o x shape w i t h t w o d e c k screws a t each corner. T h e n c u t a n d shape y o u r c h i c k e n w i r e o r fencing wire to the 4 x 4 b o x to create any height y o u w a n t . Staple the wire to the w o o d frame using /s-inch staples, and then wire or tie
3
the vertical corners together or wherever the wire forms a corner. If y o u are using chicken wire or any wire that has sharp edges, y o u m a y w a n t to cover the sharp p o i n t s i n c l u d i n g where the wire is stapled to the w o o d w i t h s o m e t h i n g like d u c t tape (choose a nice color) to prevent getting scratched while you're m o v i n g y o u r cover. A n o t h e r w a y is to attach the wire to the inside of the 1 x 2 frame. It's a little m o r e w o r k to staple the wire to the inside, b u t there won't be any Brace the frame with your foot sharp points to scratch y o u . If y o u have a couple of these cages m a d e and bend the chicken wire up. up ahead of t i m e o n e or t w o that are 6 inches tall, another couple
Once the wire is bent on all sides, remove the wood frame and connect the four corners at three locations using the plastic ties.
Set your wire fame over the wood fame and connect the wire with the plastic ties. Use the ties at random points on top of the fame, too.
70
The frame is lightweight and is easy to lifi off your 4^4. Remove it to water, plant, prune, or harvest.
When placing your protective cage, make sure the fames line up. This will keep all kinds of critters fom taking your harvest.
Building Boxes and Structures 12 inches tall, a n d a f e w at 18 inches t a l l t h e y will be available at the right t i m e they're n e e d e d for y o u r g a r d e n . D o n ' t forget y o u c a n use t h e m as a f r a m e w o r k for spring p r o t e c t i o n f r o m cold, cats, or crows. T h e y c a n b e s u m m e r p r o t e c t i o n f r o m s u n , w i n d , a n d rain, and fall p r o t e c t i o n f r o m deer, frosts, a n d snow. T h e y can be stacked on the g r o u n d in a pile or h u n g on the garage or fence w a l l .
71
Covers
Materials used for covering the wire cages can be a n y t h i n g f r o m clear plastic to protect plants f r o m w i n d or c o l d w e a t h e r a n d snow, sleet, o r r a i n t o s o m e sort o f c l o t h like cheesecloth o r floating cover t o protect plants from insects getting in to lay their eggs.
Bend two of '/2-inch 10-foot PVCpipes diameter fom
corner to corner.
72
Clothespins
A cover can be easily held in place w i t h clothespins. T h e cover can be o p e n on s o m e sides to allow air to circulate or it c a n be c o m p l e t e l y e n c l o s e d . O n e c o n s i d e r a t i o n , o f course, i s w h e t h e r t o o m u c h heat will build up inside the cage, and that depends on the season and the a m o u n t of sunlight y o u r garden receives in y o u r area. W h e n there is t o o m u c h s u n l i g h t for n e w l y p l a n t e d transplants, just p u t a shade c l o t h over the t o p o f y o u r cage. I f y o u have several n e w l y p l a n t e d squares a m o n g o t h e r well-established p l a n t squares, y o u can attach shade patches over just those plants that need a little shade.
Protective Dome Supports

A d o m e s u p p o r t is so easy to m a k e . Just b e n d a 1 0 - f o o t l e n g t h of
1
/2-inch P V C p i p e f r o m corner t o c o r n e r o f y o u r b o x , a n d t h e n
a n o t h e r f r o m the o p p o s i t e corners; then tie or b o l t it at the intersection at the top to m a k e a d o m e that can support any type of cover. T h i n k of it as the structural f r a m e w o r k for a g r e e n h o u s e i n the early spring it can be covered w i t h clear plastic, in the late spring w i t h cheesecloth to keep o u t egg-laying insects, and in the s u m m e r w i t h shade cloth to provide a little shade for tender y o u n g plants. Y o u can provide protection the same w a y for the fall crop.
Your two pipes should make a dome as shown here.
Attach a plastic tie at the intersection to ensure that it doesn't fall over.
74
Use a thick plastic cover to protect your plants from frost. Place some heavy objects such as bricks on the edges to secure it.
Covered Wagon
A n o t h e r neat l o o k i n g P V C frame is o n e in the shape of a covered w a g o n . T h i s takes a little longer to m a k e and requires just a bit more material, but it gives a lot m o r e r o o m and is m u c h easier to use w h e n y o u have a cover over the frame. It requires the same t w o 1 0 - f o o t l o n g P V C pipes, but they're arched over each e n d o f y o u r box. T h e n , y o u need an extra 4-foot-long piece of pipe that becomes the strut h o l d i n g the t w o arches from collapsing. T y i n g the intersection will n o t w o r k in this design, so y o u have to drill holes in the center of the arches and in each e n d of the strut, so that a bolt will c o n n e c t the central strut to the top center of each arch. Use a bolt and nut that won't tear the plastic or net covering. N o w y o u can see the shape is m u c h m o r e c o n d u c i v e to lifting one side to w o r k inside, a n d it makes it easier to t h r o w a blanket over the entire 4 x4 on a cold night. For those that don't w a n t s u c h a h i g h frame, y o u just c u t the 10-foot P C V pipes d o w n to 6 or 8 feet and you'll have a m u c h lower w a g o n top. For those of y o u thinking, "I'll just b u y o n e 10-footer and cut it in half," that won't w o r k . T h e arch over a 4-foot span has to be m o r e than 5 feet long.
Locate the center of your two ten foot pipes.
Drill one hole in the center of two 10'foot PVC pipes.
76
Place each pipe in a corner and bend as shown.
Drill holes in the ends of a 4-foot PVC pipe. It will be the supporting strut. Insert a plastic cable tie through the holes or a nut and a bolt to keep it in place.
77
Plant Supports
W h a t d o y o u d o w i t h h e a v y f r u i t i n g plants s u c h a s p e p p e r s , eggplants, a n d giant marigolds? T h e easiest w a y t o s u p p o r t the branches of these plants w i t h o u t d o i n g a lot of staking and tying is to m a k e a p e r m a n e n t cage that the plants can g r o w t h r o u g h . T h e cage's height depends on the height of the mature plants. T h i s c o u l d be for 1 square foot, 2, 4, or for the w h o l e 16 square feet in a 4 x 4 garden; it all d e p e n d s on w h a t is p l a n t e d in each square. T h e cage c a n be s e l f - s u p p o r t i n g w i t h sides that stick i n t o the soil just like the w i r e U - f r a m e p r e v i o u s l y m e n t i o n e d , or, if y o u are m a k i n g a s u p p o r t for the entire 4 x 4 , it is v e r y easy to p u t a stake of s o m e sort in each c o r n e r e i t h e r w o o d o r m e t a l a n d t h e n s u s p e n d the w i r e h o r i z o n t a l l y b e t w e e n these four corners. E v e n better, if y o u are s u p p o r t i n g the entire 4 x 4 - f o o t area, p u t in the four corner stakes a n d t h e n h o r i z o n t a l l y tie on s o m e n y l o n t o m a t o trellis netting. T h i s n e t t i n g is available at m o s t garden stores a n d is particularly g o o d because it is soft a n d c u s h i o n y a n d w o n ' t cut the plants w h e n t h e y r u b against it in the w i n d . It also has large o p e n i n g s y o u c a n reach in to a n d the plants can g r o w t h r o u g h . It won't b o t h e r a n y of the shorter plants either. It is v e r y easy material t o w o r k w i t h a n d well-suited for gardening. C o r n e r posts m u s t b e v e r y s t r o n g a n d firmly h e l d so the h o r i z o n t a l w i r e or n e t t i n g w o n ' t sag. Posts can b e c o n s t r u c t e d o f w o o d a n d driven into the g r o u n d or attached w i t h d e c k screws to the inside or outside corner of the w o o d frame. Y o u can also use P V C pipe or even metal pipe or fence posts. T h e m a n y options available s h o w h o w flexible Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g can be.
Hold Me Up
Tall l a n k y plants s u c h as dahlias, gladiolas, a n d sunflowers m a y also n e e d extra s u p p o r t a s t h e y m a t u r e a n d g r o w i n h e i g h t . S u n f l o w e r seeds w i l l n e e d t e m p o r a r y p r o t e c t i o n w h e n f i r s t p l a n t e d t o p r e v e n t birds o r rabbits f r o m d i g g i n g u p the seeds a n d t o prevent o t h e r birds f r o m e a t i n g the y o u n g sprouts. T e m p o r a r i l y c o v e r i n g y o u r g a r d e n w i t h c h i c k e n w i r e 6 inches over the b o x will p r o v i d e this p r o t e c t i o n u n t i l the plants get that tall. T h e n , after the plants reach a h e i g h t of a b o u t 3 feet, it is t i m e to p u t in four c o r n e r p o s t s s t r o n g steel fence posts a n d n y l o n n e t t i n g h o r i z o n t a l l y at several different levels. Start the first at 3 feet a n d the last s h o u l d be as h i g h as the fence posts. T h i s will s u p p o r t plants t h r o u g h t o m a t u r i t y a n d k e e p t h e m f r o m falling over i n heavy w i n d and rainstorms.
78
Corn Protection
Everyone loves c o r n e s p e c i a l l y c h i p m u n k s , squirrels, and raccoons! To keep t h e m o u t and y o u r harvest in, try this foolproof secret. Put one steel fence post in each corner of y o u r 4 x 4 foot garden. Use tall metal 5- or 6-foot fence posts, and then, w h e n corn reaches 4 feet, r u n chicken wire w i t h 1-inch openings a r o u n d the outside f o r m i n g four walls. N e x t , add one m o r e piece across the t o p at a height of a b o u t 4 feet. T h i s will keep the critters o u t of the corn a n d prevent the crows f r o m eating the seeds and seedlings w h e n first planted. T h e n , as the corn grows, it will g r o w right t h r o u g h the top of the wire, w h i c h will support the tall corn stalks w h e n the w i n d b l o w s a t the same time, k e e p i n g the raccoons and c h i p m u n k s o u t before the corn can be harvested. Y o u can easily tie the horizontal t o p wire w i t h t e m p o r a r y b o w s so that y o u can u n d o a few a n d still reach in. Since it is chicken wire, m a k e sure y o u wear a long-sleeved shirt w h e n y o u reach in so y o u don't get scratched. You'll be able to water easily either by h a n d or using a long-handled w a n d a n d shut-off valve on the e n d o f y o u r hose.
S.FG is great for the family. Each person has his or her own plot."
Gary from Michigan
Vertical Frames for Vine Crops

W h e n I first invented the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d , I k n e w o n e of the real challenges was g o i n g to be s o m e of the b i g sprawling v i n e crops like tomatoes. W i t h o u t a d o u b t , tomatoes are America's most-loved garden vegetable. However, they can take up a lot of r o o m and can b e c o m e u n s i g h d y by season's e n d if they are allowed to g r o w w i t h o u t proper care. A l s o , if left to sprawl over the g r o u n d , tomatoes can attract additional pests, a n d m a n y get d a m a g e d or ruined f r o m foot traffic. T h e w h o l e idea of g r o w i n g tomatoes this w a y seemed very non-productive. I was determined to find a better w a y to g r o w tomatoes and w h a t I devised turned o u t to be n o t o n l y g o o d for tomatoes, b u t for all other vine crops too. Every plant that has a v i n e that sprawls all over the g r o u n d e v e n p u m p k i n s a n d w a t e r m e l o n s c a n b e g r o w n vertically as l o n g as y o u have a strong e n o u g h support; the result is a spectacular sight w i t h very little wasted g r o u n d space.
Air Rights
B e i n g an engineer, I t h o u g h t of buildings in a city. Buildings aren't c o n s t r u c t e d as o n e - s t o r y structures that sprawl o u t w a r d over the landscape; space is t o o valuable to do this. Instead, designers a n d contractors use w h a t is called air rights, b u i l d i n g straight up into the air, floor after floor after floor. W h y can't plants be g r o w n the same way? W e l l , I discovered they can! A l l y o u need is a strong f r a m e w o r k a n d s o m e t h i n g t o h o l d the vine o n t o the framework. D i d y o u k n o w
Building Boxes and Structures that vines g r o w better vertically t h a n horizontally? G r o w i n g plants vertically prevents g r o u n d rot a n d discourages pest infestation. I k n o w slugs aren't h a p p y a b o u t m y w a y o f vertical g a r d e n i n g ; I hear they get dizzy up h i g h , b u t that's their problem!
79
Nature Supports
T h r o u g h the years I experimented w i t h all different types of materials and frames. Finally, I settled u p o n one that was so simple, easy, a n d inexpensive to use that it w a s a l m o s t r i d i c u l o u s . T h e n I b e g a n g r o w i n g all different types of plants vertically. I originally t h o u g h t I w o u l d need t o design s o m e special w a y t o h o l d u p and a c c o m m o d a t e heavier fruits such as w i n t e r squash and p u m p k i n s , b u t as it turned out, these plant vines seemed to understand the situation; the stem supporting the heavy fruit grows thicker a n d heavier as the fruit becomes larger. If y o u have a f r a m e w o r k a n d support that will h o l d the plant, the plant will h o l d the fruit; it is as simple as that! M o t h e r N a t u r e always seems to k n o w best.
Best Material
I use the strongest material I c a n find, w h i c h is steel. Fortunately, steel c o m e s in t u b u l a r p i p e u s e d for electrical c o n d u i t . It is v e r y s t r o n g a n d turns o u t t o b e v e r y inexpensive. C o u p l i n g s are also available so y o u c a n c o n n e c t t w o pieces together. I d e s i g n e d an attractive frame that fits right o n t o the 4 x 4 b o x , a n d i t c a n b e attached to the w o o d e n b o x w i t h clamps that can be b o u g h t at a n y store. O r , steel r e i n f o r c i n g rods d r i v e n i n t o the existing g r o u n d o u t s i d e y o u r b o x p r o v i d e a v e r y steady a n d s t r o n g base; t h e n the electrical c o n d u i t slips s n u g l y over the bars. It's v e r y s i m p l e a n d inexpensive t o assemble. A n y o n e c a n d o i t e v e n y o u ! T o p r e v e n t vertically g r o w n plants f r o m s h a d i n g o t h e r parts o f the g a r d e n , I r e c o m m e n d that tall, vertical frames be constructed on the n o r t h side of the garden. To fit it into a 4 x 4 box, I designed a frame that measured 4 feet w i d e a n d almost 6 feet tall.
Tie It Tight
Vertically g r o w i n g plants n e e d t o b e tied t o their s u p p o r t s . N y l o n netting won't rot in the sun a n d weather, a n d I use it exclusively n o w for b o t h vertical frames a n d h o r i z o n t a l p l a n t s u p p o r t s . It is v e r y s t r o n g a l m o s t u n b r e a k a b l e a n d guaranteed for t w e n t y years. It is a w o n d e r f u l material available a t g a r d e n stores a n d i n catalogs. T h e n y l o n n e t t i n g is also durable e n o u g h to g r o w the heavier v i n e crops o n vertical frames, i n c l u d i n g w a t e r m e l o n s , p u m p k i n s , c a n t a l o u p e s , winter a n d s u m m e r squashes, a n d tomatoes. Y o u will see in C h a p t e r 8 h o w easy it is to train plants to g r o w vertically. To hold the plants to the frame, I have f o u n d that n y l o n n e t t i n g w i t h 7 - i n c h square
80
o p e n i n g s m a d e especially for t o m a t o g r o w i n g w o r k s w e l l because y o u can reach y o u r h a n d t h r o u g h . M a k e sure it is this t y p e so it w o n ' t c u t the s t e m o f the p l a n t w h e n i t b l o w s against i t i n the w i n d . T h i s c o m e s i n 4 - f o o t w i d t h s a n d c a n easily b e tied t o the m e t a l frame. It's s o m e t i m e s h a r d to find, so call a r o u n d .
Winter Storage
Because the netting is loose, it can flop a r o u n d unless y o u tie it very tightly to the frame; this is the first step. At the e n d of the season the frames c a n be left up or t h e y c a n be s l i p p e d o f f the steel rebar a n d h u n g o n a garage w a l l . A l t h o u g h the c o n d u i t i s galvanized a n d endures m a n y years o f service, i t e v e n t u a l l y w i l l r u s t e s p e c i a l l y a t the b o t t o m w h e r e i t c o m e s i n c o n t a c t w i t h the g r o u n d . I f y o u d o h a n g up y o u r metal frames in the winter, for safety reasons m a k e sure y o u cover or clearly m a r k the steel rebar that is left sticking o u t of the g r o u n d . Y o u can flag it w i t h brightly covered tape, paint it, or find caps that can be screwed on to prevent s o m e o n e f r o m tripping.
Composters
A c o m p o s t i n g operation can be as simple as a pile of leaves, weeds, and kitchen scraps. M o t h e r N a t u r e does it all the time. Go to a n y forest or field a n d y o u ' l l see she gets the j o b d o n e w i t h o u t a n y structures. B u t people are different. We like to conserve space, keep things in their place; a n d we usually w a n t to b u i l d a c o n t a i n e r or enclosure for our c o m p o s t materials, w h i c h speeds up the operation by creating b u l k , w h i c h then allows the pile to heat up a n d d e c o m p o s e faster. W h a t c a n w e b u y o r build? T h e r e are m a n y c o m p o s t containers o n t h e m a r k e t m o s t l y m a d e f r o m plastic. A l l w o r k w e l l , are attractive, a n d r e a s o n a b l y p r i c e d . T h e r e are c o m p o s t e r s t h a t t u m b l e o r t u r n , s p e e d i n g u p the process, b u t t h e y cost m o r e a n d w o r s t of a l l y o u still have to t u r n t h e m . It's fun at first b u t it gets o l d v e r y fast.
Make Your Own

We n e e d a structure that w i l l h o l d a pile of material in either a r o u n d o r square shape. W i r e f e n c i n g w o r k s w e l l for r o u n d a n d even square structures if y o u use four fence posts. M a k e w i r e cylinders at least 3 to 4 feet in diameter. T h e exact l e n g t h of f e n c i n g you'll n e e d isn't critical. Instead I am just g o i n g to tell e v e r y o n e to b u y 10 or 15 feet of f e n c i n g a n d shape it in a cylinder by a t t a c h i n g the ends together b y b e n d i n g the c u t w i r e ends.
81
S o , i f y o u w a n t a 3-foot diameter composter, b u y 1 0 feet o f fencing. I f y o u w a n t a 4 - f o o t diameter, b u y 1 5 feet o f f e n c i n g a n d have e n o u g h for a door. A n d , if y o u don't like r o u n d c o m p o s t e r s , b u y four 6-foot l o n g steel fence posts, drive t h e m in each corner of y o u r c o m p o s t e r l o c a t i o n , b e n d the w i r e a r o u n d those, a n d you'll have a square c o m p o s t e r , m u c h m o r e suited to S F G . F i n d the best location for y o u r c o m p o s t e r a n d fill as explained in C h a p t e r 5. W h e n full or ready to t u r n , just lift up the w i r e cylinder, place it next to the pile, a n d use a garden fork to fill the cylinder in its n e w l o c a t i o n y o u ' v e just t u r n e d the pile!
If you don't have a compost pile yet, start one now. It's essential to the Square Foot Gardening method.
With a Gate
A n o t h e r idea is to have an enclosure that's easier to get into to m i x and water or even turn. M a k e an entrance o p e n i n g w i t h or w i t h o u t a gate. Start by driving t w o steel fence posts in the g r o u n d at y o u r selected location; m a k e t h e m a b o u t 3 or 4 feet apart. T h e n attach y o u r wire fencing to these posts. T w o options are available for y o u w i t h and w i t h o u t a gate. If y o u w a n t a gate it will cost y o u an extra 3 or 4 feet of fencing. No b i g deal, and it will l o o k nicer and be neater w h e n the enclosure starts filling up. Y o u still tie or wire the fencing to both fence posts; one becomes the hinge, the other the door latch. M a k e the latch S - h o o k f r o m w i r e , o r y o u can b u y this t y p e o f h o o k at the store. Y o u can have o n e c o m p o s t bin or t w o together or even three d e p e n d i n g on h o w large y o u r operation is.
82
Weekly Bins
Just like the wire enclosures, y o u can have one, t w o , or up to six bins all together for M o n d a y t h r o u g h Saturday. (Don't forget we rest on Sunday!) W h e n and w h y w o u l d y o u need m o r e than one? W h e n y o u get serious a b o u t c o m p o s t i n g , y o u m a y be able to get e n o u g h material to fill up one every week. T h e n , for m i x i n g (as explained in C h a p t e r 5 ) , y o u just m o v e material f r o m a full bin into an e m p t y one right next to it. T h e nice t h i n g a b o u t a series is y o u o n l y need three pallets for each additional bin. I could include directions for other materials to use like bricks or c e m e n t blocks, landscape timbers, or logs, but no o n e is g o i n g to build a composter o u t o f those materials. T h e y w o u l d be too expensive and inefficient. T h e y m a y l o o k g o o d in b o o k s b u t n o t in o u r system because they are just n o t practical. Of course, no one says y o u have to have an enclosure, b u t if you're a Square Foot Gardener and y o u have nice square boxes for all of y o u r garden, w h y w o u l d y o u w a n t just a pile for y o u r composter?
PENNY PINCHER
SQUARE IS GOOD Here's a no-cost easy way to make your composter out of wood-that means free. Women tell me they love this because it requires no tools, wire cutting, equipment, or familiarity with construction. Find four wood pallets of similar size and appearance. You can find discarded pallets everywhere. The place to find them is behind the stores and shops where the dumpsters are. Ask first, just to make sure they are being thrown out. If you can fine four of about the same size and look, your finished composter will look like it's custom made just for you. A brick or stone under each corner helps keep the wood off the ground to keep it from rotting; corners are tied with rope, cord, or chain. It doesn't have to be nailed or screwed together, and it doesn't have to be real tight. You may want to have the pallet boards face outside to look nice, and you can make them all run either horizontally or vertically-whatever looks best.
Aisles
" P u t y o u r best foot forward" is the saying, but w h a t are y o u g o i n g to p u t it on? Grass, brick, boards, gravel, or just plain dirt? M o s t people p u t their Square Foot boxes in their yard and leave the grass for their aisles. T h i s helps keep a natural look. A n d don't worry, the grass won't get a lot of hard use because there's n o t that m u c h to do in a Square Foot G a r d e n . If y o u w a n t to leave natural soil in y o u r aisles use an action h o e o n c e a w e e k to rid y o u r aisle of pesky weeds.
Brick Paths
I n m y P B S T V garden, w e had a small 1 5 x 1 5 area w i t h several boxes and plain dirt aisles. I spent five m i n u t e s every w e e k r u n n i n g an action h o e over the soil to c u t o f f any n e w w e e d s , a n d it l o o k e d pretty nice. B u t t h e n in o n e of the classes I was g i v i n g , s o m e of the ladies w a n t e d to k n o w h o w to lay brick so I t h o u g h t this w o u l d be fun to teach as well as i m p r o v i n g the garden. So w i t h o u t m o v i n g the boxes, w e laid d o w n m a n y layers o f newspaper. N e x t w e a d d e d
83
i i I i i i li.i
you don't want grass in your aisles, lay down a mulch. Here again, you want to first dig out any weeds or grass; then to prevent weeds from growing back without using chemicals, you can put down a landscape fabric or weed cloth. There are many on the market today. They come in 3- or 4-foot wide rolls and do quite a good job. (Don't use regular black plastic-it won't drain and it's slippery.) Then just cover the cloth with at least 1 or 2 inches of mulch. You can also use gravel, which comes in all different kinds and sizes, colors and shapes, or you can use other types of ground cover like ground up bark or pine needles; I've even seen people use straw, hay, salt hay, or even leaves collected and saved from last fall. As you walk, these materials break up and gradually decompose, creating something you can add later to your compost pile. You can also build walkways out of brick, wood planks, or paving stones. Again, take out any weeds and put down a weed cloth first. You can create some very interesting patterns with bricks and paving blocks. Keep the joints fairly tight so the surface doesn't shift.
84
Go to the nursery department of your local home improvement center and browse through it to find the ground cover material you prefer.
Building Boxes and Structures a 1-inch layer of sand a n d t h e n started l a y i n g bricks right o n that sand base. N o m o r t a r o r c e m e n t is n e e d e d j u s t fill in the tight joints w i t h loose sand. W h e n w e g o t t o the existing 4 x 4 garden boxes, w e just w e n t right a r o u n d t h e m . It w e n t w e l l a n d in o n e a f t e r n o o n it w a s all d o n e . W h a t a n i m p r o v e m e n t w o w ! W e a d d e d s o m e p a t i o furniture, a n d this area b e c a m e a favorite s p o t to sit a n d e n j o y the yard a n d gardens. W e also b e g a n t o n o t i c e m o r e o f a different k i n d o f visitor t o the g a r d e n t h e birds a n d bees a n d butterflies a n d s o m a n y m o r e insects. A n d all for the price of a f e w bricks (well, a small t r u c k l o a d actually) a n d a little sand.
85
One Last Idea

H o w w o u l d y o u like to carpet y o u r g a r d e n . . . w a l l t o wall? W e l l , y o u c a n . B u y n e w o r used indoor/outdoor patio carpeting. It even c o m e s in a grass style b u t , don't worry, y o u won't have to m o w it!
Let's Review
W h e n b u i l d i n g a S F G , start w i t h the basic b u i l d i n g b l o c k a 4 x 4 bottomless w o o d box. T h e n , d e p e n d i n g o n the situation, a d d special features to solve a n y gardening p r o b l e m or to protect y o u r garden from a n y hazard. S o m e o f the simple additions y o u can a d d t o y o u r S F G boxes: A wire b o t t o m to keep o u t moles, voles, a n d gophers A w e e d cloth b o t t o m to keep o u t w e e d s or grass A c h i c k e n wire t o p to keep o u t cats, dogs, a n d rabbits A P V C t o p frame then: C l e a r plastic to create a miniature greenhouse Bird or deer netting A blanket to protect plants f r o m frosts Floating covers to protect f r o m insects
T h e possibilities are endless for everyone, f r o m apartment dwellers to the elderly, a n d even people w i t h special needs.
A f t e r all this talk a b o u t b u i l d i n g all these different t h i n g s for p r o t e c t i n g y o u r g a r d e n , I don't w a n t y o u t o b e c o m e w o r r i e d , t h i n k i n g that y o u h a v e t o s p e n d a lot o f t i m e creating c o m p l e x
86
structures for y o u r S F G . It's n o t so! We've just learned h o w easy it is to adjust a S F G to improve its flexibility and to a c c o m m o d a t e unique gardening situations. T h i s is readily d o n e since a S F G is so small and manageable. For the most part, y o u r plants will just sit there quietly g r o w i n g , l o o k i n g better and better every day. So relax and enjoy!
Family
B u t remember, protecting y o u r garden is a lot like protecting y o u r c h i l d r e n i f it's cold, add a blanket (a sweater); if sleet and hail are predicted, add clear plastic (a raincoat); and if it's windy, add an extra shield against the w i n d (a windbreaker). Since y o u wouldn't let y o u r kids play o u t in the cold winter w i t h o u t a snowsuit for protection, do the s a m e for y o u r plants. K e e p i n g this in m i n d , you'll be able to c o m e up w i t h easy and practical solutions for protecting y o u r garden from the worst of conditions. T h a t makes it very rewarding because then y o u can enjoy y o u r garden m u c h longer every year.
This simple PVC frame can protect your plants from many
things including harmful weather and unwanted nibblers. talking about you!) (I'm not
Mel's Mix
Mel's M i x is the m o s t i m p o r t a n t , productive, essential, necessary, critical, major subject a n d is the b a c k b o n e of the entire b o o k and the Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g m e t h o d ! That's the picture. G e t it? It is the reason all the other improvem e n t s are possible. S o , please, p a y a t t e n t i o n , study, a n d learn everything in this chapter so y o u can m a k e y o u r Mel's M i x the best y o u can. T h i s will allow y o u to automatically have all the other benefits a n d i m p r o v e m e n t s that c o m e so naturally to (the all new) S F G .
Don't Skimp On This

N o w , w i t h A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g you'll never have t o d o all the hard w o r k , expense, a n d t i m e - c o n s u m i n g , back-breaking labor of i m p r o v i n g y o u r garden soil every spring like we used to do. Y o u r Mel's M i x is ready to go w h e n e v e r y o u are. It never has to be replaced and y o u don't have to do a t h i n g except plant y o u r seeds. Mel's M i x m a y b e the m o s t c o s d y part o f S F G , yet a t the same time it is the m o s t cost effective. H o w can it be both? T h e answer: if y o u try to s k i m p on this item, you'll be disappointed in all the rest. But, if y o u do it right, all the other advantages of S F G will fall into place a n d y o u will be the richest gardener on the block. Sorry to be so adamant, b u t this is really w h a t makes S F G so different a n d successful. W e have never h a d a failure o f S F G except w h e n s o m e o n e decided to s k i m p on the ingredients to save a few bucks. Let's review w h a t this perfect soil will do for y o u r garden, then the w h y a n d h o w s o y o u fully understand the nature o f the mix. W e ' l l g o t h r o u g h e a c h o f the three i n g r e d i e n t s i n d i c a t e d c o m p o s t , peat m o s s , a n d v e r m i c u l i t e a n d w h a t each o n e is, w h y y o u n e e d it, a n d w h e r e t o o b t a i n i t all. T h e n I'll discuss h o w t o m i x , m o i s t e n , a n d place i t i n y o u r boxes. I f y o u d o i t right, you'll have the m o s t enjoyable g a r d e n i n g experience o f y o u r life. T h a t w o n d e r f u l feeling w i l l b e repeated every t i m e y o u p l a n t a n d replant every single square f o o t . Y o u r h a n d w i l l just slip t h r o u g h
88
the loose, easily w o r k e d , e a r t h y - s m e l l i n g soil, a n d y o u w i l l sigh w i t h h a p p i n e s s a n d smile every t i m e . It is t r u l y an e m o t i o n a l experience that v e r y f e w gardeners have ever e n c o u n t e r e d . B u t e n o u g h talk a n d t e a s i n g l e t ' s get started!
No More
T h i s is a partial list of just s o m e of the k n o w l e d g e y o u h a d t o learn a b o u t b a c k y a r d soils i n the past. B u t n o t n o w ! F o r g e t a b o u t every o n e o f t h e m . W h y ? Because Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g i s n o w s o s i m p l e y o u don't h a v e to learn all the intricate details of soil structure, texture, a n d drainage. Y o u don't even have t o k n o w w h a t p H m e a n s , h o w t o p r o n o u n c e it, or w h i c h letter is a capital a n d w h i c h is l o w e r case (or w h y p e o p l e are always g e t t i n g that m i x e d u p ) . W h y , y o u m a y ask? Because I've d e s i g n e d o u r perfect soil m i x w i t h the correct p H level (acid o r alkaline) for just a b o u t all plants. For those of y o u w h o crave m o r e information, a g o o d , blended, balanced c o m p o s t o n e o f the ingredients i n Mel's M i x a n d w h a t y o u will a d d to y o u r boxes after each h a r v e s t m a d e f r o m at least five different ingredients will n o t o n l y have a pH close to neutral, b u t it also balances the acidity in peat moss. In addition, since we don't use y o u r existing soil (remember we o n l y need 6 inches of pure Mel's M i x ) , y o u won't be concerned w i t h w h a t type of soil it is or w h a t the pH is. Y o u won't have to b u y a pH soil test kit or take samples to y o u r c o u n t y extension agent. Y o u won't have to learn that eastern U . S . A . soils are slightly acidic while western soils are m o r e alkaline, and y o u won't have t o learn w h a t t o add, h o w m u c h , and w h e n . Y o u won't have to b u y a spreader or a n y of that stuff.
No Fertilizer, No Mess
Mel's M i x has all the nutrients, minerals, a n d trace e l e m e n t s that plants need. So forget all a b o u t fertilizer. Isn't that amazing? N o t o n l y do y o u n o t have to b u y it, y o u don't even have to learn a b o u t it. S F G is an all-organic, all-natural m e t h o d . C o m e spring you'll find there is no w o r k to d o ; there is no g o i n g to the store, reading labels, l u g g i n g b i g bags or bales of soil additives h o m e , no spreading t h e m out, w o r k i n g in lime, getting a rototiller r u n n i n g and w o r k i n g t h e n trying to turn over that wet, m u c k y soil, getting it all over y o u r shoes and t o o l s o h , w h a t a mess that was. B u t that is all a t h i n g of the past. W h y , y o u don't even have to do the soilball test in the p a l m of y o u r h a n d o n l y to find o u t y o u have to
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success wait another w e e k because y o u r soil is t o o w e t or still frozen. (What's the soilball test, y o u ask? I'm n o t g o i n g to tell y o u because y o u don't need to k n o w it a n y longer.) Y o u r Mel's M i x i s always ready t o p l a n t n o m a t t e r w h a t the weather. It's always loose, friable (which the experts define as that w h i c h is easily w o r k e d g o o d a n d c r u m b l y ) , and ready for the right t i m e o f year t o p l a n t . I t drains a n d b e c o m e s u n f r o z e n s o m u c h quicker than regular garden soil.
89
Where Have You Been?

Planting a garden will no longer d e p e n d on w h e n the soil is ready but o n l y on the right date to plant seeds a n d transplants. T h i s is just one m o r e simplification o f gardening the Square F o o t way. H o w does that all sound? S i m p l e and e a s y n o w o r k , no muss, no fuss. I have had people ask m e , " W h y weren't y o u b o r n o n e h u n d r e d years ago s o I c o u l d have started w i t h Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g instead of h a v i n g to do all the w o r k of single-row gardening all my life?" G o o d question!
No Digging
U s i n g Mel's M i x c o m p l e t e l y eliminates all the hard w o r k o f d i g g i n g a n d m o v i n g e x i s t i n g soil. A 4 x 4 x l 2 - i n c h - d e e p area c o n t a i n s 16 c u b i c feet of soil that weighs well over 400 p o u n d s . That's a lot of soil t o d i g u p a n d m o v e a r o u n d . A l l g a r d e n i n g i n the past has b e e n based u p o n i m p r o v i n g y o u r existing soil. M y original b o o k h a d rather c o m p l i c a t e d i n s t r u c t i o n s for y o u r soil, b u t w e ' v e c h a n g e d all that. D o n ' t even b e c o n c e r n e d a b o u t it. Y o u don't have t o k n o w a n y t h i n g a b o u t soils. Just start w i t h a perfect g r o w i n g s o i l M e l ' s M i x o f 1 / 3 c o m p o s t , V 3 peat moss, a n d 1 / 3 vermiculite measured b y v o l u m e .
90
Like A Sponge
T h r o u g h m a n y experiments, I came up w i t h the very best ingredients for that perfect g r o w i n g soil. Of course, I m a d e sure they were all inexpensive, readily available, and able to hold just the right a m o u n t of moisture for plants while n o t b e c o m i n g too soggy for roots, w h i c h m i g h t d r o w n y o u r plants. I created a formula that holds moisture yet drains well. At first this seemed like an impossible task, b u t then I t h o u g h t about sponges. W h e n y o u take a d r y sponge and slowly add water to it, it just keeps soaking up water until it's finally saturated. At that
Three ingredients make up Mel's Mix: Peat moss, vermiculite, and blended compost. Combined properly, Mel's Mix retains moisture, drains perfectly, and has all the nutrients and trace minerals a plant could ever want.
point, any extra water just drains o u t the b o t t o m . W e l l , it turns o u t that t w o of our i n g r e d i e n t s p e a t moss and v e r m i c u l i t e d o exactly that same thing. It takes a while to w e t t h e m a n d keep them moist s o y o u have t o k e e p a d d i n g water, b u t f i n a l l y , w h e n they b e c o m e saturated, any excess water just drains right o u t the b o t t o m . Peat moss and vermiculite are sold at garden nurseries, h o m e improvem e n t centers, and even some grocery stores.
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success
91
An assortment of composts is shown here. You'll need at least 5 different types of compost for Mel's Mix. Pay no attention to weight; go by the volume, even if you have to estimate it.
Buying peat moss in 3.9 cubic foot bales is the most cost-efficient. The smaller bags of loose peat moss are more expensive. The same goes for vermiculite; ask for the I 4.0 cubic foot size. Don't settle for the small bags measured by quarts.
Make a neat cut in the top of your bags. This way, when you've finished making your own Mel's Mix, you can reuse the bags to store any leftover mix.
Important Note: If volume is not marked on the bags, compare them to similarly sized bags where volume is marked to estimate.
92
Math 101
T h e biggest p r o b l e m turns o u t to be arithmetic, n o t the materials. A l l three ingredients in Mel's M i x are sold in different-sized bags or bales, a n d this m a y m a k e i t harder t o figure o u t h o w m u c h o f each y o u need. B u t , don't worry, I'm g o i n g to give y o u s o m e examples so y o u won't even have to t h i n k a b o u t the m a t h .
1
a
My square foot garden has been the most productive, lowest maintenance garden I've ever had"
Pat from Utah
Compost
Let's take a m i n u t e to describe c o m p o s t . It is o n e - t h i r d of the Mel's M i x , and it is also w h a t y o u add to your A l l N e w Square Foot Garden after y o u harvest each square foot. So w h a t is it, h o w do y o u m a k e it, and w h y bother? C o m p o s t i s absolutely the best material i n w h i c h t o g r o w y o u r plants. G o o d compost has all the nutrients needed for plant growth. It's loose and friable and easily worked. It holds lots of moisture yet drains well. It's easy to m a k e yet hard to find. T h e best k i n d is h o m e m a d e c o m p o s t that y o u m a k e in your o w n backyard. T h e worst k i n d is the single ingredient byproduct some c o m p a n y has produced and bagged.
Good and Bad

So, let's simplify garden c o m p o s t i n g and garden c o m p o s t . First off, it's a very confusing subject because the w o r d " c o m p o s t " is b o t h a n o u n a n d a verb. As a n o u n , c o m p o s t is described as a rich, crumbly, soil-like material used in gardening. As a verb, it is the process of breaking d o w n plant material that is no longer g r o w i n g t h r o u g h a d e c o m p o s i t i o n process. To complicate the understanding of the garden-related, breakingd o w n process ( c o m p o s t as a v e r b ) , there are actually t w o types of p r o c e s s e s a e r o b i c , w i t h air; a n d anaerobic, w i t h o u t air. B o t h are a natural, M o t h e r Earth process. B u t the first, or aerobic, has no odor, heats u p , and does its j o b w i t h little microbes wearing w h i t e hats (the g o o d guys). T h e second, or anaerobic process, smells, is messy, a n d is v e r y o b j e c t i o n a b l e . T h e m o r e c o m m o n n a m e for this is rotting. I don't have to tell y o u that all these m i c r o b e bugs wear black hats (the b a d guys). It's true all those bad-guy, black-hat items will eventually d e c o m p o s e , b u t y o u don't w a n t to be a r o u n d w h i l e they d o .
What to Use
A n y plant material is perfect for a d d i n g to y o u r c o m p o s t pile as l o n g as it's n o t hosting a plant disease or pest. W h e n the ingredients are all p i l e d t o g e t h e r a n d i f t h e y have e n o u g h b u l k , t h e y w i l l d e c o m p o s e o r g a n i c a l l y by the aerobic process all by themselves. B u t it takes time; M o t h e r N a t u r e can't be hurried. S o m e people say, "I can't wait
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success for a year or t w o . H o w can I speed this process?" T h e answermix, mash, moisten, and move.
93
i i I i i i I i i
QUICK COMPOST Keep everything moist, make a big pile, and keep turning it. How often? Every day if you want the finished compost in two weeks; every week for results in three months; or every month for it to be ready in a year. The ideal conditions for the fastest results are: 1. Mix-add as many different, plant-based ingredients as you can find. 2. Mash-chop everything up into small pieces. 3. Moisten-not dry or wet, just moist. 4. Move-keep turning the pile towards the center where all the action is. The results will be the most amazing material you could hope for in your garden. It's often called black gold because of the color of the finished product called compost.
94
Needs Mass
U s i n g the right ingredients and m i x i n g , mashing, moistening, a n d m o v i n g t h e m will help speed the c o m p o s t i n g . B u t there is one m o r e ideal c o n d i t i o n , a n d that is mass. T h e m o r e b u l k y o u have in y o u r pile (up to a certain p o i n t ) , the faster it will c o m p o s t or d e c o m p o s e . If y o u r pile is taller than 4 feet, you'll have a hard time a d d i n g n e w ingredients. If the area is larger than 4 x 4 , the air will have trouble g e t t i n g i n t o the center w h e r e all the a c t i o n is a n d the w h i t e - h a t , g o o d - g u y microbes will turn into the black-hat, b a d - g u y microbes a n d the pile will start to d e c o m p o s e anaerobically (without air) a n d start to smell. If y o u don't have e n o u g h b u l k s m a l l e r than 3 x 3 , y o u r pile will just sit there and do n o t h i n g except cry o u t , "I'm g o i n g to w a i t for M o t h e r N a t u r e . " W e k e e p calling i t a pile, a n d y o u m a y w o n d e r i f i t w i l l b e u g l y a n d messy. B u t the pile c a n be c o n t a i n e d v e r y n i c e l y w i t h a h o m e m a d e or store-bought container called a composter. ( O h no! A n o t h e r name!) S o n o w , I'm g o i n g t o b e composting m y compost i n m y composter. You've got it! See, that wasn't so bad.
Still Confused?
W a y b a c k w h e n I w r o t e m y f i r s t b o o k o n S F G , I h a d n o idea people w o u l d be so c o n f u s e d a b o u t c o m p o s t i n g u n t i l I realized that o n l y 10 percent of gardeners actually c o m p o s t , another 10 percent don't ever w a n t to c o m p o s t , and the m i d d l e 80 percent say they w o u l d like t o b u t are c o n f u s e d a n d scared b y the process. O f course, m u c h o f that c o n f u s i o n i s f r o m n o t k n o w i n g h o w t o c o m p o s t aerobically. Let's summarize.
95
Compost Ingredients
W h a t y o u need to r e m e m b e r a b o u t the ingredients is that animal byproducts are n o t g o o d for y o u r c o m p o s t . Eggshells are okay; just crush a n d sprinkle a r o u n d . M a n u r e i s o k a y f r o m p l a n t - e a t i n g animals, b u t no m a n u r e f r o m meat-eating animals.
Turn the Handles or Chop, Chop, Chop

If y o u are in a real hurry, there are expensive, b u t effective, rotating d r u m c o m p o s t e r s y o u c a n buy. Y o u just t u r n a h a n d l e , flip a container, or p u s h a barrel around, and the contents are m i x e d a n d m o v e d . Great idea, a n d they w o r k if y o u do it regularly. I've also heard of, b u t never tried, the closed, black-plastic-bagof-ingredients-left-in-the-garage-over-the-winter m e t h o d . Be careful w h e n y o u o p e n the b a g because, as y o u can guess, that m e t h o d uses the black-hat, no air, anaerobic process that smells. S o m e gardeners have tried using plastic or m o l d e d garbage cans or even larger trash containers. Y o u have to drill or p o k e holes in them so the air can get in, b u t if the lid is tight-fitting, y o u c o u l d roll it around every day. O n m y P B S T V p r o g r a m , I s h o w e d h o w t o m a k e a rolling composter o u t of an old, cleaned oil d r u m . Y o u c o u l d push it w i t h your foot to roll it around. It was great. I've f o u n d f r o m m y o w n e x p e r i m e n t i n g that, n o matter w h a t m e t h o d y o u use, the s o o n e r y o u m i x a n d m o v e a n d the m o r e y o u mash (cut or c h o p ) , the s o o n e r a n d faster you'll start the c o m p o s t ing action g o i n g . Just a d d c o m p o s t ingredients b y m i x i n g i t i n w i t h the t o p of the existing pile. E a c h t i m e y o u a d d a lot or just a little, stir it into the t o p of the pile a n d m i x it in well. B u t , don't just a d d it in layers.
Practical Composting Tips

Mow Those Leaves
Save some of y o u r leaves f r o m fall to a d d to the c o m p o s t pile next year rather than all at once. After y o u rake t h e m u p , r u n the lawnm o w e r over t h e m to c h o p t h e m up and then stuff into plastic bags (make sure they are dry) or, if y o u are a "neatnik," store t h e m in gray garbage bins stored along the wall of y o u r c o m p o s t operation.
Dry That Grass

Others like to save their grass clippings the same way, but y o u have to be very careful. If piled u p , fresh green grass will q u i c k l y turn into a
96
black-hat, anaerobic operation that's a stinking, slimy, g o o e y mess. Grass clippings have to be dried before a d d i n g them to the pile or stored for later addition. It does seem like an o x y m o r o n to dry the grass clippings o n l y to moisten t h e m in the c o m p o s t pile, but n o w I'm sure y o u can see w h y we do it that way. I c o m p a r e it to my mother's meatloaf. She w o u l d d r y bread and then c r u m b l e it to m a k e bread c r u m b s . She w o u l d then add milk to moisten everything. If she had just added moist, fresh bread, it w o u l d have gotten c l u m p y and gooey. T h e c o m p o s t is similar. If material is p u t in wet, it packs d o w n in c l u m p s preventing air from entering the pile, and then it rots and smells. So spread y o u r grass clippings o u t on a tarp or the driveway, turn them a few times w i t h a rake or flip y o u r tarp before storing t h e m or a d d i n g t h e m t o y o u r c o m p o s t pile. H o w long? U n t i l the grass i s brownish and dry to the touch. It depends on the sun, humidity, a n d rain, as well as the climate of y o u r location.
Mix and Turn

T h i s is a g o o d t i m e to r e m i n d y o u that the center of the pile is w h e r e m o s t of the action is. It will be the hottest (up to 1 5 0 F o r 6 5 C ) , the moistest, a n d w i t h the m o s t w h i t e - h a t s r u n n i n g a r o u n d d e c o m p o s i n g the ingredients. K n o w i n g all that w h e n y o u t u r n the c o n t e n t s o f o n e c o m p o s t b i n i n t o another, y o u will b e p u t t i n g the t o p o f A into the b o t t o m o f B a s s u m i n g y o u have t w o bins o r piles s i d e - b y - s i d e t h e n y o u m a k e sure y o u p u t the o u t s i d e material of A into the inside of B. G e t it? It's just like the
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success t h e o r y that opposites attract. M i x i n (at the same time) o p p o s i t e colors, wetness, s i z e e v e r y t h i n g o p p o s i t e for the fastest o p e r a t i o n . I n other w o r d s , b r o w n w i t h green, w e t w i t h dry, coarse w i t h f i n e . That's all easy t o r e m e m b e r j u s t t h i n k o f opposites attracting a n d you'll have a great o p e r a t i o n .
97
If You Decide to Buy Compost

Don't b u y all o f o n e k i n d o f c o m p o s t i f y o u decide to not m a k e it yourself. D o n ' t let the clerk sell y o u the "best a n d m o s t popular," especially if it's loose a n d n o t b a g g e d . Here's w h y . All c o m m e r c i a l c o m p o s t is a b y p r o d u c t f r o m o n e industry. It m i g h t b e the w o o d , cattle, m u s h r o o m , cannery, c o t t o n , or s o y b e a n i n d u s t r y that has a waste p r o d u c t a n d t h e y h a v e t o get rid o f it. T h e y said, " W h a t i f w e take o u r w a s t e p r o d u c t (sawdust, m a n u r e , v i n e s , p u l p , o r husks) a n d c o m p o s t it, p e o p l e w i l l p a y us a n d take it away." E v e r y o n e l a u g h e d b u t , b y golly, i t h a p p e n e d just that way. N o w every industry w i t h a waste p r o d u c t is finding w a y s to get rid of it at a profit all the w h i l e protecting the e n v i r o n m e n t . W h a t a g o o d deal. T h e o n l y setback for gardeners is m o s t bags of c o m p o s t c o m e f r o m a single p r o d u c t and have only one ingredient. What's the solution? B u y a variety of c o m p o s t s and m i x t h e m together. N o w , y o u are m o r e likely to get a better mixture.
Do Big Time
If y o u are really into this, y o u can brainstorm to t h i n k of places that throw o u t organic or plant material. Like a bird shop and all those bird droppings that g o o n the b o t t o m o f the cage. A n d , h o w a b o u t the a n n u a l f i r e d e p a r t m e n t c o m m u n i t y b r e a k f a s t f r e s h fruit, banana and orange peels m a y b e , b u t also h o w a b o u t eggshells? Just ask a h e a d t a k e boxes or bags and ask t h e m to separate the trash. O r , h o w about the annual 4 t h o f July w a t e r m e l o n picnic i n town? T h e r e are all k i n d s of places w h e r e y o u c a n collect ingredients for y o u r c o m p o s t pile. A n d , y o u k n o w , the nice t h i n g i s that y o u ' l l f i n d the same situation the w o r l d over. W h e n I'm visiting foreign countries, my hosts say, " W e are p o o r here, and we have n o t h i n g to c o m p o s t . " I take t h e m on a tour and find all of these places h a v e t h i n g s that c o u l d be c o m p o s t e d . It's
98
always things people are t h r o w i n g out. I've d o n e that in India, Haiti, A r g e n t i n a , N e p a l , T h a i l a n d , G h a n a , a n d even i n L o n d o n , Paris, A m s t e r d a m , and N e w Y o r k City, so don't be afraid to g o , look, a n d a s k i t ' s o u t there.
Peat Moss
T h e s e c o n d i n g r e d i e n t i n M e l ' s M i x i s peat m o s s . It's a natural material o c c u r r i n g on the earth that has b e e n m a d e after m i l l i o n s o f years f r o m d e c o m p o s i n g p l a n t material. Y o u c a n usually d e t e r m i n e h o w o l d peat moss is by m e a s u r i n g h o w d e e p l y it's b u r i e d . It is c o m m o n l y used i n agriculture t o i m p r o v e existing soils because it m a k e s t h e m lighter, m o r e friable, a n d w a t e r retentive. T h e r e are plenty of debates a b o u t the use of peat moss because it's a nonrenewable resource. Because there is a limit to this valuable material I'd like to guide y o u in using it responsibly w h i l e m a x i m i z i n g its benefits.
Only a Little
T h e n e w S F G m e t h o d uses o n l y 2 0 p e r c e n t o f the space o f traditional s i n g l e - r o w gardens. T h e r e f o r e , y o u a u t o m a t i c a l l y use o n l y 2 0 p e r c e n t o n e - f i f t h a s m u c h peat m o s s , a n 8 0 p e r c e n t r e d u c t i o n . I n a d d i t i o n , w i t h Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , y o u a d d peat m o s s o n c e a n d o n l y o n c e w h e n y o u first create y o u r Mel's M i x . Thereafter, y o u ' l l never n e e d t o a d d peat m o s s t o the garden. ( W h a t y o u will a d d is c o m p o s t , w h i c h is renewable.) In the U n i t e d States, m o s t peat moss c o m e s f r o m the northern states a n d C a n a d a w h e r e it is still readily available. Because it's such a valuable resource, S F G says let's n o t waste it. Instead let's get rid of all single-row gardens that require five times as m u c h nonrenewable materials to improve the soil year after year. Let's be conservative a n d sensible and use w h a t we have, a beneficial, natural material, b u t m a k e it longer lasting.
Yermiculite
V e r m i c u l i t e , the third a n d final ingredient in Mel's M i x , is also a natural material a n d is obtainable all over the w o r l d . It's m i c a r o c k m i n e d o u t o f the g r o u n d . O n c e the r o c k i s collected, i t i s t h e n g r o u n d up into small particles a n d h e a t e d until it explodes just like
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success p o p c o r n , forming small pieces f r o m as large as the tip of y o u r little finger d o w n to almost a p o w d e r . H o w e v e r , this material is filled w i t h n o o k s a n d crannies, just like a n E n g l i s h m u f f i n . T h e s e n o o k s and crannies h o l d a t r e m e n d o u s a m o u n t of w a t e r a n d yet can breathe, m a k i n g the soil extremely friable a n d loose. T h e m o i s t u r e is always there for the roots to absorb. R e m e m b e r that roots don't g r o w t h r o u g h soil; t h e y g r o w a r o u n d soil particles. T h a t ' s w h y plants do better in a loose, friable soil because the roots have an easy t i m e g r o w i n g .
99
Certified
Vermiculite is graded into several s i z e s f i n e , m e d i u m , and c o a r s e and is also tested a n d qualified for different types of uses. T h e coarse agricultural grade holds the m o s t moisture w h i l e at the same time giving the m o s t friability to the soil mix. Y o u m a y find that s o m e stores do n o t carry vermiculite. If y o u ask t h e m why, y o u m i g h t hear a story that started m a n y years ago w h e n o n e m i n e in M o n t a n a was shut d o w n because part of the m i n e was f o u n d to contain asbestos. N o w , shutting d o w n a m i n e because it contains asbestos makes sense. However, s o m e newspaper stories associated the p r o b l e m w i t h all of the products c o m i n g from the m i n e . A l t h o u g h the m i n e was shut d o w n and the industry has p r o d u c e d a great deal of evidence that the contamination was n o t in the vermiculite, the story surfaces every few years as if it was new, thereby getting everyone upset all over again. It was a serious situation, b u t as a result, the g o o d news is that all the vermiculite mines a r o u n d the w o r l d a n d products sold are n o w meticulously inspected b y everyone; the bags w e b u y n o w even c o m e w i t h a "Certified Asbestos Free" sticker. Locating it can be difficult. Let y o u r fingers do the w a l k i n g and call around. C a l l all the major nurseries, garden supply centers, a n d major h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t stores and try to get the garden manager on the p h o n e a n d ask t h e m if they carry the large 4-cubic-foot bags of coarse vermiculite because you're b u i l d i n g a Square Foot G a r d e n . If that fails, l o o k u n d e r "greenhouse supplies or suppliers" in the yellow pages for wholesale distributors. S o m e people have f o u n d it at farm feed stores or even on the Internet. T h e r e is o n e c a u t i o n w h e n y o u m i x it, a n d it is the same c a u t i o n w i t h peat m o s s . B o t h materials are d u s t y w h e n d r y right o u t o f the b a g s o w e a r gloves a n d a p a i n t i n g m a s k . M i x o n l y o u t d o o r s on a c a l m day.
Perlite Instead of Vermiculite?

Perlite is another natural material m i n e d o u t of the earth a n d used in agriculture for the same purpose as v e r m i c u l i t e t o break up and loosen p o o r soils a n d to retain moisture. I personally don't like or use
100
perlite, a n d here's w h y . It is hard as a r o c k , rather coarse a n d gritty, and I don't like the feel of it in the soil m i x . It doesn't h o l d moisture like v e r m i c u l i t e . In a d d i t i o n , it floats to the t o p of the soil m i x as y o u water y o u r garden and because it's w h i t e , it looks rather unsighdy and unnatural. A n d it makes me sneeze! M a n y people do use perlite instead of vermiculite and, in fact, m o s t of the c o m m e r c i a l mixes are m a d e w i t h perlite because it's cheaper. It's a matter of preference and availability, b u t I k n o w w h i c h o n e I'm b u y i n g .
Buying W h a t You Need

If y o u f o u n d the m a t h about area difficult in previous chapters, don't even bother w i t h v o l u m e . G e t the kids to do the m a t h for y o u . W h y c o n c e r n y o u r s e l f w i t h v o l u m e ? Because y o u n e e d t o k n o w the q u a n t i t y o f the three ingredients for Mel's M i x necessary t o f i l l y o u r boxes, a n d the packages for the different ingredients c o m e in different sizes. B u t the g o o d n e w s is t h e y usually use c u b i c feet as their m e a s u r e m e n t . If n o t , disregard w e i g h t a n d estimate by v o l u m e . So, let's review h o w t o f i g u r e v o l u m e . V o l u m e is merely: area x d e p t h = c u b i c feet. In other w o r d s , square feet (the area) times the d e p t h equals c u b i c feet. O u r 4 x 4 - f o o t b o x is 16 square feet in area (that's 4 feet times 4 feet). If it were 1 foot deep, the v o l u m e w o u l d be: 16 (the area) times 1 (the d e p t h ) equals 16 c u b i c feet. B u t it's n o t 1 foot d e e p , it's o n l y 6 inches d e e p so we need o n l y one-half or just 8 cubic feet for our 4 x4 box. T h e m a t h l o o k s like this: 4 times 4 d i v i d e d by onehalf foot equals 8. Or to s h o w it mathematically, ( 4 x 4 ) / 2 = 8. ( N o w don't laugh, kids, some of the parents will be thankful for this k i n d of help).
Peat Moss (Compressed bale)

Full bale: 3.9 c u b i c feet c o m p r e s s e d = 8 c u b i c feet loose
H a l f bale: 2.2 c u b i c feet c o m p r e s s e d = 4 c u b i c feet loose (These measurements aren't exact, b u t we're n o t m i x i n g a cake here.)
Vermiculite (coarse)
D o n ' t b u y the small 4 - q u a r t sized o r similar b a g i n s i s t o n the 4-cubic-feet b i g bag. C a l l ahead to locate.
101
M e l ' s Mix Volume

N o w here's the t r i c k y part. S i n c e all the p r o d u c t s for Mel's M i x c o m e i n different v o l u m e s , y o u ' l l h a v e t o p u r c h a s e t h e m already k n o w i n g h o w m u c h y o u ' l l n e e d t o m i x correctly a n d fill y o u r boxes completely. Let's use a hypothetical example. If we h a d 4 x4 boxes, they w o u l d each have a v o l u m e of 8 c u b i c feet, as we determ i n e d already. S o , if we h a d six boxes to fill, we w o u l d need 6 x 8 = 48 cubic feet of m i x . (Six boxes times 8 c u b i c feet for each b o x equals 48 cubic feet of mix.) O n e - t h i r d of the total for each ingredient = 48/3 = 16 c u b i c feet of each. (A total of 48 c u b i c feet divided by three different ingredients equals 16 cubic feet of each ingredient.)
Shopping list
Peat Moss: 16/8 = t w o full bales
Vermiculite: 16/4 = four b i g bags Compost: W h a t e v e r it takes to get 16 cubic feet of five different kinds. Forget weight, measure by v o l u m e . U
More Shopping Lists for Different Sized Batches

I f y o u had three 4 x 4 boxes (24 c u b i c feet total), y o u w o u l d need: t w o 4-cubic-foot bags of coarse vermiculite to equal 8 c u b i c feet. o n e 3.9-cubic-foot bale of peat moss (expands to 8 c u b i c feet). a n d 8 c u b i c feet f r o m at least five different c o m p o s t s bags. I f the bags are sold b y w e i g h t only, estimate v o l u m e b y c o m p a r i n g to similar sized bags that note v o l u m e . If y o u had one 4 x 4 box and one 2 x 4 or one 3 x 3 box (12 cubic feet), a n d y o u w a n t e d t o m i x u p h a l f o f a b a t c h t o start w i t h , y o u w o u l d a d d t o g e t h e r just o n e 4 - c u b i c - f o o t b a g o f vermiculite, h a l f o f a 3 . 9 - c u b i c - f o o t bale of peat m o s s (or if y o u c a n find the 2.2^cubicfoot bales that e x p a n d to equal a b o u t 4 c u b i c feet loose), a n d t w o o f the 2 - c u b i c - f o o t bags o f c o m p o s t . I f the c o m p o s t c o m e s i n other sized b a g s , y o u m a y h a v e t o d o a little a r i t h m e t i c . T h a t ' s e n o u g h Mel's M i x to fill o n e 4 x4 b o x that needs 8 c u b i c feet plus o n e 2 x4 b o x that needs four c u b i c feet, or o n e 3 x3 b o x that needs 4 V 2 c u b i c feet.
Your book, website and method are just fantastic."

Annie from New fersey
How to Mix
T h i s is where m a k i n g y o u r Mel's M i x and filling y o u r boxes starts to get fun. M i x it all at o n c e if possible (storing any excess in recycled bags). B u t if it's too b i g a batch to handle, split it into smaller batches.
102
Here's a suggestion: Use a pair of scissors to cut o p e n y o u r bags carefully along the top so y o u can reuse t h e m . At the same time explain to the kids the environmental three R ' s r e d u c e , reuse, and recycle. O u r Square Foot G a r d e n i n g system is a great example of: 1. reduce, by 80 percent, 2. reuse, save the bags, and 3. recycle plants in y o u r c o m p o s t . G e t a large tarp, at least I 6 x l 6 - f e e t , a n d o p e n it near y o u r garden where y o u have all y o u r boxes built and located. M a k e sure y o u have t h e m in their final resting p l a c e c h e c k w i t h the boss one m o r e time and ask, "Are y o u sure this is where y o u w a n t all the boxes, dear?" A l l of the three ingredients are d u s t y w h e n dry, so do this w h e n there is no w i n d . D o n ' t do it in the garage, or you'll get dust all over y o u r nice n e w car or w o r k s h o p . W e a r a painter's m a s k a n d have a hose ready w i t h a v e r y fine spray. D o n ' t forget to have a few m i x i n g tools ready like a s n o w shovel, a h o e , or a steel rake. C o u n t o u t the bags a n d boxes, d o the m a t h o n e m o r e t i m e a n d start o p e n i n g the bags and p o u r i n g the contents o u t on the tarp w i t h o u t w a l k i n g on the ingredients. R o u g h l y m i x the three ingredients as
Empty the 5 bags ofdifferent best y o u Can as y o u p o u r it.
kinds of
of a
compost large
in
the tarp.
center
T h e n d r a g t w o corners of the tarp to the o p p o s i t e t w o corners.
You'll see the material roll over, m i x i n g itself. W h e n y o u ' v e p u l l e d
103
You should have a fairly large pile of blended compost (above).
To mix, take two corners of the tarp and drag the tarp over itself until the pile rolls to the edge of the tarp. It helps to have two people do this (below).
Once the compost is well mixed, add your vermiculite.
Next, add the peat moss.
These ingredients can be dusty, so water them lightly before mixing. You may also want to wear a protective mask.
Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success the tarp so that the m i x t u r e is a l m o s t to the edge, m o v e 90 degrees a n d p u l l those t w o corners over. Y o u just w o r k y o u r w a y a r o u n d the tarp a n d repeat p u l l i n g corners t o g e t h e r u n t i l y o u r M e l ' s M i x is u n i f o r m l y m i x e d . It's finished w h e n y o u don't see a n y single material or o n e color. Use the hose w i t h a fine mist or spray to w e t d o w n a n y dust, b u t don't spray so m u c h y o u m a k e puddles or w e t the ingredients so the mixture b e c o m e s t o o heavy to m o v e easily. D o n ' t let the kids play in the mixture, or t h e y will crush the large particles of vermiculite. (By the way, I'd save a small plastic b a g of v e r m i c u l i t e for seed starting. We'll get to seed starting in the next chapter.) T h e next step is to fill the boxes, w e t t i n g d o w n the m i x e d - i n layers o n l y as y o u fill it. O n c e the b o x is full a n d the t o p leveled off, don't p a c k it d o w n . It w i l l settle j u s t right by itself. If y o u have a n y leftover Mel's M i x , p u t it b a c k in the e m p t y bags y o u set aside for reuse. T h a t extra Mel's M i x w i l l c o m e i n h a n d y t o fill f o u r - p a c k s a n d use for transplants as w e l l as extra to t o p o f f the boxes w h e n the soil level settles. T u r n the bags inside o u t if y o u w a n t a plain look, label w i t h a marker, and p u t t h e m aside. Since y o u don't really water the m i x until it's in the b o x , y o u r stored m i x will be fairly dry and lightweight to carry. To fill other boxes, w o r k w i t h s o m e o n e else to drag the tarp close t o the n e w b o x e s . D o n ' t t r y t o carry shovelfuls o f m i x t o the b o x a s it will spill a n d be w a s t e d . T h i s is p r e c i o u s stuff. ( R e m e m b e r w h a t G r a n d m a always said, " W a s t e n o t , w a n t not.") T h a t ' s also w h y w e don't w a t e r the Mel's M i x i n the tarp, b u t a s y o u are a d d i n g it to the b o x t h a t w a y the r e m a i n i n g material in the tarp doesn't get so h e a v y that it is h a r d to drag. As s o o n as y o u a d d your grid to each box, y o u are ready to plant. Y o u have n o w c o m p l e t e d the m o s t i m p o r t a n t and rewarding step
105
i. L1.JL.U..1 i.
Don't wet the soil any more than is absolutely necessary; use a fine spray to reduce any dust. Soil becomes very heavy when wet, and it would be difficult to drag the tarp around your yard.
106
The finished Mel's Mix should look in S F G . If y o u followed the formula correctly, and didn't add any of similar to this photo. y o u r existing soil, it will stay loose and friable as l o n g as y o u live and y o u will be so excited and happy. Y o u m a y have to keep one square just for show; visitors to y o u r garden will w a t c h as y o u say, "Just l o o k at this soil as y o u r u n y o u r hands t h r o u g h it." M a n y of y o u will then add, " H e r e , y o u try it. Just feel this soil." (But don't b e c o m e a pest.)
An Afterthought
I w a n t to m a k e d o u b l y sure y o u got the message of this chapter, so I'd like to summarize the critical facts about c o m p o s t . Y o u need blended c o m p o s t m a d e f r o m at least five different ingredients. M i x several different types o f c o m p o s t together i f y o u b u y y o u r c o m p o s t . M o s t c o m m e r c i a l c o m p o s t s have o n l y o n e o r t w o ingredients because t h e y are m e r e l y leftover waste materials or b y p r o d u c t s f r o m an industrial o r c o m m e r c i a l o p e r a t i o n . B y themselves, t h e y d o n o t m a k e a g o o d ingredient in Mel's M i x . H o w e v e r , the g o o d n e w s is, if y o u can find at least five of these individual c o m p o s t e d materials y o u can m i x t h e m together to m a k e a well-rounded blended c o m p o s t ingredient for y o u r Mel's M i x . A n d i f y o u d i d y o u r j o b a n d got a b l e n d e d c o m p o s t m a d e f r o m at least five m a j o r ingredients, y o u will be blessed w i t h the m o s t w o n d e r f u l garden y o u could ever imagine. A n d no more work ever.
N .ow we're
Gardening.
getting to the interesting and fun part of Square Foot
With your grid in place, it's easy to have a stunning garden by planting a different crop in every square.
You've learned all of the basics. You've picked the size, shape, and location of your garden. You've built the frames, put in the Mel's M i x , and added the grids. N o w it's time to plant. This chapter is going to instruct you on your plant choices, h o w to put your seeds in the garden with the proper spacing (it's as easy as Z i p - Z a p , B i n g - B i n g - B i n g you'll see), and growing your o w n transplants for the quickest, most dependable growth.
108
Visualize the Harvest

In S F G , begin by visualizing what you want to harvest. T h i s simple step prevents you from planting too much. Picture a large plant like a head of cabbage. T h a t single cabbage will take up a whole square foot so you can only plant one per square foot. It's the same with broccoli and cauliflower. Let's go to the opposite end of the spectrum and think of the small plants like radishes. Sixteen can fit into a single square foot. It's the same for onions and carrotssixteen per square foot. (Yet that's a 3-inch spacing between plants, which is exactly the same spacing the seed packet recommends as it says "thin to 3 inches apart.") Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large T h i n k of these plants as if they were shirt sizes. Shirts come in all four sizes: small, medium, large, and extra large, and so do our plants. It's that simple. T h e extra large, of course, are those that take up the entire square f o o t p l a n t s like cabbages, peppers, broccoli, cauliflower, and geraniums. N e x t are the large p l a n t s t h o s e that can be planted four to a square foot, w h i c h equals 6 inches apart. Large plants include leaf lettuce, dwarf marigolds, Swiss chard, and parsley. Several crops could be 1 per square foot if y o u let it grow to its full size or it can be planted 4 per square feet if y o u harvest the outer leaves t h r o u g h o u t the season. T h i s category includes parsley, basil, and even the larger heads of leaf lettuce and Swiss chard. Using the S F G method, y o u snip and constantly harvest the outer leaves of edible greens, so they don't take up as m u c h space as in a conventional garden. M e d i u m plants come next. T h e y fit nine to every square foot, which equals 4 inches apart. M e d i u m plants include bush beans, beets, and large turnips.
For extra large plants, locate seeds or plants right in the middle of your square.
109
To help keep up w i t h this, y o u may w a n t to c o p y this chart so y o u always have it handy. S o m e people even have it laminated so they can take it outdoors w i t h o u t w o r r y i n g about the weather destroying it. A n o t h e r way to get the proper spacing and number per square foot is to be a little more scientific and do a little arithmetic as shown below. You can see that one, four, nine, or sixteen plants should be spaced an equivalent number of inches apart. This is the same distance the seed packet will say "thin to." Of course we don't have to "thin to" because we don't plant a whole packet of seeds anymore. So if you're planting seeds, or even putting in transplants that y o u purchased or grew from seed, just find the seed packet or planting directions to see what the distance is for
110
How
to
Plant
Your
All
New
Square
Foot
Garden
111
For crops that can fit four to a square foot, divide the square into four sections and poke a hole in the middle of each section.
Plant seedsjust a pinch of two or three seeds depending on sizeinto the holes you poked into the squares.
thinning. This distance then determines whether you're going to plant one, four, nine, or sixteen plants. Just because we're talking about measuring in inches doesn't mean you have to get out your ruler or yardstick, and y o u don't have to do any complicated measuring or figuring either. This is when the grid becomes handy. W h e n your square foot is bordered by a grid, it's m u c h easier to think one, four, nine, or sixteen plants in each square foot. All y o u do is draw lines in the soil w i t h your fingers! For one plant per square foot just poke a hole in the middle of the square w i t h your finger. For four per square foot, draw a vertical and horizontal line dividing the square in half each way. T h e plants go right in the center of these four smaller squares.
112
How Much to Plant

I recommend, especially at the beginning, that y o u plant only what y o u want to eat. Occasionally try something new, of course, but especially at first only grow those vegetables and herbs that y o u normally eat. Remember, plant each adjoining square foot with a different crop. W h y ? Here are several reasons: 1. It prevents y o u from overplanting any one particular item. 2. It allows y o u to stagger your harvest by planting one square foot this week and another of the same crop in two weeks or so. 3. It promotes conservation, companion planting, crop rotation, and allows better plant hygiene and reduced pest problems. 4. It automatically helps to improve your growing soil three times a year in very easy, small steps. Remember the saying, "Square by square, you'll soon be there." 5. Besides all of the above, it looks pretty. Just like a patchwork quilt, the different colors, leaf textures, plant densities, shapes, and heights, plus the visible grid will give y o u a very distinctive, photo-opportunity garden. You'll just love and admire it everytime y o u see it. Some people ask, " W h y can't we plant all sixteen squares with leaf lettuce or spinach or Swiss chard or whatever we want to plant?" O h , that's g o i n g right back to the single-row mentality. Square Foot Gardening begins with visualizing the harvest. It's very difficult to put in four tiny plants of Swiss chard and think that's going to be enough for the whole family, but one square of red and one square of green chard usually is more than most families eat. Proof of the pudding .. . h o w m a n y bunches of Swiss chard did y o u buy last week or even last month? T h e stores have it, it's fresh, and it looks good, so w h y didn't y o u b u y any more than y o u did? Well, it's the same answer as to w h y y o u shouldn't plant too m u c h of one thing. It's w o r t h repeating here that the biggest problem for single-row gardeners has always been "I planted too m u c h . I can't take care of it. It's too m u c h w o r k and I'm sorry now." All that has changed with S F G and y o u n o w have boundaries (the grid) and the opportunity to ask yourself, "For every single square foot I plant, is that enough? Do I really w a n t more? W o u l d it be better to plant another square foot of the same thing in a week or two or three?"
Time of Year
Keep in m i n d that y o u can build a Square Foot Garden anytime of the yearspring, summer, fall, and even winter. For most of the country, y o u could start planting in any season odier than winter. W h a t time of
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden the year is it right n o w for y o u and where are y o u in the sequence of a yearly gardening cycle? T h i n k of it like the movie theater before the main feature. You're all settled in w i t h y o u r p o p c o r n , ready to devote your full attention to the movie. In the gardening year, this is usually the equivalent of springtime. W h a t if y o u came in the middle of the picture? For gardening that w o u l d be s u m m e r t i m e . Y o u can still plant a w a r m weather crop even if y o u missed the spring crop. If it's n o w fall, y o u can still start your S F G with a great cool-weather crop and get some valuable experience before next spring. Start whenever y o u get the urge to plant. For convenience, we'll start with the beginning of the garden year for most of the country, springtime. (Some parts of the country, like Texas and Florida, can grow all year long. Y o u lucky people.)
Seasonal Plants
You can get at least three crops a year in every square foot of your S F G . Every choice is g o i n g to be fun, exciting, and tasty. Of course, y o u r selection depends on the time of year, and w h a t y o u and y o u r family need and w a n t . T h e r e are two types of crops w h e n y o u consider weather. T h e first are called cool-weather crops that do best in the spring and fall, but won't survive in the hot summer. T h e second group is the w a r m or hot-weather crops that, y o u guessed it, don't do well in the cool weather of spring and fall, but thrive in the h o t weather of summer.
Hardiness and Protection with SFG

SFG's size makes it very easy to protect y o u r n e w plantings from an extra early or late frost. There's a lot more information about frosts and freezes in Chapter 9, especially if y o u are interested in extending the season, as well as ways to protect your plants so y o u can get more from your garden. Plants aren't all the same, of course. T h e y are just like people. S o m e can stand the heat, cold, or humidity better than others. We classify these as hardy, and those that can't handle it as non-hardy. Each of the four seasons has three time p e r i o d s the early season, midseason, and late season. If you're thinking about a spring crop, for example, there may be some vegetables that can only grow in the mid-part of the spring while others can tolerate a little more cold in the beginning of the season, but can't stand any heat at all near the late part of the season. It
114
takes a little while to get used to which is which, and h o w best they fit in with your planting schedule. T h o u g h the weather is never exactly the same every year, it helps to k n o w a plant's hardiness. Don't w o r r y y o u ' l l learn it in time. T h i s is not an exact science so relax if you're a beginner and just enjoy the ride. Don't expect to find a perfect list because h o w well plants thrive differs in different parts of the country and of course, different years, sometimes for no explainable reason. If y o u lose a few squares of s o m e t h i n g one year it's no big deal. It doesn't m e a n you're not g o i n g to be a great gardener.
Frost Dates
A l t h o u g h people like to celebrate the first day of spring (March 20th) according to the calendar, plants don't give a hoot about our c a l e n d a r they respond to weather. In the spring we need to k n o w the date of the last frost in our area. T h a t will help us determine w h e n to plant. Each different c r o p w h e t h e r cool-season or warm-seasonwill need to be planted so many weeks before or after that last day of frost. For plants, the fall g r o w i n g season begins n o t w i t h the first calendar day of fall (September 2 3 r d ) , but w i t h the first frost and continues until the first freeze of the fall. T h e average dates of your first and last frost depend on where y o u live in the c o u n t r y and the regional and local variations of weather. All we can do is go by the past and h o p e it will be similar this year. To help, the government collects dates for your area and calculates the average date from the past 100 years. Of course, the average is only a guide. H o w do y o u find your local frost dates? T h e Internet is the best resource for detailed information. You can also call your local county extension agent or most area nurseries. To find your local extension agent, look in the Government blue pages for your county in your telephone book, then look for the heading "Extension of [your state] University."
Frost Date Websites

You can access your frost dates on any number of websites, by entering "frost dates" in the search engine. T h e best one I've f o u n d is www.victoryseeds.com/hardzone. T h i s Internet site has the frost dates and hardiness zone maps for the entire United States as well as C a n a d a , and links for hardiness zones for Australia, Europe, the Ukraine (in English), and C h i n a (also in English). T h e hardiness zone map for the United States is interactive, y o u just point to where y o u live and click, and y o u get the information. T h i s site also links to y o u r
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden local university extension service. Let the experts advise y o u on the varieties that will do best in your local area.
115
Sequence of Growth
D i d y o u k n o w that plants grow and b l o o m everywhere in the same sequence? In other words, throughout the country, daffodils b l o o m in the springtime, then a little later tulips b l o o m , then it's time for the lilacs to bloom. (Did I leave out dandelions?) Start noticing the sequence in your location. It w o u l d include trees, shrubs, flowers, even weeds. I read a b o o k once about following spring north. It's theoretically possible that if y o u drive fast e n o u g h (and eat and sleep quickly), y o u could see nothing but tulips in bloom all the way from Georgia to Maine. If y o u k n o w w h a t kinds of plants are s u m m e r crops (the most popular and w e l l - k n o w n vegetables), it's easy to remember that everything else is a spring or fall crop. Summer crops include beans, peppers, eggplants, tomatoes, and squash. If y o u plant these w h e n it's too early or cool, they'll either die or their growth will most likely be stunted for that year.
"You have got me so excited about gardening again; I love teaching SFG. It is so much more successful than other methods. I don't know why all gardeners and farmers aren't using it."
Mike from Utah
Charts
I've designed charts for All N e w Square Foot Gardening so you'll k n o w when to plant and in w h a t order. T h e s e charts will guide y o u along, providing seed-to-sprouting times at certain soil temperatures. I've also included calendar charts that show, based u p o n area frost dates (assuming y o u have a frost), h o w soon before or after a frost y o u can plant a given crop. You'll find that some plants are very frost-hardy and can be planted m u c h earlier than those that are just on the borderline. Turn to page 2 5 2 to see the charts.
Plan on a Fall Crop

As soon as the s u m m e r crop is finished, you're ready to plant coolweather crops for the u p c o m i n g fall. T h e s e crops are frost-hardy, meaning that both y o u n g and mature plants withstand frost. T h e seeds y o u plant at the end of s u m m e r will sprout quickly since the soil is warmer. Transplants can begin outdoors and grow m u c h faster than the same thing planted in the spring. L o o k at the charts; compare sprouting times for the same seeds in both spring and summer temperatures. T h e fall crop gains an extra advantage from late summer weather. T h e problem with cool-weather plants in the spring is not cool weather but w a r m weather at harvest time. A plant's purpose in life is to reproduce seed, and the rising temperatures of an approaching summer make this happen sooner. As it does so, the plant's w h o l e character
116
changes. M a n y people don't realize that plants like lettuce put up a flower stalk, w h i c h then goes to seed. If y o u wait too l o n g to harvest lettuce, the stalk will shoot up, and the same thing happens to other crops like cabbage. T h e head splits open, a stalk shoots up, develops flowers, and then turns to seed. It's nature's w a y of allowing the plant to reproduce, but the plant changes taste w h e n this happens. All the energy goes toward the seed and the plant itself, as far as taste is concerned, becomes rather tough, coarse, and bitter. In cooler weather, this process is delayed. T h e plant feels no urgency to complete the growing cycle. So in the fall, the plant slows its maturation process, allowing it to maintain flavor for a longer length of time as temperatures continue to grow cooler and cooler. If it's frost-hardy, it doesn't matter if it is the middle of fall and y o u start getting frost. Some plants can endure some freezing and still provide a crop for harvesting. Fall is a great time to plant if y o u put in the right crops.
Soil Temperature
Soil temperatures vastly influence sprouting times. For example, if y o u plant carrot seeds in the summertime w h e n the temperature of the soil is between 60 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit, the seeds will sprout in less than a week. But if y o u plant the same seeds in early spring w h e n the ground temperature is perhaps 40 degrees, they will take a m o n t h and a half to sprout. Just another 10 degrees warmer and they will sprout in a little over two weeks. T h e chart shows that w h e n the soil is cold and freezing, no seeds will sprout. W h e n it warms up to 40 only half of them will sprout; but as soon as it gets to 50 degrees, suddenly almost all of them will sprout and will continue right through the warmer temperatures of summer and fall. W h a t happens to seeds w h e n they don't sprout because the ground is cold? T h e y could rot, or fungus could attack them. T h e y could break their d o r m a n c y and then go dry. T h e y could be attacked by insects, or d u g up by animals or birds. So, the quicker y o u can get them to sprout the better off they will be.
Spring, Summer, and Fall Crops

Some crops, like the cabbage family, take so long to grow that there isn't e n o u g h time to plant seeds directly in the garden and wait for the harvest. So y o u have to buy from nurseries or raise your o w n transplants indoors ahead of time. T h e same situation applies to the warm-weather summer crops like tomatoes, peppers, and eggplants. T h e y take so long to produce that y o u must plant y o u r garden w i t h transplants. T h e charts show this all in detail, indicating w h e n to start seeds and w h e n to transplant.
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden T h e fall crop is better for raising your own transplants because y o u will be able to start the seeds in the summertime, raise the transplants outdoors in your garden, and then move them into their permanent spot in the early fall for late fall harvest.
111
Starting Seeds and Growing Seedlings

T h e r e are plenty of advantages to growing your o w n transplants and storing the remaining seeds in their packet until next year. First, seeds cost pennies, while transplants cost dollars. T h e r e are m a n y more varieties offered in seed catalogs than as transplants at the nurseries. T h e only setback is time because growing your o w n transplants depends on the time and w o r k y o u can spare. If you're a brand new gardener, however, y o u may want to wait until next year to start your o w n transplants. Like everything else in life, we tend to go overboard and do too m u c h and then it becomes a chore. Don't let it happen to you!
Storage of Seeds
If your seeds are stored properly, they will last for many years. Contrary to what the gardening industry w o u l d like y o u to believe, it is not necessary to buy fresh seeds every year or to pour out that whole packet of seeds all at once. S F G teaches y o u to plant just a pinch of seeds.
Although it's a great idea to start your own transplants from seed, this is an example of what not to do. It's not necessary to sow so much when you practice the SFG method.
118
T h e n store the rest. By planting just a pinch of seeds instead of a whole packet, y o u can save a lot of money by saving the excess seeds for next year's crop, and the next year's, and so on. Some seeds will last up to five years. Seed companies guarantee that a certain percentage will sprout; this number is always very high, usually up into the nineties. Of course the seed industry wants y o u to b u y a fresh packet of seeds every year so they can stay in business. There's nothing w r o n g with that! But there's also nothing w r o n g with saving m o n e y with a more efficient system.
How to Store Seeds

W h a t is the ideal storage condition for seeds? It is just the opposite of the moisture and warmth that make them sprout. You'll want to store them in a cool, dry p l a c e t h e driest, coldest place in your home. Some people freeze their seeds. But I find they get moisture even if they are in a zip-lock bag because it never seems to be totally airtight. I prefer refrigerating them in a wide-mouth jar with a screw lid. Label y o u r containers and store them in the refrigerator on a back shelf. In each jar place a desiccant packet from a film container, or medicine vial, or add a little powdered milk wrapped in a tissue to soak up any excess moisture in the jar.
Germination Rate
W h a t happens to seeds that are in storage? As they grow older, their germination rate (the | percentage that sprouts under ideal conditions) gradually diminishes. B u t the solution is very simple. Plant a p i n c h of s e e d s j u s t t w o to t h r e e i n s t e a d of o n l y one to ensure that at least one will sprout. If y o u r seeds are m a n y years old, test the germination rate yourself or just plant three or five or however m a n y seeds d e p e n d i n g on h o w well they sprouted the year before. If y o u m a r k e d the sprouting rate on the packet, y o u can reasonably estimate h o w m a n y to plant the next year.
W h a t Did I Do Wrong?
K n o w i n g that roots sprout first will help your seeds successfully grow. Here's why. Traditionally, gardeners hoed open a row, planted, covered, watered, and then walked away from their garden hoping for the best. If nothing grew, single-row gardeners thought the worst: "Maybe they were bad seeds. Or worse, maybe I'm a terrible gardener!" W h a t all of these gardeners did not realize was that the seed might have already sprouted,
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden perhaps after a week or t w o , and the root was heading d o w n before the top could come up and break the surface. If the gardener gave up and quit watering, it is possible that their seed did die. W h y ? Because if the soil dries below the s e e d i n the root zone only 1 or 2 inches below the surfacethe root will wither and die from lack of moisture. But if the gardener had kept the soil moist, then the seeds w o u l d have had a g o o d chance to put the root d o w n to support the plant and its n e w shoot.
119
Keeping Records
M a n y gardeners keep planting d a t a w h e n , what, and where they plant, h o w long it takes to sprout, and h o w well their plants grow. It may sound like a lot of b o o k k e e p i n g , yet some people enjoy recording their garden data and even set up computerized spreadsheets to make computations from this information. I don't bother to keep all these details myself, but if y o u enjoy it, this m a y help y o u learn faster and measure the progress more effectively.
Moving Plants
A S F G garden is small, and I've been able to change things around once they were all planted. It doesn't take m u c h to move and replant something from one square to another if y o u think it w o u l d look better somewhere else. It's k i n d of like arranging a r o o m of furniture and pictures on a wall. Y o u can m a k e all kinds of layouts and drawings even to scale, but I guarantee y o u once everything is in place, you'll change your mind.
Drop a Pinch
We have learned about seed size and shape and storage and sprouting conditions. T h e next thing is to practice planting. Y o u can do this indoors in the winter before y o u start y o u r garden. Take different kinds of seeds from the tiniest to the largest and practice picking up and d r o p p i n g a pinch of seeds o n t o a piece of white paper to c o u n t your results. T h i s is really a lot of fun, almost a family game. There is a very practical reason for doing this. W h e n I tell people to just plant a pinch of s e e d s t w o or t h r e e I think I have given them all the instructions they need. But I always find so m u c h variation in h o w
120
m a n y seeds they end up planting. It's in your finger dexterity, and y o u may need a little practice. If y o u are having trouble, y o u may even want to use a spoon for picking up that pinch of seeds. A white plastic spoon usually works great, especially if you're using darker colored seeds. If y o u scoop up too many, y o u can just shake a few back into the palm of your hand.
How Deep?
H o w deep should y o u plant a seed? This depends a lot on the size of the seed and the soil y o u plant it in. Generally speaking, a seed's depth is t w o to four times the thickness of the seed. It's important to place your seeds below a moist surface to prevent it from drying out. T o o close to the surface and it can dry out from the h o t sun. O n c e a seed receives moisture and begins sprouting (known as "breaking dormancy"), it will die if it dries out so don't forget to water regularly.
121
Plant seeds 2 to 4 times the depth of their size. When they've sprouted, transplant them into four packs. When they're large enough and the right time comes, move them into their own square foot.
Too Deep Isn't a Problem You don't have to worry too m u c h about placing your seed too deep, in part because your Mel's M i x is loose and friable. If the seed is planted too deep for the k i n d of seed it is, as soon as it begins to receive moisture, nature will tell it, " G e t going, buddy, put some roots d o w n and start growing." T h a t sprout can push right up through Mel's M i x because there are a lot of nooks and crannies and the soil is very easy to move. T h i s is one of the hidden advantages of starting w i t h perfect soil. It almost guarantees that all of your seeds will grow into plants.
Time to Sprout
H o w long does it take to sprout seeds? T h e chart in the Appendix shows how many days it takes various types of seeds to sprout at various temperatures. In addition, what percentage can y o u expect to sprout? T h i s chart can be valuable to y o u and should be used whenever y o u plant seeds. If y o u k n o w ahead of time it's going to take 10 days for the seeds to sprout at the average o u t d o o r temperatures, then y o u won't be a nervous Nelly every day wondering w h e n , but y o u will know to keep that soil moist for those number of days. You can also judge from the percentage that will sprout at that temperature, h o w many extra beyond two or three seeds to plant to ensure one good healthy plant.
Presoaking
Before planting your seeds, give them a jump-start by presoaking them. W h i l e some can be soaked overnight, some fall apart after only an hour; it depends on the seed. Big seeds should be soaked for only about a half hour to an hour. Bean and pea seeds, w h i c h m i g h t look shriveled up,
122
swell up and break in half if y o u soak them too long. Beware, water makes some seeds slippery. A plastic spoon can help y o u handle them.
Indoor Seed Sprouting

T h e easiest w a y to sprout seeds indoors is to place t h e m on a moist paper towel. T h e n p u t the paper towel and seeds in a very shallow tray or dish; keep it moist (a plastic bag w o u l d be h a n d y to maintain moisture) and in a warm place in the house. C h e c k daily; w h e n y o u see roots, it's time to plant. Rather than handling the seed at this point, carefully cut the paper towel into little squares, and lift each one out w i t h a knife. N o w you're ready to take it outside, plant it in your S F G filled w i t h Mel's M i x , cover it, and give it a drink of water. You've just given your plant a head s t a r t i n about half the time. Instead of fourteen days, y o u m a y see a sprout c o m i n g up in just six. Starting Transplants Indoors N o w it's time to decide whether y o u want to grow your o w n transplants indoors rather than direct seeding out-of-doors. To raise y o u r o w n seedlings, y o u need a little bit of paraphernalia: Mel's M i x , a few cups and saucers, four-packs, and trays. Start y o u r seeds in a little cup of vermiculite and transplant them into four-packs filled w i t h Mel's M i x after they begin growing. Seed Leaf W h e n you're sprouting seeds in a cup of vermiculite, I suggest y o u transplant them into the four-pack as soon as the tops have sprouted and y o u see the first two leaves called the seed leaves. M o s t garden experts say to wait until y o u have t w o "true" leaves, but I have found that if y o u wait until the set of true leaves develops, the roots have already grown so long and tangled that it's almost too late to transplant. T h e seed leaf comes first, and it's usually a fairly flat, large leaf that doesn't l o o k like the plant's regular leaves. T h e first set of "true" leaves comes o u t next as the stem grows higher. Lift By Its Ears W h e n the seeds have seed leaves and you're ready to transplant to the four-pack, carefully
lift the plant by holding on to
one o f the seed leaves
between t w o fingers. T h e n w i t h y o u r pencil, dig in the vermiculite, loosen it up, and lift the whole plant o u t r o o t and a l l f r o m the b o t t o m while your other hand is holding the top of the plant by one of the seed leaves. Don't touch the plant stem, just the leaf. If the roots are very long, trim off the b o t t o m third w i t h a pair of scissors. Don't w o r r y . . . y o u won't kill the plant. For every root y o u cut off, two n e w roots will sprout as it branches out, creating a m u c h stronger plant.
To start seeds for growing your own seedlings, poke some holes into the bottom of a container. (This is a leftover plastic container shown in the photo.) Till the container with vermiculite and pour water around the rim of the plate.
Add enough water until you notice a very slight color change to the vermiculite (it becomes darker). Pour a few seeds into the palm of your hand.
Pinch a few seeds with your thumb and forefinger.
Sprinkle the seeds across the surface of the vermiculite.
Cover the seeds with a thin layer of vermiculite (unless they need light to germinate; check the seed package).
After the seeds sprout, take your pencil and make a hole in one cell of your four-pack, or outdoors in your garden soil. T h e n lower the plant root d o w n into the hole. M a k e sure the hole's big enough to hold the whole root. Take the point of the pencil and push the Mel's M i x around the plant. Plant it a little lower than w h e n it sprouted. Give it some water, either from above for outdoors or from below for indoors in four-packs, and then give it shade immediately. Sun will kill that y o u n g seedling. In fact, if you're outdoors, always w o r k in your o w n shadow, then make sure the plant has shade for at least a couple of days. (Refer to C h a p t e r 4 for information about how to build shade cages.) T h e n y o u can let it have brighter light and then finally full sunlight.
How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden Trim the Roots W h e n y o u place transplants into the garden, take a look at the roots to see if they are r o o t b o u n d , in other words, if they've grown in a circle. My solution for a r o o t b o u n d plant is to take that same pair of scissors and just cut off the b o t t o m roots. Yes, the w h o l e t h i n g t h e mass of roots and the soil. T h e n all the ends of the roots, wherever they are, will branch and send out little feeder roots. Lower the whole plant into the hole at the proper spacing in your outdoor garden.
125
You can trim excess roots by snipping them off with your garden shears.
Push the mix around seedlings to form a slight saucer shape in the mix. Because of the saucer shape, water is directed straight down to the roots.
126 Water Well
O n e caution: the plant and root should be very w e t before y o u transplant into your S F G . Take your four-pack and let it float in a bucket of w a r m water until it sinks and there are no more bubbles c o m i n g up. That's w h e n y o u k n o w the plants are totally saturated with water. T h e n take it out, pop each plant out of its container, cut the root bottoms off, and plant it. Your garden soil should be moist, so you're not putting a wet plant into dry ground. D r y ground will suck the moisture right out of THE roots. Saucer-Shaped Depression
L was surprised at how much I could get from such a small area.'
Michael from Georgia
N e x t , push the soil back around the plant to form a slight saucer shape in the soil. M a k e sure y o u plant at the level of the soil, factoring in the slight depression of the saucer. Because of the saucer shape, water goes straight d o w n to the roots. We don't w a n t to water the rest of the square foot if we don't have to. How's that for conserving water?
Outdoor Seed Sprouting

T h e procedure for o u t d o o r seed sprouting, transplanting into 4-packs, watering, and then planting into the garden is all the same, just in m u c h nicer weather. Late afternoon on a cloudy day is the best time. Hardening Off H a r d e n i n g off is the process of getting the plant adjusted to a n e w e n v i r o n m e n t l i k e g o i n g from indoors to outdoors. It's important that y o u r plants are acclimated gradually so they can get used to their n e w location and different weather conditions. T h i s requires some effort because y o u don't w a n t t h e m out at night w h e n it's cold or freezing and y o u also don't w a n t t h e m out in the b u r n i n g hot sun in the daytime. Regulate Sunlight and Heat To help harden off plants, regulate the sun exposure. If it's h o t out, place y o u r plants out in the sunlight in the m o r n i n g , but at n o o n t i m e provide some shade. Let them receive direct sunlight in the early m o r n i n g , shade at midday, and perhaps, w h e n the sun starts d o w n , a little more direct light in the afternoon. N o w that's really pampering y o u r garden plants. A n d don't forget the little drinks of water every n o w and then. Actually all that sun, then shade, then sun can easily be done w i t h a shingle stuck in the g r o u n d at the right place and the right angle.
127
Can't Dry Out

To keep y o u r newly planted seeds from c o o k i n g in the hot sun, cover the square w i t h a piece of cardboard cut to fit in the grid. Estimate the soil temperature and sprout time (see the charts in the A p p e n d i x ) , then write the sprout date and the date y o u planted it on the cardboard w i t h a m a g i c marker. W e i g h t d o w n the cardboard to keep it from flying away in the w i n d . Of course, you'll need to lift the cardboard before y o u sprinkle water on the soil surface to keep the soil moist, and then remove it a day or t w o before the sprout date.
Spacing
H o w many plants will fit into a square foot? T h e numbers are so simple and easy to remember: 1, 4, 9, or 16. If y o u like math, and w h o doesn't, y o u will recognize right away that these numbers happen to be the squares of 1, 2, 3, and 4. A n d , in addition to the fact that we're gardening in square foot plots, that's h o w Square Foot Gardening got its name . . . because it's as simple as one, two, three, four. T h e number of plants y o u grow in a square foot depends on a plant's size w h e n it's fully grown. ( G o to the chart in the Appendix to see mature plant sizes.) You can also figure it out very easily from the "thin to," directions on a seed packet. (Now, every time y o u read "thin to," y o u will think of me and say to yourself, " W h y do the seed packets tell me to plant so many seeds only to go back and thin to just one plant?")
If you are planting something that may need a plant support later as it gets fully grown, you might consider other plants that could share the same support and plant them in adjacent squares.
128
A Typical Garden
Let's plant one 4 x 4 and see h o w m u c h we will grow in those 16 square feet. We'll start with tall plants on the north side of the box so they don't shade shorter plants. T h e n p u t some colorful flowers in each corner. Let's assume it is still springtime, but that we're past the last frost, so we could put four pansies in each corner using our favorite colors. Carrots require little care until they're harvested. So let's plant t w o squares of different carrots in the center squares, one square of sixteen onions and a low-maintenance square of sixteen radishes in the center. T h e n we'll put one square of nine beets in an outside square because we'll harvest their leaves during the season and then finally pull the beet bottoms later. We can plant two or three varieties of leaf lettuce on the outside, depending on your tastes. In another square we could p u t sixteen chives, and four parsley plants in another, which w o u l d provide us a continual harvest. For more color we might want to put a square of red salvia along the back. A n d perhaps in one corner some dwarf dahlias, one per square foot. Or perhaps some nasturtiums spaced at one per square foot. O n e of the first things we w o u l d have planted in die spring is one or two squares of spinach, nine per square foot. T h e n depending on your family's taste we could have one or more squares from the cabbage family. T h a t could be red or green cabbage, broccoli, or cauliflower. K e e p in m i n d this is n o t the only 4 x4 in the w h o l e garden. So we don't have to p u t all the cabbage into one S F G . It's better to space them out throughout the g a r d e n m a k e s it harder for the cabbage m o t h to find them all.
Plans and Drawings

R e m e m b e r I m e n t i o n e d that some people feel a desire to think ahead and draw up a list of everything to be planted in their garden. T h e n there are even some people w h o w a n t to assign those plants to spaces ahead of time. So it means drawing a chart, more or less to scale, of your garden and assigning those particular crops to each square foot. Despite being an engineer, w h o loves charts and diagrams, I don't usually do that. I just like to plant as I see fit. It's very easy to stand in the garden and as the square becomes vacant y o u just l o o k around and decide it's time to plant another square of radishes. Or maybe you'd like to have some more beans, but this time you'll put in the yellow variety instead of green. It's also very easy to spot and plant where you'd like some color. I find it very easy to just bring h o m e a four-pack of flowers I liked at the nursery and decide by looking at the garden where they w o u l d look best. But it's your Square Foot Garden, and y o u should do whatever makes y o u happy.
129
Replanting
Keep in m i n d that, as soon as y o u harvest, it won't be a big deal to replant because you're g o i n g to do it one square foot at a time. O n c e your newly planted garden starts maturing in the springfor example, that square foot of radishes will be ready to harvest in four weeksyou'll be ready to replant just that one square. T h e season has changed and it's warmer, and most of your summer crops can n o w be planted. So your choices have increased and also most of the summer crop is fairly longlived and will be in that spot through the whole summer season. As y o u replant y o u keep the same criteria in m i n d t a l l e r plants on the north side to keep them from shading other plants, w o r k i n g your w a y to cascading flowers on the front corners to look pretty. Place plants that don't need m u c h attention and only occasional harvesting like peppers on the inside, and shorter plants and those that need constant care or harvest to the outside just to make them easier to tend.
Weeding
T h i s could be the shortest paragraph in the entire book. To start w i t h , your Mel's M i x has no w e e d seeds in it, and any weeds that do sprout are easily observed because they're not in the proper space and they look different from the plants that are there. Because the soil is so soft and friable weeds c o m e out e a s i l y r o o t and all. You have to w e e d about once a month. E n d of paragraph; end of story.
This is a good example of a rootbound container plant. You'll want to trim the matted roots before planting. (Don't worry, it's better for the plants anyway.)
130
Harvesting
K e e p in m i n d that we harvest m a n y of the crops continuously, if possible. For example, a leaf lettuce is not allowed to wait until it forms a large, mature head, but with a pair of scissors and a salad bowl y o u can continuously trim the leaves from such things as lettuce, chives, beets, Swiss chard, spinach, parsley, and even onion tops. As long as y o u don't take too m u c h at one time, the plant will easily survive and thrive. Filling your salad bowl each day should not diminish the garden in any way. In fact, right after y o u harvest you'll find it hard to notice where y o u got everything and if anything is missing.
You've Learned the Basics

You've n o w learned all the basics of Square Foot Gardening. You've learned h o w it got its n a m e f r o m the squares of one, t w o , three, four. Y o u have also learned h o w m a n y and w h a t k i n d of plants fit into a square foot by memorizing, calculating, or by looking it up on the chart. You've learned h o w to zip zap in the soil to get the proper and exact spacing then start planting y o u r seeds and transplants. A r e we having any fun yet? N e x t chapter we're g o i n g to discuss h o w to maintain and harvest y o u r S F G . Okay, n o w it's time to go out to your garden and do something outrageous that will amaze or d u m b f o u n d any neighbor w h o m i g h t be watching y o u . Do y o u k n o w h o w to do a rain dance?
GROWING AND HARVESTING Don't walk on your growing mix Only three tools needed Support your plants Weeds and other pests are not a problem Water the right way
J.his
is g o i n g to b e a fairly short chapter because S F G requires
so little m a i n t e n a n c e o n c e y o u r g a r d e n is prepared a n d p l a n t e d . You'll e x p e r i e n c e a c o n t i n u o u s cycle of n u r t u r i n g , harvesting, a n d r e p l a n t i n g each year w i t h n o soil p r e p a r a t i o n a n d n o w e e d i n g t o d o ever again. H o w does that s o u n d ? A l l of the n u r t u r i n g you'll need to do consists of p r o v i d i n g necessary structural s u p p o r t for plants, r i d d i n g the g a r d e n o f a n y tiny, occasional w e e d s or pests, and watering. You'll enjoy observing y o u r garden's g r o w t h until harvest; every square is different because it was planted w i t h a different crop at a different time. That's w h a t makes S F G s o interesting.
Care
W h e n asked t o n a m e the greatest advantage o f the A l l N e w Square Foot G a r d e n i n g , m o s t say it's t e n d i n g their garden f r o m aisles a n d
132
never s t e p p i n g on their soil. L i k e m a n y others, I always w o n d e r e d w h y we were taught to loosen soil w i t h rototillers, shovels, forks, and hoes, o n l y to walk all over it again packing it d o w n . So w h y are the experts still teaching us to do this? I say, just stop w a l k i n g on y o u r g r o w i n g soilit's that simple.
Keep It Loose
Let's think of s o m e of the advantages of not packing y o u r soil d o w n . T h e plant roots need air and moisture, just like people. If y o u pack the soil d o w n , it b e c o m e s m o r e a n d m o r e c o m p r e s s e d (called c o m p a c t i o n ) and it becomes harder and harder for air to circulate t h r o u g h the soil m a k i n g it m o r e difficult for roots to grow. T h e y m a y n o t die, but they certainly won't g r o w well. So w h y not provide them w i t h nice, loose, friable soil like Mel's M i x ? T h i s way, w a t e r can percolate d o w n and air can circulate.
These are the only tools you need for your All New Square Foot Garden. A trowel a pencil, and scissors
133
Three Tools
A n o t h e r big advantage of S F G is that the n u m b e r and cost of tools is r e d u c e d to a l m o s t n o t h i n g y o u will o n l y need three tools. Just t h i n k , y o u n o l o n g e r n e e d a rototiller! E l i m i n a t e that cost a n d y o u n o w have an extra $ 1,000 in y o u r pocket. A n d y o u don't have to hire s o m e o n e at $ 5 0 every year to p l o w for y o u . Y o u don't even n e e d a shovel o r rake o r a n y o f those special d i g g i n g tools that have b e e n i n v e n t e d t o d i g u p the t o u g h soil. G a r d e n i n g "experts" w i l l tell y o u t o g o o u t a n d b u y the best tools y o u c a n f i n d because t h e y w i l l last longer, b u t they also cost m o r e . W i t h S F G , y o u n o longer need a n y of those big, expensive, h e a v y - d u t y tools that take so m u c h energy to m a n e u v e r t h e y ' r e suddenly obsolete.
A Trowel, A Pencil, and Scissors

T h e first t o o l of the three tools y o u n e e d is a trowel. I've f o u n d that the o n e - d o l l a r variety is really the best buy. They're attractive, strong, and neat l o o k i n g . T h e y have all the features of a six dollar trowel. So instead of just one, n o w y o u can afford s i x o n e for every S F G box! W h y n o t b u y an assortment of colors? Y o u can have one in every b o x just sitting there w a i t i n g so that y o u don't have to go l o o k i n g for a tool w h e n y o u w a l k by a n d see a square that is ready for replanting. Of course, if y o u see an occasional w e e d , y o u r big, strong w e e d i n g tools are y o u r o w n t h u m b a n d forefinger! T h e t r o w e l is for t r a n s p l a n t i n g , for m i x i n g in an a d d e d t r o w e l full o f c o m p o s t w h e n y o u replant each square f o o t , a n d for l o o s e n i n g u p a n d t u r n i n g over the M e l ' s M i x i n a n i n d i v i d u a l square f o o t o r even a n entire 4 x 4 . I n the s p r i n g y o u w o n ' t believe h o w perfect the soil w i l l b e i f y o u f o l l o w the Mel's M i x f o r m u l a a n d start w i t h a perfect soil. T h e other t w o tools you'll need are a pencil (yes, that's a tool) for p o k i n g holes a n d lifting o u t y o u n g seedlings for transplanting, a n d a pair of scissors for harvesting beet, lettuce, or Swiss chard leaves for supper, c u t t i n g o f f dead blossoms, and s n i p p i n g off extra seedlings if m o r e than one seed sprouts in a hole. Because S F G tools are so simple a n d inexpensive, I love to splurge and keep o n e of each at every 4 x 4 . T h a t way, I never have to l o o k for a tool. It w o u l d be fun to list all the tools that y o u no longer need if y o u have a S F G . In fact, y o u c o u l d probably just go into y o u r garage or toolshed and see t h e m all right t h e r e p o o r , lonely tools. M a y b e y o u have s o m e old-fashioned single-row friends w h o just can't give up all
134
that hard w o r k and c o u l d use s o m e extra heavy-duty tools. Y o u c o u l d rent t h e m o u t and m a y b e m a k e a few bucks.
PENNY PIN (HER

You can even make your own kneeling pad out of scrap carpeting. If you have some leftover indoor/ outdoor carpeting, it won't matter if it gets wet; it dries quickly and folds up nicely to make a great kneeling pad. It wouldn't hurt to have a few of these pads scattered throughout your SFG. They are available as scrap or samples at any place carpeting is sold.
Optional A c c c e s s o r y
A l t h o u g h y o u o n l y need three tools, y o u m i g h t w a n t to invest in a k n e e l i n g pad. Unless y o u r boxes are p l a c e d on tabletops, y o u r m o s t frequent p o s i t i o n w h i l e g a r d e n i n g will be k n e e l i n g . For less than four dollars, y o u can b u y a k n e e l i n g p a d that is c o m f o r t a b l e a n d d u r a b l e . T h e r e ' s n o n e e d t o b u y the fancy ones that strap to y o u r knees. T h e y ' r e terribly u n c o m f o r t a b l e a n d will e n d u p h a n g i n g i n y o u r t o o l shed a l o n g w i t h the o t h e r l o n e l y tools.
Weeds
S F G has few o r n o w e e d s . B u t h o w ? W e e d s p l a g u e every garden, right? First, there are no w e e d seeds in peat m o s s or v e r m i c u l i t e . N e x t , a n y seeds that w e r e i n t h e i n g r e d i e n t s y o u a d d e d t o the c o m p o s t pile w i l l get c o o k e d a n d k i l l e d i n that 1 5 0 degrees Fahrenheit t e m p e r a t u r e as the pile heats u p . If y o u prepare the bed properly and line the b o t t o m of the b o x w i t h landscape fabric, n o w e e d s will s p r o u t f r o m the b o t t o m . Since w e are n o t using o u r g r o u n d soil, w h i c h i s f i l l e d w i t h w e e d s , the o n l y possible w e e d seeds in o u r S F G m i g h t have b l o w n in, a n d as s o o n as t h e y sprout,
v n will s e r e o e h m b c u e r e a e n r o nlare Y u r n f n r r ea s h v r n f o r w i ces
First, remove any weeds or grass from inside your box, then lay down landscape fabric as a weed barrier. This will be your "best friend" against future weeds.
Growing and Harvesting w i l l d o the rest, p u l l i n g o u t the w e e d , roots a n d all. C o m p a r e that t o w h a t y o u ' v e e x p e r i e n c e d w i t h y o u r existing soil. A n y t i m e the existing soil a n y w h e r e in the c o u n t r y is left a l o n e , it sprouts w e e d s . W h i c h s y s t e m w o u l d y o u like t o have i n y o u r backyard?
135
I See You
H o w c a n y o u tell if a n e w s p r o u t is a weed? First, it's n o t in the p r o p e r space a m o n g y o u r little transplants. R e m e m b e r o n e , four, nine, a n d sixteen. If it is o u t of place (and I'll bet y o u were careful to m a k e sure y o u r spaces were correct in that square foot), you'll pull it o u t of that soft Mel's M i x w i t h o u t a p r o b l e m .
Pests and Plant Problems

T h e o n l y w a y t o intelligently answer the q u e s t i o n s w e get a b o u t pests a n d p l a n t p r o b l e m s requires k n o w i n g t h e weather, g r o w i n g conditions, history, a n d present gardening c o n d i t i o n in an area. If the question came f r o m my county, I'd give a great answer. B u t w h e n it comes f r o m across the c o u n t r y or anywhere in the w o r l d , it's difficult to give an accurate answer.
County Extension Agents

T h e r e is a g o o d s o l u t i o n . S o m e of o u r tax dollars go to train a n d maintain a staff of horticultural experts in every c o u n t y in the c o u n t r y t h e c o u n t y e x t e n s i o n service agents. I n a d d i t i o n , the c o u n t y extension agents train a n o t h e r g r o u p o f n e i g h b o r h o o d v o l u n t e e r s called " M a s t e r G a r d e n e r s , " w h o t h e n g o o u t i n the c o m m u n i t y helping others by answering their questions. It is a great service, and we often refer questions to the agents a n d their staff. If y o u r question is about pests or problems or even the best varieties to g r o w in y o u r area, y o u couldn't find a m o r e informative source. To find y o u r local extension agent, l o o k i n y o u r p h o n e b o o k i n the G o v e r n m e n t blue pages, find y o u r county, a n d then l o o k for the h e a d i n g "Extension of (your state) University," don't l o o k under "Agriculture." T h e o n l y p r o b l e m I have w i t h the c o u n t y agents is that m o s t of t h e m are trained in o u r agricultural colleges, w h i c h still teach singler o w farming a n d h a n d - m e - d o w n gardening. So, they are n o t the best source for answers to S F G questions. You'll have to c o m e to us for those questions. T o summarize pests a n d problems, try n o t t o w o r r y a b o u t t h e m . E n j o y y o u r g a r d e n . I f o n e square gets devastated, p u l l i t u p a n d replant it w i t h s o m e t h i n g else. If y o u didn't use the protective structures of C h a p t e r 4, try t h e m o u t next season to help eliminate y o u r problems.
I've lived my life doing the backbreaking work of single row gardening this is so much better!"
Gina from Kentucky
136
W h i c h Plant Varieties?
Q u i t e often p e o p l e will ask questions like, " W h i c h are the best varieties o f p o t a t o e s o r carrots t o g r o w i n m y corner o f the state?" T h e s e q u e s t i o n s can o n l y b e answered b y y o u r local e x p e r t t h e c o u n t y e x t e n s i o n agent. T h e y are always u p - t o - d a t e o n all the n e w varieties and w h a t grows best in their area. K e e p in m i n d if y o u have a question a b o u t any of the vine crops, y o u will w a n t to train t h e m to a trellis, w h i l e most single-row gardens allow t h e m to sprawl.
Notice how easily vine crops such as pole beans climb the trellis netting all by themselves. Other vine crops, such as tomatoes, need a little help from you each week.
137
Support Your Local Plants

S o m e plants, such as root crops and l o w - g r o w i n g salad crops, need no support, so there is n o t h i n g to do for t h e m . T h e taller crops m i g h t need a little help, however, d e p e n d i n g on w h e t h e r they are a leaf or head crop like Swiss chard or cabbage. If a heavy w i n d and rain or hailstorm k n o c k s t h e m over, simply straighten t h e m up a n d p u s h a little extra soil a r o u n d the stem.
Too Top Heavy

T h e plants t h a t u s u a l l y n e e d a little s u p p o r t are the s u m m e r c r o p s like p e p p e r s , o k r a , e g g p l a n t , c o r n , a n d b u s h t o m a t o e s . T h o s e c a n easily b e s u p p o r t e d b y u s i n g a U - s h a p e d w i r e s u p p o r t cage o r horizontal fencing or netting suspended across the entire 4 x4 garden, h e l d tight by four c o r n e r posts. (See C h a p t e r 4 for c o n s t r u c t i o n details.) T h e s a m e s u p p o r t t e c h n i q u e w i l l also w o r k for tall flowers like g l a d i o l u s , giant m a r i g o l d s , a n d tall dahlias. O n e o f the reasons we p r o v i d e p l a n t s u p p o r t is the soil m i x is so loose a n d friable that the tall plants need a little help.
Watering
Plants need water just like people do. Everyone asks, " H o w do y o u water a n d h o w m u c h ? " My ideal w a y to water is ladling o u t a c u p of s u n - w a r m e d water f r o m a b u c k e t that can be left in the sun next to y o u r garden. G e n d y lift the b o t t o m leaves of the plant and, w i t h y o u r other h a n d , ladle a c u p of that water into the depression a r o u n d the plant. W i t h a saucer-shaped depression in the soil, the water will soak right d o w n to the roots instead of rolling away f r o m the plant into other parts of the garden. W e d o get a f e w p e o p l e w h o say, " O h that w o u l d take t o o l o n g . " B u t they've failed to t h i n k a b o u t the fact that, first, their garden is o n l y a fraction of the size that it u s e d to be. T h a t m e a n s 8 0 p e r c e n t o f the w a t e r i n g y o u u s e d t o d o i s n o l o n g e r n e e d e d a n d w a s actually w a s t e d . N e x t , you're n o t w a t e r i n g the tops o f the plants or the leaves, so you're n o t p r o m o t i n g fungal diseases a n d other p r o b l e m s . You're k e e p i n g the w a t e r w h e r e i t w i l l d o the m o s t g o o d a r o u n d the base o f the p l a n t w h e r e i t c a n travel d o w n t o the r o o t system. T h e soil consistency of y o u r Mel's M i x is already 100 percent of materials that h o l d moisture. W h e n y o u water, it goes right into the soil a r o u n d the root system and stays there. T h e root system is g o i n g to be able to d r i n k up the water w h e n a n d in the a m o u n t needed. Is this a m a j o r a d v a n c e in w a t e r c o n s e r v a t i o n or what? H e l l o , conservationist, are y o u listening?
138
When your plants need a drink, just dip a cup of water from your 5-gallon bucket of sun-warmed water, and pour it in the saucershaped depression.
A n d w h y s u n - w a r m e d water? O n e answer is that it's for the same reason people don't like to take a cold shower. T h e more scientific reason is plants can absorb nutrients in the soil m u c h faster and grow better if the soil and water temperature are warmer. In spring and late fall, s u n - w a r m e d water helps w a r m the soil. R e m e m b e r the chart in the A p p e n d i x s h o w i n g sprouting times in various temperatures. T h e w a r m e r the weather, the faster they'll grow and the quicker you'll harvest. That's w h y people have greenhouses. If y o u build a structure to form a miniature greenhouse around y o u r S F G , the radiant heat from the sun will w a r m the soil from the surface d o w n . B u t simply p o u r i n g w a r m (not hot) water into the soil means the w a r m t h tends to go a little d e e p e r a n d even q u i c k e r t h a n the sun b a k i n g the surface of the soil.
Don't Drown Me
Invariably gardeners water plants too m u c h , perhaps out of kindness or fear that they will fail. So they think, " O h , I'll give it a little extra. It won't hurt." Usually it did hurt w i t h local soil that didn't drain well, b u t it won't if y o u have a Square Foot G a r d e n where the soil drains excess water. M o s t people don't realize that plant roots need air as well as moisture. L u c k y for y o u , Mel's M i x allows air into it because it's loose and friable. (Chapter 5 tells y o u h o w to m a k e Mel's M i x . ) W i t h Mel's M i x y o u c a n n o t overwater. R e m e m b e r the sponge? Each little piece can hold moisture so a plant root can g r o w around that piece and take o u t the moisture w h e n needed. W h e n that little sponge gets saturated, the rest of the water drains right out t h r o u g h the b o t t o m . That's h o w Mel's M i x w o r k s , and that's w h y y o u never have to w o r r y a b o u t giving y o u r plants too m u c h water. B u t because y o u r soil m i x drains readily w h e n saturated, it also has a tendency to d r y o u t quicker than most garden soils. Regular
Growing and Harvesting soils stay saturated, so single-row gardeners m a y be used to t u r n i n g on the sprinkler or flooding the g a r d e n t w i c e a w e e k a n d that's it. Your A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n is different. Y o u have to water a little m o r e often and p a y m o r e attention to watering. T h e secret, of course, is l o o k i n g at the plants. After a w h i l e you'll be able to w a l k past y o u r 4 x4 garden b o x and immediately spot any square f o o t that needs water. Perhaps the plants w i l l be slightly w i l t e d . M a y b e they'll be just a little d r o o p y or their c o l o r w i l l be a little off. Y o u m e r e l y w a t e r those square feet right t h e n a n d there because y o u r b u c k e t o f w a r m w a t e r i s always right n e x t t o y o u r garden. A n d because you're d i p p i n g a c u p i n the b u c k e t you're n o t g o i n g to get yourself all w e t a n d dirty. T h i n k o f y o u r plants i n y o u r g a r d e n the same a s y o u d o y o u r children. I f they've b e e n o u t i n the h o t s u n a n d p l a y i n g hard a n d o n e o f t h e m l o o k s a little d r o o p y a n d w i l t e d , y o u k n o w right a w a y to inspect the c h i l d a little closer to m a k e sure he or she is p r o p e r l y hydrated.
139
i i I i i i I
With Mel's Mix you cannot overwater. I repeat: you cannot overwater.
Nurture Your Plants

I suggest watering by h a n d because it allows y o u the time to nurture y o u r plants. You're able t o s t o p a n d n o t i c e h o w y o u r plants are g r o w i n g . Y o u c a n appreciate their b e a u t y a n d color, n o t i c e their blossoms and fruit. It tells y o u w h e n the plant is g o i n g to be ready for harvest. It's a satisfying feeling to w o r k in y o u r garden w i t h each plant. You're n o t s t a n d i n g o f f in the distance w i t h a hose, w h i c h is v e r y i m p e r s o n a l . You're n o t o p e n i n g a b i g valve a n d l e t t i n g the sprinkler system take over or the irrigation water c o m e in. ( A n d guess what? Irrigation water is filled w i t h w e e d seeds. H a v e y o u folks w h o live in states that irrigate ever w o n d e r e d w h y y o u have to w e e d y o u r single-row garden so often?) E v e n a drip irrigation system is i m p e r s o n a l t h o u g h , I m u s t admit, efficient.
140
Too Much
E x i s t i n g w a t e r i n g systems give all different types a n d sizes of plants the s a m e a m o u n t o f w a t e r a t the s a m e t i m e . T h i s i s n o t o n l y v e r y impersonal; it's also very inefficient. If our farmers d i d that we'd have w a t e r shortages all a r o u n d the c o u n t r y . H e y , w a i t a m i n u t e , we do have water shortages all a r o u n d the country!
How Much
In conclusion, o n l y water as m u c h as each plant needs. A n d the best w a y t o tell i s f r o m e x p e r i e n c e t h e same w a y y o u k n o w y o u r c h i l d needs a drink. Yes, it does take a little bit of experience to raise a family, b u t gaining this experience brings a lot of pleasure.
Alternate Watering Methods

A Hose
For those w h o w a n t to use a m o r e traditional m e t h o d , there is always the hose. Yes, it's a n u i s a n c e to get o u t or p u t away, a n d in r o w gardening it always seemed to be k n o c k i n g plants d o w n as it has to be dragged a r o u n d the garden. A n o t h e r advantage to S F G boxes is the hose won't do that a n y m o r e as the b o x corners keep the hose f r o m crushing the plants. I f y o u d o use a hose, m a k e sure y o u h a v e o n e o f those s h u t - o f f valves r i g h t a t the e n d o f the hose s o y o u h a v e c o m p l e t e c o n t r o l o f the force a n d a m o u n t o f the water. T h e r e are m a n y short a n d l o n g extension h a n d w a n d s that c o m e w i t h a spray nozzle. T h i s also allows y o u to water directly under y o u r plants, and the nozzle on the e n d of the w a n d can b e p o k e d d o w n a n d w o r k e d a r o u n d the lower leaves o f the plant so that m o s t of the plant remains dry. Leave a n extra l e n g t h o f hose coiled i n the s u n t o help w a r m the w a t e r up a little, m a y b e just to take the chill o f f tap water, b u t y o u h a v e to be careful at the start if it's h o t o u t a n d a h o s e full of w a t e r has been laying in the sun for s o m e time. Y o u don't w a n t the water to b e t o o hot. D o w h a t y o u d o w h e n giving the b a b y a b o t t l e t e s t the water on y o u r wrist.
Drip, Drip, Drip

A v e r y efficient w a y to w a t e r y o u r S F G is w i t h a d r i p irrigation system. I k n o w it w a s d e s i g n e d for r o w gardeners, b u t it c a n be adapted for S F G just as easily. T h e o n l y p r o b l e m I have is it sort of takes a w a y the n u r t u r i n g and close attention paid to y o u r plants. If y o u just turn a valve or worse yet, a mechanical timer turns the water on a n d off, y o u never get close to y o u r plants a n d they will miss y o u .
Growing and Harvesting B u t I m u s t a d m i t the w a t e r i n g gets d o n e v e r y efficiently a n d effectively T r y r u n n i n g small soaker tubes spaced every 6 inches the length of y o u r b o x for c o m p l e t e coverage of every square foot.
141
Lawn Sprinkler Systems

S o m e people tell m e they have located their S F G o n the lawn, and t h e y have a n u n d e r g r o u n d sprinkler system that goes o n a n d o f f automatically. W h a t should they d o , they ask? W h a t can y o u d o r i p up the l a w n or t u r n o f f the system? N o , y o u just live w i t h it. I tell t h e m to m a k e do w i t h w h a t they have and just keep a b u c k e t or t w o around for special plants as needed.
Harvest
Harvesting y o u r crop is the c u l m i n a t i o n of the gardening experience. T h e harvest s h o u l d be a j o y f u l a n d e x c i t i n g t i m e because, after all, this is w h y you're g r o w i n g all these plants in the first place.
Too Much
T h e p r o b l e m w i t h traditional gardening is that there is t o o m u c h to harvest all at o n c e . If y o u p l a n t an entire r o w of s o m e t h i n g all at once, it's all g o i n g to be ready to harvest all at once, a n d it becomes an o v e r w h e l m i n g task. N o t so great for the h o m e gardener w h o just wants dinner tonight, n o t a month's w o r t h of lettuce in one day. So, after the first few pickings, the rest becomes all drudgery.
Control That Planting

E v e r y t h i n g i s different w i t h a S F G . N o w , every t i m e y o u b e g i n t o plant s o m e t h i n g i n y o u r S F G , l o o k the item u p i n y o u r S F G b o o k t o find h o w m a n y to plant per square foot. Prepare the soil, s m o o t h it out, do the zip, zap, b i n g , b i n g , b i n g , b i n g to m a r k the spacing. N o w , select the varieties y o u w a n t f r o m y o u r seeds, p o u r s o m e i n t o the p a l m of one h a n d , a n d plant a p i n c h in each hole. As y o u s m o o t h the soil over the seeds, water w i t h a fine spray. T h e n ask yourself, " D o I w a n t any m o r e than sixteen radishes all at once? T h e y ' l l be ready in four weeks and they'll all c o m e to harvest w i t h i n o n e w e e k . " Usually the answer is " N o . I really don't w a n t a n y m o r e than this. I'll w a i t a w e e k o r t w o t o p l a n t a n o t h e r square f o o t o f radishes s o m e w h e r e else." R i g h t then a n d there y o u can see o n e of the h u g e advantages of y o u r grid establishing b o u n d a r i e s a n d S F G g i v i n g y o u a u t o m a t i c c o n t r o l s i m p l e a n d easy. R e m e m b e r that the S F G t h e o r y i s t o visualize the harvest. A s k yourself, " H o w m u c h d o I n e e d for o n e o r t w o w e e k s ? " T h e n o n l y p l a n t that m u c h . It takes a b o u t a m i n u t e .
142
A Little of This, A Little of That

Y o u don't have to w a i t for the plant to mature to its m a x i m u m size. Go o u t at harvest time (which m i g h t be a h a l f an h o u r before l u n c h or dinner) w i t h y o u r pair of scissors and a small basket or salad b o w l , a n d c u t o f f a f e w o u t e r leaves, perhaps o n e f r o m each p l a n t . To harvest a varied salad, just take four lettuce leaves, parsley leaves f r o m another, a n d perhaps beet greens f r o m another. E a c h square m a y c o n t a i n a different variety a n d c o l o r o f lettuce. Y o u m i g h t p u l l o n e radish a n d o n e carrot, even t h o u g h they've o n l y g r o w n t o h a l f size, w a s h t h e m o f f in y o u r bucket of s u n - w a r m e d water, p u t the tops in the c o m p o s t b i n , a n d t h e n c o n t i n u e a r o u n d y o u r Square F o o t G a r d e n taking just a little bit here and a little bit there of this a n d that. S o o n y o u r harvest basket is full a n d y o u l o o k at y o u r garden a n d c a n n o t even see that a n y t h i n g is missing.
Snip, Snip
1 had always been a little afraid of composting, but Mel makes everything so logical and easy to understand."
Karen from Utah
C o n t i n u a l l y harvest a n y type of leafy v e g e t a b l e l i k e leaf lettuce or Swiss c h a r d b y snipping a little here and a little there t h r o u g h o u t the season. T h i s can't go on forever because the plant, especially cool w e a t h e r p l a n t s , w i l l e v e n t u a l l y go to seed. W h e n it sends up a seed stalk, the p l a n t has c o m p l e t e d its g r o w i n g season a n d its use for harvesting. T a k e one last harvest, remove what's left over, and prepare that square foot for r e p l a n t i n g u n l e s s y o u w a n t the kids to see h o w a lettuce or radish plant produces seed.
Harvest and Replant

W i t h Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , you're o n l y dealing w i t h o n e square foot at a time. To paraphrase the w o r d s of Dr. R o b e r t Schuller, " I n c h b y i n c h , anything's a c i n c h . " W i t h S F G , o u r s a y i n g i s g o i n g t o b e "square b y square, y o u ' l l s o o n b e there." A s s o o n a s y o u finish h a r v e s t i n g o n e square f o o t , it's t i m e to prepare the soil a n d p l a n t a n e w crop. Just take o u t any debris like dead leaves, stems, or r o o t s y o u can place these in y o u r c o m p o s t b i n t h e n a d d a trowel full of c o m p o s t (hopefully it's h o m e m a d e ) to the square, turn the soil over w i t h the trowel, s m o o t h it over, and you're ready to replant. Y o u can do all of that in 60 seconds!
Replanting
N o w it's g e t t i n g m o r e interesting a n d fun because y o u will b e able to c h o o s e w h a t y o u w a n t to replant in every single square f o o t all t h r o u g h the garden season. R e m e m b e r , y o u c a n get at least three crops a year i n every square foot. S o , m u l t i p l y y o u r n u m b e r o f square feet by three a n d there are a lot of choices to m a k e ! E v e r y
Growing and Harvesting choice i s g o i n g t o b e f u n , exciting, a n d interesting. O f course, w h a t y o u select d e p e n d s a lot on w h a t t i m e of the year it is a n d w h a t y o u can use a n d enjoy.
143
A Little Now
W h e t h e r you're planting, harvesting, maintaining, or watering y o u don't need hours and hours to enjoy y o u r garden. Because y o u can do a litde bit here a n d a little bit there, y o u can do it a n y t i m e of the d a y e v e n on y o u r w a y o u t the door! If y o u see a few tiny weeds growing, p l u c k t h e m out; give a d r i n k of water to any plants that appear a little d r o o p y o r w i l t e d ( r e m e m b e r y o u r b u c k e t o f s u n w a r m e d w a t e r is right there a n d so is y o u r t r o w e l if y o u n e e d to loosen the soil). It's like straightening a crooked picture as y o u w a l k d o w n the hall, j o t t i n g a note to s o m e o n e w h o will be c o m i n g h o m e soon, or p u t t i n g s o m e t h i n g a w a y in the refrigerator. T h e s e are things y o u can d o right then and there. A n d they're fun things t o d o . N o heavy w o r k . No getting all dirty a n d sweaty.
A Wonder
If y o u r g a r d e n is close to the b a c k d o o r or k i t c h e n door, you'll probably use it m u c h m o r e . You'll enjoy the fresh greens a n d salad m o r e often, eat healthier, a n d feel better. S F G c o u l d be part of a weight-loss p r o g r a m , i f y o u ask m e ! O n t o p o f all that, y o u ' l l have fun d o i n g it! D o n ' t forget to share the fun w i t h y o u r spouse, children, o r g r a n d c h i l d r e n t h e w o n d e r o f g r o w t h a n d harvest i s priceless. Harvest a few small plants w i t h a child, and that child will r e m e m b e r the experience forever.
Next Crop
W h e n the s u m m e r is finished, you're ready to plant a fall crop, w h i c h will be a cool-weather crop. Go t h r o u g h the w h o l e q u i c k process of picking o u t a n y debris, a d d i n g a trowel full of c o m p o s t , m i x i n g it in, s m o o t h i n g it over, a n d d e c i d i n g what's next. T h e r e goes another minute o u t o f y o u r b u s y life. H o w a b o u t spinach? C h e c k the spacing, get the seeds o u t , s o a k t h e m for a little w h i l e , p o p t h e m in the g r o u n d , s m o o t h t h e m over, water, a n d you're all finished. A n o t h e r m i n u t e g o n e , b u t y o u are c r e a t i n g life. You've n o w p l a n t e d three crops in o n e square f o o t in o n l y o n e year. Y o u started w i t h a r o o t crop, replaced it w i t h a fruit crop, a n d finally, in the fall, added a leaf crop. In addition, y o u practiced soil i m p r o v e m e n t three times in one y e a r s q u a r e b y square.
1H
Rotation Not Critical

T h e nice t h i n g about S F G is y o u are also practicing crop rotation w i t h o u t even k n o w i n g it. C r o p rotation is v e r y i m p o r t a n t in traditional row gardening w h e n dealing w i t h existing soils that have very few nutrients in t h e m n u t r i e n t s that can quickly be depleted by planting and replanting the same crop year after year in the same soil. W h e n y o u begin gardening w i t h a healthy, rich soil like Mel's M i x , crop rotation is really n o t critical. Mel's M i x gives y o u a garden soil that is 33 percent c o m p o s t , w h i c h has all the nutrients and trace elements that plants need. B u t crop rotation is still a g o o d idea for insect a n d pest control in addition to soil nutrients. If y o u g r o w the same t h i n g c o n t i n u o u s l y in the same place, eventually pests or diseases m a y take over since they have lived and played in that spot for so long. B u t if y o u replant every square three times a year, S F G is g o i n g t o b e n o p i c n i c for t h e m . T h e y will have t o m o v e every t w o m o n t h s . I'll bet they will go somewhere else to set up residency. H o w a b o u t y o u r row gardener next door that laughed at y o u w h e n y o u started b u i l d i n g y o u r boxes?
Add Color
O n e m o r e thing. N o w that you've b e c o m e a n accomplished gardener o n e square at a time, you've improved the look and landscape of y o u r garden and perhaps even y o u r yard and patio. W h e n y o u decide y o u need a little color over here or there, y o u m a y put in a s u m m e r crop of flowersperhaps p i n k p e t u n i a s y o u b e c o m e a designer. Just t h i n k y o u ' r e enjoying a painting in progress w h e n y o u garden the All N e w Square Foot G a r d e n i n g way!
What are some of your favorite flowers or herbs? Plant them
Vertical Gardening
I i i i I i i i I i i i I i i i I i i i I i i i I i i i I i i i 11 i i I i i i I i i i I i 11 I
By now, y o u m i g h t feel that the 80 percent reduction in size, the no fertilizer needed, the g r o w i n g in o n l y 6 inches of Mel's M i x , or even the no d i g g i n g of y o u r existing soil ever again are all that y o u c o u l d ask from y o u r A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n . I n a d d i t i o n , y o u m i g h t say that m o s t p e o p l e w o u l d t h i n k that all of the a b o v e is a m a z i n g a n d earth-shattering (well, okay, h o w a b o u t just impressive), b u t this t o p i c , "Vertical G a r d e n i n g , " is d o w n r i g h t spectacular.
How It Happened
Here's a q u i c k flashback to 1 9 7 6 w h e n this retired e n g i n e e r t o o k up g a r d e n i n g . I d e v e l o p e d S F G b u t as I l o o k e d at t o m a t o plants g r o w i n g i n pots o n decks a n d i n s i n g l e - r o w gardens, I k n e w m y w o r k wasn't c o m p l e t e . T o m a t o e s are n o t o n l y America's favorite vegetable to grow, b u t they also take up the m o s t r o o m a n d cause quite an unsightly mess by the e n d of the season if they are allowed to sprawl all over the g r o u n d . T h e r e are also the c o m p l a i n t s of slugs getting in a n d r u i n i n g all of the tomatoes as well as gardeners stepp i n g all over the vines a n d c r u s h i n g t h e m w h e n trying to harvest the fruit. T h e w h o l e idea o f g r o w i n g tomatoes this w a y seems v e r y n o n - p r o d u c t i v e . At the time, the o n l y cages available were t o o short and too w e a k to solve the p r o b l e m . I said, " T h i s is no w a y to treat a t o m a t o . We can't let it lie d o w n a n d sprawl all over the g r o u n d . It s h o u l d be a l l o w e d to s t a n d up straight a n d tall so that it c a n be p r o u d of itself a n d a benefit a n d credit t o the c o m m u n i t y . " Six m o n t h s later m y vertical frame w a s designed, tested, a n d p u t into o p e r a t i o n . I t w a s a n A i l - A m e r i c a n m o d e l m a d e f r o m rigid G e r m a n steel c o n d u i t a n d Japanese t w i n e . It w a s so s t r o n g that it h e l d u p t h r o u g h rain, sleet, snow, a n d h e a v y S e p t e m b e r storms w h e n the t o m a t o p l a n t f i l l e d the entire frame a n d w a s l o a d e d w i t h red, ripe t o m a t o e s . After g r o w i n g tomatoes this u n i q u e and attractive w a y for several years, I began t h i n k i n g a b o u t the other vine crops that spread all over the g a r d e n . C o u l d t h e y be g r o w n the same way? First I tried p o l e
146
I _L I L I 1 I I J Ja Lt
I couldn't believe the amount of vegetables it raised "

Dan from Texas
Why Should You Grow Vertically? It's spectacular. It saves space. You grow better crops. It adds a third dimension to your SFG. It costs less then you could imagine! It lasts for years. How Do You Grow Vertically? Build a super strong steel frame. Attach nylon netting. Where Do You Grow Vertically? Along the north edge of your 4x4 Next to any fence or building wall. When Do You Grow Vertically? Anytime before vine crops start sprawling.
beans ( a n o - b r a i n e r ) , t h e n c u c u m b e r s a n d peas. T h e n even w i n t e r a n d s u m m e r squash. T h e y all w o r k e d a n d grew well, a n d they l o o k e d just great g r o w i n g on a vertical frame. A n d I was so pleased w i t h the results of g r o w i n g vine crops this n e w w a y that I said, " T h i s is a g o o d t h i n g , " a n d included the m e t h o d i n m y f i r s t b o o k o n S F G . B u t since then-Wow! Y o u should see the vertical gardens now. T h e p u m p k i n s , all k i n d s o f m e l o n s ( i n c l u d i n g the n e w smaller watermelons), a n d all of the really b i g squashes g r o w 7 feet in the air.
Vertical Gardening
147
Vertical Gardening
A few years a g o at o u r display gardens in U t a h , we w e r e g r o w i n g 3 5 - p o u n d p u m p k i n s 7 feet in the air. We m a d e the vertical frames 8 feet above the g r o u n d for no other reason than we w a n t e d to s h o w off and demonstrate h o w tall they can be! N o w this was a spectacular sight, a n d m a n y p e o p l e have w a n t e d t o k n o w h o w t h e y c o u l d accomplish this same feat in their o w n backyard. W e usually refer t o vertical g a r d e n i n g a s " A d v a n c e d S F G . " B u t , really, as soon as y o u master the basics of Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g , y o u can enjoy g r o w i n g crops vertically. A n d y o u w i l l b e the e n v y o f the n e i g h b o r h o o d w h e n y o u do.
Growing vertically not only saves space but it also adds another dimension of beauty to your garden.
148
Picture This
C a n y o u just picture a wall of green in y o u r garden filled w i t h vine crops like tomatoes, c u c u m b e r s , pole beans, even melons and squash? A l l the colorful fruit just h a n g i n g there w a i t i n g t o b e p i c k e d ! N o sprawling plants all over the g r o u n d w i t h their fruit lying on the soil getting all dirty and eaten by slugs. T h e s e walls of green can even be located so they hide any unsightly areas of the y a t d or garage. T h e y
To construct a vertical frame, you need: two 5 foot electrical conduit pipes ('/2-inch diameter); one 4-foot conduit pipe ('/2-inch diameter); two 18-inch long rebar supports of'/2-inch diameter; screwdriver; hammer; two elbow connectors; and trellis netting.
can even give y o u s o m e privacy to keep neighbors from peering over the fence to l o o k at y o u r S F G . It's n o t o n l y a spectacular sight, b u t those plants will be up in the air g e t t i n g better s u n s h i n e a n d air m o v e m e n t . T h e y ' l l p r o d u c e a m o r e useable harvest for y o u w i t h n o t h i n g wasted. To t o p all that off, each p l a n t w i l l o n l y take 1 or 2 square feet of garden space and g r o w perfectly well in y o u r 6 inches of Mel's M i x . A n o t h e r big advantage is y o u can do all this standing u p n o b e n d i n g , kneeling, o r squatting d o w n t o tend y o u r plants.
Vertical Gardening
149
Constructing Supports
I experimented t h r o u g h the years w i t h all different types of materials and frames, and I finally settled u p o n o n e that was so simple, easy, and inexpensive to use that it was almost ridiculous. I f o u n d that electrical c o n d u i t is the cheapest, strongest, a n d best material to use for the vertical s u p p o r t s . I do n o t like P V C p i p e o r w o o d because i t e v e n t u a l l y will b e n d a n d break a n d destroy y o u r w h o l e vertical g a r d e n . W h e n y o u f i r s t b u i l d a n d p l a n t a vertical frame o u t of just a b o u t a n y t h i n g , it l o o k s sturdy a n d strong. B u t , near the e n d o f the g r o w i n g season, w h e n y o u r plants have g r o w n t o the t o p a n d f i l l e d u p all the o p e n spaces, that frame acts like a sail on a b o a t . Just w h e n y o u r t o m a t o e s are g e t t i n g ripe a n d ready to p i c k , a l o n g c o m e s a late s u m m e r s t o r m w i t h lots of w i n d a n d rain, a n d the next t h i n g y o u k n o w the w h o l e t h i n g i s f l a t o n the g r o u n d . U s i n g electrical c o n d u i t a n d a steel g r o u n d r o d (rebar) w i l l prevent this f r o m h a p p e n i n g . A n d the t w o posts and t o p are simple and inexpensive to b u y a n d install. T h e c o n d u i t itself costs a few dollars for a 10-foot length, so y o u can see we're n o t t a l k i n g a b o u t b i g b u c k s here, a n d y o u s h o u l d b e able to talk the clerk at the store i n t o c u t t i n g it in half. For the corners y o u can b u y elbows, pre-bent r o u n d e d corners or b e n d y o u r o w n if y o u have a c o n d u i t bender (about t w e n t y bucks at the same store). It's k i n d o f f u n t o b e n d the c o n d u i t , a n d o n c e y o u get the k n a c k o f it, i t c o m e s o u t nice a n d s m o o t h w i t h g o o d curves (see the p h o t o on page 8). T h e bent pipes are c o n n e c t e d w i t h a simple metal c o u p l i n g (see the p h o t o on page 1 5 8 ) that has t w o set screws that tighten each pipe together, and they b o t h usually cost less than a dollar.
Placement of Vertical Supports in the SFG Garden

W h e n you're d e c i d i n g w h e r e to place y o u r vertical frames, keep in m i n d that y o u don't w a n t the vines to shade the rest of the garden. So, the frames w o r k best w h e n placed on the n o r t h side of each box. I f y o u w a n t m o r e vertical crops t h a n o n e frame per b o x , y o u c a n m a k e d o u b l e or triple boxes a n d t u r n t h e m east a n d w e s t so the frames c a n go all a l o n g the n o r t h side. Y o u c o u l d also d e v o t e a special-sized b o x just for vertical crops. M a k e a 2 x 1 2 - f o o t or a n y length b o x w i t h a vertical frame c o n t i n u o u s l y on the north side. T h i s could stand against a wall or fence. Y o u c o u l d even plant the front squares w i t h pretty flowers or any l o w - g r o w i n g crop like peppers or eggplant that will l o o k great and will hide the b o t t o m stems of the vertical vines.
150
Once you've attached the elbow connectors to your 4-foot conduit pipe, lay it against the north-facing board of your SFG. Next, hammer the rebar where the elbows are located. You '11 want to drive the rebar in about half its height.
Installing the Vertical Frame

Your vertical frame should be installed outside the box, so it sits on the g r o u n d . A s i d e from driving the concrete reinforcing bars (rebar) into the g r o u n d , and slipping the c o n d u i t over t h e m , y o u c o u l d also attach the vertical frame to y o u r b o x w i t h pipe clamps on the side. T h i s w o u l d give t h e m even m o r e stability.
Securing Vertical Supports In the Ground

To secure the vertical frame, p o u n d t w o '/2-inch diameter pieces of concrete reinforcing bars (rebar) into the g r o u n d . T h e s e bars can be p u r c h a s e d already c u t at a n y b u i l d i n g s u p p l y store a n d s h o u l d be anywhere between 1 8 t o 2 4 inches l o n g d e p e n d i n g o n y o u r soil. T h e looser (sandier) y o u r soil is, then the longer the bar should be. D r i v e the rebar h a l f w a y i n t o the g r o u n d , k e e p i n g it nice a n d straight; I suggest y o u wear gloves for this. T h e t w o electrical c o n d u i t legs slip right over those '/2-inch rebars and are securely in place. We never p o u n d on the c o n d u i t itself because the ends will b e n d and then they won't fit into the c o u p l i n g or over the rebar.
Vertical Gardening
151
Slide the 5-foot conduit pipes over the rebar for a standard strength vertical fame. Or, as described below, use a short steel fence post instead of the rebar for an extrastrong frame.
Extra-Strong Frame for Heavy Crops

To m a k e the vertical frame extra strong for watermelons, squash, and p u m p k i n s , drive a steel fence post into the g r o u n d first instead of the rebar. A fence p o s t c a n be just the shortest 3 - f o o t tall size. O n c e the fence p o s t is in the g r o u n d , t h e n the c o n d u i t is a t t a c h e d to it w i t h three p i p e c l a m p s . T h e w h o l e frame t h e n b e c o m e s s o s t r o n g that i t will h o l d u p a n y w e i g h t n o m a t t e r h o w h i g h y o u g o .
152
Attach the top conduit to the legs and tighten the screws in the elbows.
Vertical Supports On A Patio, Balcony, Rooftop, or Waist High Garden

Vertical supports can also be a d d e d to patio, balcony, or w a i s t - h i g h gardens. T h e y are c o n s t r u c t e d in the same manner. H o w e v e r , we suggest that they be no taller than 4 feet. Instead of using rebar in the g r o u n d to secure t h e m , they are fastened to the garden b o x using special clamps screwed into the sides of the b o x . B u y those w h e n a n d w h e r e y o u b u y y o u r c o n d u i t a n d lumber. I n this situation, there's n o t a great strength w i t h the vertical frame, so it w o u l d be necessary to p u t the struts f r o m the t o p d o w n to the s o u t h side o f the b o x , a n d d e p e n d i n g o n h o w h i g h , a n d y o u r l o c a t i o n , the w i n d , a n d the p l a n t g r o w t h , y o u m i g h t have t o p r o v i d e a d d i t i o n a l s u p p o r t . T h e illustration o n the next p a g e s h o w s g u y wires.
Vertical Gardening
153
Nylon Netting On the Supports

N o w that the vertical frame has been c o n s t r u c t e d , it is t i m e to a d d s o m e t h i n g for the plants to g r o w o n . I used to use either special w i d e - o p e n i n g f e n c i n g o r g o o d s t r o n g synthetic t w i n e o r cord, b u t then a l o n g c a m e this beautiful, soft, indestructible n y l o n n e t t i n g w i t h large o p e n i n g s y o u c a n reach t h r o u g h . T h i s n y l o n garden netting is n o w the o n l y material I use for vertical g a r d e n i n g . It's white, keeps its color, can't be b r o k e n , will last forever, a n d is easy to w o r k w i t h . T h e netting is tied tightly and securely to the t o p and sides of the vertical frame, a n d the plants can then be gently w o v e n in and o u t of the netting as they grow. T h e netting c o m e s in 4- a n d 5-foot w i d t h s a n d various lengths a n d is available at m o s t g a r d e n centers and catalogs. W h e n we teach o u r classes, it is always fun to ask t w o of the strongest m e n to c o m e up front and try and break the netting; they just can't do it!
If you live in a city and have no plot of ground to call your own, call your superintendent and ask for permission to build a roof op garden.
154
To attach the trellis netting to your frame, frst hook the netting on the two corners. Next, cut the netting at each connection. This will give you one long strand. (Be careful to cut on the same side of the connecting strand each time.)
Loop the long strand over the top of the fame and firmly tie a simple knot. Try to keep the length uniform so your netting isn't crooked.
Make the same cuts down the sides of the frame and firmly tie knots around the supporting pipes (above).
Tie the netting tight and your vertical frame will look neat and trim for many years.
156
With tight netting and a strong frame, you '11 be able to grow all sorts ofvining crops.
Arbors and W a l k w a y s
If an u p s i d e - d o w n , U-shaped metal vertical frame works so well for o n e box, just think of all the various shapes, sizes, and arrangements y o u can m a k e w i t h more vertical frames. Y o u can put two together in a straight line, turn a corner, or even zigzag. Y o u can p u t four together to f o t m an arbor. Y o u can p u t netting on t w o sides so it's a w a l k - t h r o u g h , on three sides so it's a sitting area, or on four sides w i t h one little o p e n i n g for the kids to play in. T h a t w o u l d be a secret place, a n d y o u c o u l d p u t n e t t i n g across the t o p o r r u n t w o sets o f vertical frames d o w n a pathway, creating a w a l l . Y o u c o u l d even create a w h o l e m a z e w i t h dead e n d s , turns, a n d twists. A l l of the types of plants that w o u l d g r o w on it produce huge leaves, and m a k e a very interesting visual pattern for y o u r yard. A n d don't forget v i n i n g f l o w e r s . I f y o u w a n t s o m e t h i n g that b l o o m s every year w i t h little care required, instead of an annual vine, y o u m i g h t w a n t to plant s o m e t h i n g more p e r m a n e n t like a perennial flower such as clematis, honeysuckle, c l i m b i n g roses, t r u m p e t vine, or
Vertical Gardening thumbelina. A n o t h e r g o o d s u m m e r v i n i n g crop i s N e w Z e a l a n d spinach. I f y o u h a d l o n g w a l k w a y s w i t h the vertical frames d o w n each side, y o u c o u l d b u i l d 2-foot-by-any-length boxes a n d have t h e m o n the outside giving y o u plenty o f w a l k i n g r o o m . Y o u c o u l d also p u t t h e m so that 1 foot is inside the path, a n d 1 foot is outside. I w o u l d plant the v i n e crops on the outside so they w o u l d c l i m b up the netting, a n d plant flowers along the inside that will do well in the eventual shade of the p a t h w a y p e r h a p s s o m e t h i n g like impatiens or coleus.
157
Plants that Grow Vertically

Seed packets a n d catalogs often do n o t indicate whether a variety is a v i n i n g or b u s h type. T h e seed c o m p a n i e s are c o n s t a n t l y c h a n g i n g a n d adding n e w varieties, a n d in order to find o u t the best ones that vine, I w o u l d suggest that y o u call (if t h e y have a toll-free n u m b e r ) or e-mail the various seed c o m p a n i e s t o f i n d o u t . Tell t h e m y o u are d o i n g Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g a n d w a n t t o g r o w crops vertically a n d that y o u w a n t t o k n o w w h i c h o f their varieties are vines w h i c h need trellising a n d support.
Planting Seeds or Transplants

R e m e m b e r , t o m a t o e s are the o n l y v i n e crop y o u c a n n o t start as a seed directly in the garden. T h e y take so l o n g to g r o w into a sizeable plant that in m o s t cases we have to g r o w or b u y transplants to p u t into the garden as s o o n as the last frost of spring is over. T h e rest of the vine crops can be started f r o m seed directly in the garden. T h e seed planting chart in the A p p e n d i x shows w h e n to plant t h e m at the best t i m e , a n d C h a p t e r 9 s h o w s y o u h o w to start the season earlier or extend it later.
Easy Climb
O n e of the particularly desirable points of vertical gardening is that there's v e r y little m a i n t e n a n c e to do for the plants. A s i d e f r o m watering, it's a matter of o n c e a w e e k t u c k i n g the tops of the plant in through an o p e n i n g in the netting, and b a c k t h r o u g h another o n e , so t h e y k e e p c l i m b i n g u p the n e t t i n g . S o m e o f the vertical c r o p s , like pole beans a n d c u c u m b e r s , w i l l d o all the c l i m b i n g themselves, b u t tomatoes have to be helped t h r o u g h the openings a n d p o i n t e d to the top. T h e netting is so strong that it will easily h o l d up the plant and, in fact, after further studies I f o u n d o u t the netting will also h o l d up
158
all the fruit, i n c l u d i n g small w a t e r m e l o n s a n d p u m p k i n s . S o m e o f the w i n t e r squashes g o t so heavy I was afraid late s u m m e r storms w o u l d b l o w over the w h o l e c o n t r a p t i o n . I t d e p e n d s o n h o w s t r o n g the g r o u n d rods are and h o w t o u g h the soil is. B u t if y o u r frame is located o u t s i d e the b o x a n d the g r o u n d rod is p o u n d e d into y o u r existing soil, it w o u l d require b e n d i n g the rebar, or the electrical c o n d u i t , before the frame w o u l d c o m e d o w n .
Tomatoes
T h e m o s t p o p u l a r h o m e garden vegetable i s t o m a t o e s , and w h e n you're vertical gardening the S F G way, there are a few things y o u can do to increase y o u r yields.
Nature has already taught some vines to climb. You basically just need to plant the seeds and watch them ?o!
Vertical Gardening
159
Tomatoes and the Single Stem Method

T h e theory b e h i n d p r u n i n g to o n e single stem is that all the energy goes straight up the m a i n stalk, a n d y o u will have m o r e tomatoes per square f o o t t h a n i f y o u a l l o w i t t o p u t e n e r g y i n t o b r a n c h i n g o u t . T h a t means y o u have to cut o f f the branches, and the best time to do it is w h e n they're tiny. U n f o r t u n a t e l y , m o s t gardeners don't. T h e y l o o k so small a n d c u t e , a n d as t h e y g r o w bigger a n d bigger, t h e y begin to take on the appearance of a productive plant and it becomes hard to cut t h e m back. T o h e l p c o n v i n c e y o u t o p r u n e o f f those suckers, r e m e m b e r that the n i c e t h i n g a b o u t t h e m i s o n c e y o u p r u n e t h e m , y o u c a n root t h e m , a n d t h e y c a n b e c o m e a n o t h e r p l a n t for a late c r o p . N o m a t t e r h o w large the sucker o r side b r a n c h , y o u can stand i t in a glass of w a t e r a n d transplant that i n t o the g r o u n d as s o o n as the roots s p r o u t . O r , y o u c a n stick those suckers in a c u p of v e r m i c u l i t e , a n d k e e p that in a saucer of water, a n d t h e y w i l l also s p r o u t roots. T h e y are great, free plants for a late harvest for c a n n i n g , juice, or preserving. G e t i n the h a b i t o f i n s p e c t i n g a n d p r u n i n g y o u r t o m a t o plants o n c e a w e e k to a single s t e m , a n d w e a v e the t o p in a n d o u t of the netting. A t the same t i m e , c h e c k the overall appearance o f the p l a n t t o m a k e sure y o u have n o t o m a t o w o r m s visiting.
LvLore manageable, enjoyable, and bountiful than I'd ever imagined."

Manjafrom Oregon
Lay Tomatoes Down

Since a t o m a t o p l a n t c a n s p r o u t n e w roots a l o n g its m a i n s t e m , I have f o u n d that the best w a y to plant the m a i n crop of tomatoes is to lay t h e m d o w n horizontally in a shallow trench. T h e y will develop an e n o r m o u s n u m b e r o f roots, all a l o n g that h a i r y s t e m , w h i c h w i l l sustain a larger, m o r e productive plant. P i c k y o u r best-looking plants, a n d p i n c h or c u t o f f the l o w e r leaves (at least t w o or three) so y o u have a tall s k i n n y p l a n t ready to p l a n t in a l a y - m e - d o w n p o s i t i o n . To do this, y o u first locate the square foot it's g o i n g to be in, take y o u r h a n d or a t r o w e l , a n d d i g o u t a l o n g s h a l l o w t r e n c h , perhaps 3 or 4 inches d e e p in the m i d d l e of the square a n d as l o n g as y o u r t o m a t o plant is. M a k e the trench l o n g e n o u g h so y o u can lay d o w n the plant w i t h the root ball at one end. D i g a little deeper for the root ball a n d then lay the stem on the b o t t o m of the trench. At the other e n d where the t o p is (remember y o u cut o f f m o s t of the lower leaves), very, very carefully b e n d the top so it starts p o i n t i n g up. Y o u can take the Mel's M i x , a n d p u s h it underneath that bent t o p to act as a pillow (see, this is really a b e d ) , and if you're very gentle, you'll e n d up w i t h the t o p s t i c k i n g o u t of the soil at a slight angle. It does n o t have to point straight u p ; it just has to be aboveground. Fill in the rest of the trench a n d water well.
160
In just a few days that t o p will straighten itself u p , a n d at the same t i m e all the n e w roots will start s p r o u t i n g o u t f r o m the m a i n stem. I f y o u n o t i c e d the root system w h e n y o u p u t the plant i n the g r o u n d , d e p e n d i n g on w h a t size p o t it was g r o w i n g in, it p r o b a b l y had a very small rootball, perhaps o n l y 1 or 2 inches w i d e , a n d 1 or 2 inches l o n g . B u t n o w for the average transplant you're g o i n g to d e v e l o p a 6- to 8-inch rootball a l o n g the entire l e n g t h . T h i s procedure will n o t take any strength f r o m the plant, a n d it will n o t delay a n y o f the first t o m a t o e s you're g o i n g t o harvest f r o m that plant. In fact, because of its extra root strength a n d size, it will be a m o r e vigorous grower than before.
TRAINING PLANTS UP YOUR NETTING At least once a week, gently take the new growth on your vertical crops, and carefully weave it in and out of the netting. The wide squares in the netting make it easy to reach through and guide your plants without breaking them.
S o m e b o o k s m a y advise y o u t o d i g a d e e p h o l e , a n d p l a n t the t o m a t o straight d o w n deep so just the t o p leaves show, thus b u r y i n g the entire stem w i t h the idea that the roots w i l l still s p r o u t a l o n g the s t e m . T h i s is okay, b u t that p u t s the p l a n t q u i t e d e e p in the g r o u n d a n d usually it's still s p r i n g t i m e a n d the g r o u n d is still fairly c o o l . S o I've f o u n d the l a y - m e - d o w n m e t h o d w i l l m a k e the p l a n t g r o w m u c h faster, because the soil at that level is w a r m e r , by perhaps as m u c h as 10 degrees. A f t e r the p l a n t is h e a d i n g skyward, y o u treat it the exact same w a y as a n y other t o m a t o transplant. T h i s m e t h o d o f l a y - m e - d o w n p l a n t i n g also will give y o u m o r e fruit
Vertical Gardening
161
Vines need a little direction from time to time. Gently weave a vine in and out of the trellis netting to help it keep a steady course.
because the first fruiting b r a n c h to f o r m a l o n g the m a i n stem will be closer to the g r o u n d , a l l o w i n g y o u m o r e distance to the top of y o u r vertical frame to have fruit.
Tomato Worm
If y o u see s o m e of y o u r t o m a t o leaves are c h e w e d u p , y o u m a y have the dreaded t o m a t o w o r m . L o o k for little black specks (the droppings from the w o r m s ) , a n d c h e c k the s u r r o u n d i n g leaves t o f i n d t h e m . T h e w o r m s are c a m o u f l a g e d b u t still b r i g h t l y c o l o r e d , large, a n d beautiful. Usually thete are just one or t w o at the most. ( C a u t i o n : do not pick it up. T o m a t o w o r m s e m i t a very foul smell that will get on y o u r hands and clothes.) Play it safe. G e t y o u r scissors, and cut off the leaf. Put it in a paper bag, seal it, and t h r o w it in the garbage. T o m a t o w o r m s don't usually harm the tomatoes themselves, b u t they take strength from the plant as t h e y eat m a n y of the leaves. If y o u r children are interested in a science project, y o u m i g h t have t h e m c o m e and l o o k at the t o m a t o horn w o r m a n d get their ears as close as they can. T h e y can actually hear t h e m c r u n c h i n g the leaves. (Be careful, the w o r m s c o u l d j u m p o n y o u r h e a d n o , I'm o n l y kidding!)
Over the Top

W h a t d o y o u d o w h e n the t o m a t o p l a n t gets t o the t o p o f y o u r tower, a n d there is still a lot of g r o w i n g season left? Y o u have t w o choices, d e p e n d i n g on h o w m a n y tomatoes you've picked so far and h o w m a n y green ones are c o m i n g . Y o u can either c u t the t o p right off, stop its g r o w t h , a n d a l l o w a g o o d part of the e n e r g y to go i n t o the existing t o m a t o e s . O r , y o u can let the t o p c o n t i n u e t o grow, a n d let it h a n g over the side. It w i l l k e e p g r o w i n g until the e n d of the season, w h i c h for a t o m a t o p l a n t is the first frost. If y o u w a n t
162
This vertical garden has bean and tomato plants. They are planted with sage and squash. Think of the harvest!
to p r o t e c t this p l a n t f r o m the first frost (and e v e r y o n e does), the vertical frame is designed so all y o u have to do is gently lay a tarp or blanket over it. N e x t m o r n i n g take it off, fold it up, and you're ready until the next threat o f frost. T h i s w a y y o u c a n k e e p y o u r t o m a t o plants g r o w i n g and p r o d u c i n g for several m o r e weeks.
Pruning Cucumbers, Melons, and More

T h e other vine crops can have their side branches c o n t i n u e to grow until the w h o l e plant takes up too m u c h space. In general y o u w a n t the plant to spread o u t to be approximately 1 to 2 feet w i d e on the vertical frame netting. If y o u plant one plant per square foot, it can f i l l that 1 2 - i n c h w i d e square, g o i n g right u p the netting. I f the spacing for that particular vegetable (for example, c u c u m b e r s that are spaced 2 per square foot), y o u w o u l d trim the side branches back so that each one is f r o m 6 to 9 inches w i d e outside of its space. Squash is a little different because the leaves are so large that it's hard to judge w h e r e the s t e m is a n d h o w m u c h r o o m the entire p l a n t is taking. That's w h y we give squash a lot m o r e r o o m (2 square feet per plant) in the vertical garden. A l t h o u g h most squash plants will g r o w on one central stalk, s o m e d o b r a n c h . T h o s e w i t h branches take l o n g e r t o have fruit, so if y o u c u t t h e m o f f all the e n e r g y will go to the m a i n branch and the flowers and fruit on that m a i n branch. W h e n it grows to the t o p , let it h a n g d o w n until it gets near the b o t t o m , p u t it t h r o u g h the n e t t i n g , t u r n it u p , a n d start all over again. A l l the v i n i n g plants are v e r y v i g o r o u s , energetic, a n d sturdy, so there's n o t m u c h y o u can d o t o deter their g r o w t h . B u t w h e n e v e r you're b e n d i n g a stem to p o k e it t h r o u g h the netting or over the top, h o l d it w i t h t w o hands and be careful so it doesn't break.
Vertical Gardening
163
Safety Precautions
I f y o u r crops are g r o w i n g t h i c k l y a n d h a v e c o v e r e d the 4 - f o o t - w i d e frames, y o u m i g h t w a n t t o p l a y i t safe a n d p u t g u y wires o n the vertical frame w h e n y o u get near the e n d of the season. T h i s requires tying s o m e t h i n g like fishing line or strong cord f r o m the top bar d o w n t o the s o u t h side o f the b o x . For the n o r t h side, y o u c o u l d always p r o p the t o p up w i t h a 1 x 2 - f o o t b o a r d c u t o u t w i t h a n o t c h to fit into the top bar. T h a t w o u l d h o l d the frame up f r o m b o t h directions.
You have to use your own judgment, but after you get accustomed to bending plants, you'll get used to their resilience. You'll know how far they can bend and when not to push them. Remember, though, if you're bending a plant near the top or in through the netting, the end is very supple and easy to maneuver. However, if you're trying to bend the stem closer to where it's planted, the vine will be hard and fairly rigid. So, if you have to bend it there, you might stuff something under it like an old wadded-up tee shirt. In a few days, you can retrieve the shirt after the stem has taken the new shape.
164
Cold Season Handling of a Vertical Frame

After the g r o w i n g season is over, the frame can be removed intact and h u n g o u t of the w a y in the garage to w a i t for the next g r o w i n g season. S o m e p e o p l e leave their vertical frame up all winter, a n d d u r i n g the h o l i d a y season, w e a v e b r i g h t l y c o l o r e d r i b b o n or even lights in a n d o u t of the n e t t i n g to decorate for the holidays!
Conclusion
We have seen h o w beneficial and easy vertical gardening can be. N o t o n l y can y o u g r o w vining crops in less space, but harvesting becomes m u c h easier and crops don't get soft and m u s h y from resting on the g r o u n d . Vertical frames add beauty to a garden as well as that unique, vertical dimension. S o , w e e n c o u r a g e y o u t o a d d this i n n o v a t i v e feature o f Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g t o y o u r o w n garden. Y o u will b e s o glad y o u did!

We gardeners like to b e n d reality a bit. N a t u r e says, " Y o u can't p l a n t n o w , it's t o o c o l d . " B u t we say, " W a n n a m a k e a bet?" T h i s chapter w i l l s h o w y o u o n h o w t o get the m o s t o u t o f y o u r g a r d e n each year b y p u s h i n g the e n v e l o p e o n nature's c o n d i t i o n s . W i t h a variety o f e a s y - t o - m a k e i m p l e m e n t s , y o u r g a r d e n can g r o w 3 0 t o 5 0 p e r c e n t m o r e p r o d u c e each year. A n d i n a d d i t i o n t o the extra f o o d , i t extends the b e a u t y o f the g a r d e n a n d the satisfaction o f the gardener. H o w e v e r , this idea isn't necessarily for the first-time gardener unless y o u ' v e g o t a lot of t i m e , a natural talent, a n d a lot o f confidence. N a t u r e gives us o u r gardening cues as the seasons change. We're g o i n g to use those seasonal cycles as o u r f r a m e w o r k for this chapter. B u t f i r s t , w h y w o u l d y o u w a n t t o e x t e n d y o u r seasons? W e l l , w o u l d y o u like t o p i c k the f i r s t tomatoes o n the block? W o u l d y o u like a garden-fresh salad on T h a n k s g i v i n g ? Y o u r answer to these questions will help y o u determine h o w m u c h w o r k y o u w a n t t o p u t into extending the g r o w i n g season because g r o w i n g o u t of season does require m o r e time a n d effort.
a
fantastic! It very much appeals to my innate sense of organization and efficiency."

Jefffrom North Carolina
Lengthen Season by 50 Percent

In most parts of the continental U n i t e d States, the average g r o w i n g season runs f r o m M a y to September. T h i s means that m o s t gardeners g r o w vegetables d u r i n g a n average o f six m o n t h s o u t o f a possible twelve. W h e n these six m o n t h s are e x t e n d e d b y a n a d d i t i o n a l t w o m o n t h s , the g r o w i n g season is e x t e n d e d by 33 percent. A threem o n t h extension provides a 50 percent i n c r e a s e a w o r t h w h i l e goal that can be achieved easily a n d inexpensively. Gardeners gain a great sense o f a c c o m p l i s h m e n t f r o m these increased yields, a n d m o d e r n homesteaders and f o o d preservers find it an absolute blessing. Square F o o t G a r d e n e r s don't have the negative experiences associated w i t h d o i n g all that hard w o r k w h e n t h e y g a r d e n , s o t h e y l o o k f o r w a r d t o m o r e g a r d e n i n g a n d w a n t t o l e n g t h e n the g r o w i n g season. For t h e m , g a r d e n i n g isn't a test of e n d u r a n c e . It's a pleasant experience. T h e y don't w a n t t o k n o w h o w s o o n t h e y c a n q u i t , b u t h o w l o n g t h e y c a n c o n t i n u e e x p e r i e n c i n g the j o y o f g a r d e n i n g !
166
Don't t h i n k y o u must extend the season to be an accomplished gardener. Sometimes it's just as g o o d to sit back, relax, and just "go d o r m a n t " for a while. Instead of gardening y o u could be satisfied and save time and w o r k . It's y o u r decision. B u t if y o u t h i n k it's time to trick nature into feeding y o u year-round, then read on! T h e rest of the chapter will explain w h a t to do each season to extend y o u r harvest from coolweather and warm-weather plants.
Extend the Harvest by Growing Out of Season

T h e o b v i o u s w a y to e x t e n d the g a r d e n year is to start earlier than usual and keep the plants g r o w i n g later. C o o l - w e a t h e r crops can be g r o w n in t w o extra plantings for a longer season. T h e first planting is m a d e in the early spring and will mature in the cool weather of late spring. T h e second crop of cool-weather plants can be planted in late s u m m e r to mature in the late fall. Since early spring a n d late fall can b r i n g s o m e rather severe weather, g r o w i n g o u t of season is s i m p l y k e e p i n g the c o l d t e m p e r a If you want to jump-start your garden, try starting your own seeds. But with the SFG, you won't need all this expensive equipment and you won't have so many plants to take care of.
tures a w a y f r o m y o u r plants. T o d o this, it's i m p o r t a n t t o provide these crops w i t h the extra p r o t e c t i o n t h e y need f r o m the elements. B y c o v e r i n g a n d p r o t e c t i n g y o u r crops, y o u are basically creating an artificial e n v i r o n m e n t . A f t e r all, that is w h a t a g r e e n h o u s e d o e s i t keeps the c o l d air o u t b u t lets the s u n l i g h t in. W h a t m o r e c o u l d a p l a n t want?
Extending the Seasons In addition, all of the s u m m e r or hot-weather crops can be started t w o to three weeks earlier than n o r m a l and they, too, can be extended up to a m o n t h b e y o n d their n o r m a l season in the fall. T h e n , an extra p l a n t i n g o f lettuce, s p i n a c h , a n d radishes c a n b e g r o w n d u r i n g the h o t s u m m e r m o n t h s that are n o r m a l l y c o n s i d e r e d o u t o f season for these t w o crops. S o u n d like a lot o f w o r k ? W i t h S q u a r e F o o t G a r d e n i n g , it's easier than y o u think. It all depends on y o u providing protection f r o m the s u d d e n a n d harsh temperatures and weather.
167
Box with Cage

Since a Square F o o t G a r d e n takes up so little space, it is relatively easy to protect y o u r crops. W h i l e special t e c h n i q u e s that p r o v i d e extra p r o t e c t i o n m a y v a r y w i t h the season a n d the variety of vegetable, they are q u i c k l y learned and easily practiced. C h a p t e r 4 explains h o w to build a special b o x a n d the various kinds of protective cages. T h e s e structures m a k e it possible to m o d e r a t e the c l i m a t e i n that b o x s o y o u c a n stretch y o u r g r o w i n g season a t b o t h ends.
Early Spring
A great time to extend the g r o w i n g season is early spring before a n y o n e else is o u t gardening. Begin b y w a r m i n g u p the soil i n y o u r S F G boxes. Spread clear or black plastic over the t o p of the soil, a n d w e i g h it d o w n w i t h a brick in each corner. After a couple of s u n n y days, take the cover off, lift the grid out, and m i x up the soil w i t h a trowel so the w a r m e r surface soil is m o v e d d o w n b e l o w a n d the colder, deeper soils are raised to the top. T h e n replace the plastic covers. T h i s is no b i g deal since y o u r Mel's M i x is loose a n d friable at all times of the year. Besides, the soil is o n l y 6 inches deep. H o w m u c h w o r k could that be?
Jump Start Your Seeds

If y o u w a n t to get a q u i c k e r start a n d earlier g r o w t h , try s p r o u t i n g y o u r seeds i n d o o r s , a n d t h e n t r a n s p l a n t i n g t h e m i n t o i n d i v i d u a l containers w h e n they are very y o u n g . Before the plants get t o o large, harden t h e m off before planting t h e m outdoors in y o u r spring box.
168
Spring
For y o u r first spring p l a n t i n g , set up a spring b o x w i t h a s t o r m w i n d o w cover o r the P V C t y p e structure over a n y g a r d e n square where you'll be planting an early crop so the sun will start w a r m i n g the soil. Do this a b o u t four weeks before it's time to plant y o u r seeds. F o r a d o u b l e - q u i c k soil w a r m - u p , cover the soil w i t h clear or b l a c k plastic, a n d t h e n r e m o v e i t before p l a n t i n g . O r y o u c a n use plastic c o v e r e d cages over i n d i v i d u a l squares a r o u n d the g a r d e n instead of the entire 4 X 4 - f o o t area. W h e n the w e a t h e r is w a r m e n o u g h , transplant the plants y o u ' v e g r o w n i n t o the o p e n g a r d e n squares. T h e y can also be left to g r o w where they were planted by r e m o v i n g the protective cage f r o m the squares.
You must check your spring plant boxes every day in sunny weather. If your plants begin to wilt or if the soil dries to a depth of l inch, it's time to water. Water with a cup of sun-warmed water.
Climate Control
W h e n you're using a spring b o x on y o u r early crops, r e m e m b e r that fresh air has to get in and y o u have to v e n t o u t the h o t air that builds up on s u n n y days even in cold or freezing weather. H e a t b u i l d s u p q u i c k l y i n the boxes o n s u n n y days. A s the w e a t h e r w a r m s u p , slide or lift the cover o p e n a little farther each w e e k until y o u c a n r e m o v e it entirely. (Don't try to p r o p up a glass s t o r m w i n d o w w i t h sticks; believe m e , the w i n d will b l o w i t d o w n w h e n e v e r you're n o t a r o u n d . ) A light frost w o n ' t h u r t m o s t c o o l w e a t h e r c r o p s , b u t t o o m u c h heat w i l l c o o k t h e m . It takes a little experience t o learn h o w t o c o n t r o l the heat a n d m o i s t u r e inside y o u r frame. K e e p i n m i n d these precautions w h e n t r y i n g t o g r o w o u t o f season.
169
Extending Cool-Weather Crops into Summer

I n a d d i t i o n t o lettuce a n d radishes, y o u m i g h t also try g r o w i n g spinach or even cabbage o u t of season into the early summer. Spring crops can be g r o w n f r o m seeds or f r o m transplants started indoors a f e w w e e k s a h e a d o f t i m e . W h e n c h o o s i n g varieties o f c o o l - w e a t h e r crops t o g r o w i n t o s u m m e r , l o o k for w o r d s like " l o n g s t a n d i n g , " "slow to b o l t , " a n d " h e a t resistant" in the seed catalogs or p a c k e t descriptions.
Summer
As the spring season progresses, it's time to give s o m e s u m m e r v e g e t a b l e s s u c h as beans, squash, a n d c u c u m b e r s a head start. For earlier harvests, try starting the seeds for these w a r m weather crops right in their p e r m a n e n t location under a protective cage t w o weeks before the usual planting time. T h e y will b e m u c h hardier a n d stronger t h a n seedlings g r o w n o n the w i n d o w s i l l . W h e n all d a n g e r o f frost i s past, r e m o v e the covers. T h e r e is an entire industry w i t h all kinds of protective devices a n d p r o d u c t s t o h e l p the gardener b e successful i n early g a r d e n i n g . T h e y vary f r o m water-filled walls a r o u n d the p l a n t t o special g r o u n d covers d e s i g n e d t o heat u p the soil quicker. T r y s o m e o f these p r o d u c t s and see w h a t h a p p e n s . I always like to place an u n p r o t e c t e d p l a n t right next t o the p r o t e c t e d o n e for c o m p a r i s o n .
Shade and Water

If you're the type of person w h o doesn't like hot, sticky weather, and y o u literally w i l t in the sun, then the obvious solution is to m o v e into the shade w i t h a large p i t c h e r of y o u r favorite c o l d d r i n k . W e l l , lettuce a n d radishes are no different. If y o u c a n p r o v i d e shade for these spring crops (especially d u r i n g the n o o n sun), along w i t h s o m e extra water, y o u w i l l b e able t o harvest t h r o u g h o u t m o s t o f the summer. L o o k for special hot-weather varieties of y o u r favorite plants in y o u r seed catalog. C o v e r the square w i t h a shade cage, a n d give the plants p l e n t y of w a t e r a s a general rule, w a t e r t w i c e as often as y o u usually w o u l d . R e m e m b e r , o n e o f the best aids for g r o w i n g a g o o d c r o p i s Mel's M i x o u r soil m i x that c o m b i n e s equal parts peat m o s s , coarse v e r m i c u l i t e , a n d b l e n d e d c o m p o s t . I t h o l d s lots o f m o i s t u r e
170
so t h e plant roots can take up all that's needed, yet drains well so the roots can't b e c o m e waterlogged.
Shade Screens
T h e shade cage w i l l a d m i t e n o u g h l i g h t for p r o p e r g r o w t h w h i l e k e e p i n g the temperature d o w n considerably. A layer of t h i c k m u l c h w i l l also h e l p m o d e r a t e soil temperatures. Y o u c a n also m a k e use o f natural shade or s u n screens by l o c a t i n g a p l a n t i n g of s p r i n g crops b e h i n d (to the n o r t h o f ) y o u r vertical g r o w i n g frames. K e e p in m i n d that you're g r o w i n g o u t of season, w h i c h means it is n o t the plant's natural inclination to g r o w then. Y o u are urging these plants o n , s o b e g e n e r o u s w i t h y o u r h e l p a n d a t t e n t i o n a n d don't expect t o o m u c h . Just enjoy the challenge a n d experience!
Summer Plants into Fall

G a r d e n e r s s o m e t i m e s w o n d e r w h e t h e r the extra effort i n v o l v e d i n p r o t e c t i n g s u m m e r crops f r o m the first fall frost is w o r t h the effort. I t h i n k it certainly is, if y o u w a n t an extra t w o or three w e e k s w o r t h o f harvest f r o m all those w a r m - w e a t h e r crops. Q u i t e often the f i r s t frost is f o l l o w e d by a l o n g p e r i o d of clear, w a r m w e a t h e r before the next frost. I f y o u can protect y o u r garden f r o m that f i r s t frost, y o u c a n enjoy green plants a n d fresh vegetables d u r i n g o n e o f the m o s t pleasant periods of the y e a r m i d - a u t u m n . Since m o s t of these crops
Extending the Seasons have a six to eight w e e k harvest season, the extra t w o to three weeks gained a m o u n t to quite a b i t m o r e than a 25 percent extension of the season.
171
All Together Now

T o protect y o u r crops f r o m frost, y o u can start w i t h a P V C arch o r covered w a g o n frame, a n d t h e n cover it w i t h a large sheet of plastic, floating cover, or light blanket. Fasten d o w n the corners s o i t w o n ' t b l o w o f f d u r i n g the n i g h t . O r , the l o w - g r o w i n g crops c a n b e readily p r o t e c t e d w i t h a loose c o v e r i n g of h a y that is easily r e m o v e d the n e x t m o r n i n g . To protect v i n e crops f r o m frost, just t h r o w a b l a n k e t or tarp over the vertical frame so it's h a n g i n g d o w n o n all sides. T h i s i s o n e o f the p r i m e advantages o f g r o w i n g squash, t o m a t o e s , c u c u m b e r s , p o l e beans, p u m p k i n s , a n d similar s u m m e r crops on a vertical frame.
Fall
W h e n fall arrives, y o u a n d y o u r garden have three options: to store food for the winter, extend the harvest, or stop y o u r garden. W h i c h ever y o u choose depends on y o u r t i m e and desire.
Extending the Harvest by Storing It

Let's l o o k at the easiest a n d l e a s t - k n o w n w a y to e x t e n d the h a r v e s t s t o r i n g it. T h e r e ' s the o l d - f a s h i o n e d b u t e c o n o m i c a l c a n n i n g , preserving, a n d freezing for the future, a n d it has a place. But I t h i n k the m o s t e c o n o m i c a l a n d environmentally correct w a y to extend the season is to store the harvest. T h e r e is almost no w o r k and m o n e y involved, a n d the flavor a n d nutritional value of each vegetable is greater than if it w a s frozen or canned.
Handle Your Harvest Gently

T h e o n l y secret o f successful storage i s actually v e r y s i m p l e l e a r n each vegetable's best storage c o n d i t i o n s a n d p r o v i d e it. T h e r e are really o n l y t w o : cool a n d dry, or c o l d a n d moist. T h e list of vegetables that need cool a n d d r y conditions is easy to r e m e m b e r because there are o n l y a f e w p u m p k i n s , w i n t e r squash, a n d o n i o n s . T h e temperature should be a r o u n d 50 to 60 degrees Fahrenheit ( 1 0 to 1 5 . 5 degrees Celsius), a n d the h u m i d i t y needs to be fairly l o w a t about 50 percent.
112
T r y to find a cool corner of y o u r garage or basement where the temperature stays above 35 b u t b e l o w 60 degrees F (above 1.6 b u t b e l o w 1 5 . 5 degrees C ) . If y o u t h i n k y o u r storage area m i g h t freeze or get t o o w a r m at times, y o u can build t w o walls to enclose a corner to provide an even-temperature fruit closet. A d d s o m e insulation, and r e m e m b e r to allow plenty of air circulation. D o n ' t stack p r o d u c e up in a b i g pile, b u t spread y o u r vegetables o u t evenly on a shelf (not on the floor).
DON'T FEED THE ANIMALS There is one problem with using hay bales as winter mukh-they can provide a cozy nest for ground mice and voles that love to eat crunchy root crops. So keep an eye out for these pests and any damage they may be doing. If they do infest your winter storage plot it's best to harvest everything and store your produce in a different place.
H a n d l e p r o d u c e a s g e n t l y a n d i n f r e q u e n t l y a s possible. W h e n you're o u t harvesting, treat each vegetable as if it w e r e an egg. A n y bruise or c u t will be the first s p o t to spoil. L a y each harvested v e g e t a b l e separately i n a b o x o f s a w d u s t o r c r u m p l e d n e w s p a p e r ; don't pile t h e m all together. Do n o t w a s h or scrub the produce. Leave the b o t t o m of the root on root crops, and at least an i n c h of the top g r o w t h . For crops such as vine crops, leave as m u c h of the stem on as possible. O n l y store p r o d u c e that is in really g o o d condition. Vegetables in the g r o u p that need c o l d a n d m o i s t conditions are all r o o t c r o p s b e e t s , carrots, t u r n i p s , w h i t e p o t a t o e s , a n d w i n t e r radishes plus all of the c a b b a g e family. T h i s g r o u p also includes
Extending the Seasons fruitespecially apples. T h e ideal storage temperature for t h e m is as c o l d as y o u c a n get w i t h o u t actually f r e e z i n g 3 5 to 45 degrees F ( 1 . 6 t o 7.2 degrees C ) . Actually, the simplest w a y to store root crops is n o t to dig t h e m up at all. R o l l a bale of h a y over the p l a n t e d area; this w i l l b r e a k their tops a n d stop t h e plant's g r o w i n g cycle w h i l e k e e p i n g the g r o u n d from freezing. W h e n you're ready to harvest, simply roll the bale over, d i g up a f e w vegetables, a n d t h e n replace the bale. R e g u l a r radishes w o n ' t h o l d u p t o o l o n g i n freezing w e a t h e r w h i l e the w i n t e r radish will last a l m o s t indefinitely. C a r r o t s a n d leeks also do q u i t e w e l l t h r o u g h the entire w i n t e r . I f you're feeling a d v e n t u r o u s , y o u c a n e x p e r i m e n t w i t h l e a v i n g different r o o t crops i n the g r o u n d t o see w h i c h last t h r o u g h the fall a n d w i n t e r so you'll k n o w w h a t to expect the following year.
173
Cozy Cover
C a b b a g e a n d other leaf a n d head crops can also be stored in the garden, b u t they won't do well under a solid bale of hay. Instead, it is better to use a loose, flufiy covering of straw or leaves. To keep the w i n d f r o m b l o w i n g this loose covering a r o u n d , try p l a c i n g a 2 - f o o t - h i g h fence of c h i c k e n w i r e a r o u n d y o u r g a r d e n areas a n d anchoring the w i r i n g at each corner w i t h stakes.
Dig It In
A n o t h e r storage m e t h o d for root crops is to b u r y a container in the g r o u n d a n d p a c k y o u r vegetables i n layers o f m o i s t sawdust, peat moss, or sand. Y o u c a n s i n k a plastic or m e t a l garbage can straight into the g r o u n d w h i l e k e e p i n g the t o p a f e w inches above the surface so no w a t e r gets in. M a k e sure the cover fits tightly; t h e n pile at least 12 inches of h a y or leaves over the t o p . K e e p e v e r y t h i n g d r y by c o v e r i n g it w i t h a w e i g h t e d - d o w n plastic sheet or tarp. W a t c h o u t for leaks in the c o n t a i n e r that c a n allow g r o u n d w a t e r to seep in. I f y o u can, select a n area o n h i g h g r o u n d t o locate the storage container. T h e g r o u n d will n o t freeze u n d e r o r a r o u n d this container, a n d y o u r vegetables will be m a i n t a i n e d in a v e r y even and m o i s t c o n d i t i o n .
Temperature Differences
O n a c o l d n i g h t y o u c a n w a l k a r o u n d y o u r p r o p e r t y a n d actually feel the differences in temperature. T h e c o l d air virtually rolls d o w n the slope a n d settles in l o w - l y i n g areas; in fact, this is called c o l d air
114
drainage. Surprisingly, this w i l l h a p p e n even w h e r e there is n o t a great difference i n elevation. O n c e y o u get the k n a c k o f w a t c h i n g o u t for frost a n d c o v e r i n g y o u r plants w h e n i t threatens, y o u w i l l see the advantages of l o c a t i n g a garden on the t o p or s o u t h side of a slope rather t h a n at the b o t t o m of a l o w area. Y o u w i l l also see the a d v a n t a g e o f g r o u p i n g y o u r crops a c c o r d i n g t o their w e a t h e r r e q u i r e m e n t s . T h i s m a k e s i t easier t o p r o t e c t t h e m f r o m either frost o r freezing i n b o t h the s p r i n g a n d fall. O n e o f the greatest advantages of S F G is h o w easy it is to p r o t e c t y o u r g a r d e n since it is c o n d e n s e d i n t o small, u n i f o r m areas. It's m u c h simpler a n d m o r e cost effective t o g r o w c o o l - w e a t h e r crops for an e x t e n d e d season u s i n g a s u n - h e a t e d b o x that protects plants f r o m just the severe w e a t h e r fluctuations.
Frost
Frost forms w h e n the o u t d o o r temperature drops b e l o w the freezing point, resulting in the deposit of ice crystals. Plant material will freeze w h e n there is an a c c u m u l a t i o n of cold air, 32 degrees Fahrenheit or b e l o w (0 degrees Celsius), at g r o u n d level. Frost can, and does, occur in l o w areas w h i l e the hills and slopes right next to t h e m m i g h t be frost-free. T h i s is because h o t air rises a n d c o l d air sinks. If a b o d y of water is nearby, it can greatly reduce the occurrence of frost as water holds heat very well. In general, frost usually occurs in the v e r y early m o r n i n g h o u r s , particularly after a still, c a l m n i g h t w h e n the w e a t h e r is dry. T h e c h a n c e s of frost are also increased f o l l o w i n g the passage of a c o l d front, i n d i c a t e d b y a n i n t e r m i t t e n t a n d c h a n g i n g w e a t h e r pattern of b r o k e n c l o u d s a n d occasional p r e c i p i t a t i o n ; this is in contrast to the steady o r c o n t i n u o u s rain a n d the heavy, l o w - h a n g i n g c l o u d s that a c c o m p a n y a w a r m front. W h e n frost is p r e d i c t e d , be ready. Y o u r best b e t is to catch the e v e n i n g w e a t h e r forecast, particularly the local o n e . A n o t h e r (perhaps better) source is the Internet. O n e of the best websites is www.weather.com. C l i c k o n " H o m e and G a r d e n , " then " L a w n and G a r d e n " and enter y o u r zip code. You'll get all the information y o u need to be ready for that first frost.
Light Versus Hard Frost

A light frost blackens the outer leaves of m o s t s u m m e r flowers a n d vegetables. It is i n d i c a t e d by a w h i t e c o v e r i n g on the l a w n in v e r y early m o r n i n g . S u m m e r vegetables c a n still be harvested if eaten r i g h t away. A hard frost w i l l b l a c k e n a n d kill all s u m m e r flowers a n d vegetables. Plants that were b u s h y a n d colorful the d a y before are
Extending the Seasons n o w just d r o o p y skeletons w i t h b l a c k e n e d leaves h a n g i n g like rags f r o m the stems. T h i s c a n be v e r y d i s h e a r t e n i n g for gardeners w h o c o m e o u t i n the m o r n i n g t o f i n d that the g a r d e n has b e e n devastated. A hard frost is i n d i c a t e d by a c r u n c h y feel to the g r o u n d a n d a thin film of ice on the b i r d b a t h . T h i s is the t i m e w h e n m o s t gardeners declare a n e n d t o the season. B u t i f y o u have p l a n t e d s o m e colorful f a l l - b l o o m i n g plants ( m u m s , asters, a n d s o m e h a r d y daisies) a l o n g w i t h the fall vegetables, a n d y o u clean up the garden right away, y o u r garden w i l l still l o o k attractive a n d i n v i t i n g after a hard frost. Y o u r spirits w i l l be lifted a n d y o u c a n go on to e n j o y an a u t u m n garden.
175
Winter
Gardeners w h o are particularly ambitious a n d w a n t to continue g r o w i n g s o m e t h i n g all w i n t e r will need additional tools for providing special protection to a v e r y select variety of plants. If y o u can keep the g r o u n d f r o m freezing solid and provide sunlight in just a small area, in m a n y parts o f the c o u n t r y y o u can continue g r o w i n g special varieties of lettuce a n d spinach, hardy leaf crops such as kale, and a n u m b e r of oriental vegetables all w i n t e r l o n g . It's also possible to plant s o m e m e m b e r s of the o n i o n family in the fall in order to get a larger or early crop next spring and summer. C a l l y o u r c o u n t y extension service for local advice a n d conditions. As y o u c o n t i n u e gardening, you'll learn w h i c h vegetables are hardier in y o u r particular area. W i n d a n d rain have a lot to do w i t h plant survival a n d h o w m u c h protection y o u need t o provide.
Special Cold Varieties

Salad f r o m y o u r garden d u r i n g the coldest m o n t h s o f winter? Y o u bet. A fall b o x (that's just a S F G b o x that's u s e d d u r i n g the fall) can p r o v i d e fresh salad each w e e k d u r i n g the w i n t e r w i t h o u t a greenhouse. Here's h o w : select f a s t - g r o w i n g vegetables for y o u r w i n t e r garden. T r y a n y o f the h a r d y salad greens a n d root c r o p s , b u t l o o k for special c o l d - t o l e r a n t varieties. E v e r y seed c o m p a n y offers different varieties so l o o k t h r o u g h catalogs a n d select those that are r e c o m m e n d e d for c o l d a n d w i n t e r g r o w i n g . L o o k for n a m e s that have w o r d s i n t h e m like "Arctic," "Frost K i n g , " o r " S n o w M a n " ( I just m a d e that last o n e u p ) .
176
Pick a Spot
N o w , p i c k the sunniest, m o s t sheltered s p o t y o u c a n find for y o u r w i n t e r garden. It doesn't have to be in the m a i n g a r d e n ; n e x t to the h o u s e or garage is better, especially if y o u have w h i t e p a i n t e d b r i c k or s t u c c o walls, since t h e y will reflect q u i t e a bit of heat i n t o y o u r m i n i a t u r e g a r d e n . R e m e m b e r that the sun is v e r y l o w in the s k y d u r i n g the winter, a n d the place that m a y have b e e n i n full s u n d u r i n g the s u m m e r could n o w very well be a very shady place in the winter. D o n ' t place the b o x u n d e r the r o o f o r g u t t e r line, o r y o u ' l l risk the c h a n c e that rain, sleet, or s n o w w i l l fall on it. You'll be in g o o d shape if the area is sheltered f r o m strong w i n t e r w i n d s and if it gets a m a x i m u m a m o u n t of w i n t e r s u n l i g h t . It doesn't have to be a p e r m a n e n t s p o t either. First, lay d o w n a sheet of plastic or sturdy w e e d cloth and in the spring y o u can p i c k everything up and return the area b a c k to its former use.
jBtfs* book on gardening I've ever read, wish I'd found it years ago.
Mindy from New fersey
Snuggle Up
Install y o u r winter b o x , fill it w i t h Mel's M i x , and start y o u r planting. S i n c e the plants will g r o w v e r y s l o w l y c o m p a r e d t o spring a n d s u m m e r and since you'll be harvesting every leaf almost as it is ready, y o u can plant y o u r p r o d u c e closer than the usual spacing, even as close as one-half the r e c o m m e n d e d distance.
Insulate
Provide s o m e insulation a r o u n d the w i n t e r b o x , b y b a n k i n g the o u t s i d e w i t h soil or p l a c i n g bales of h a y all a r o u n d . Provide a t i g h t fitting cover or m a k e a double-layer cover w i t h plastic to keep the soil and air from losing heat at night. T h r o w a blanket or tarp on the b o x for those extra cold nights.
Putting Your Garden to Bed

W h e n it is time to p u t the S F G to bed, we do this the same w a y we p u t our children to bed. Y o u wouldn't t h i n k of sending t h e m to their r o o m a n d p a y i n g n o a t t e n t i o n t o t h e m w o u l d y o u ? Instead, w e e n c o u r a g e t h e m t o prepare for b e d t i m e t o b r u s h their teeth, get o n e last drink, fix the b e d just the w a y t h e y w a n t it, a n d t h e n s p e n d s o m e t i m e reading a b e d t i m e story. T h e n it's finally lights o u t . W e l l , treat y o u r garden the same way. D o n ' t leave it a mess w i t h dead plants a n d debris lying about. T i d y it up a n d m a k e it l o o k g o o d . N o w is an excellent t i m e to m i x a little extra c o m p o s t in each b o x a n d s m o o t h a n d level it o u t so it w i l l be all ready for the spring p l a n t i n g . T h a t ' s never h a p p e n e d before w i t h s i n g l e - r o w g a r d e n i n g . N o w it's n o t o n l y possible, b u t also v e r y practical.
Extending the Seasons T h e little extra w o r k y o u d o i n the fall w i l l k e e p y o u r g a r d e n attractive a n d n e a t - l o o k i n g all w i n t e r a n d m a k e y o u r s p r i n g t i m e garden easier to begin. You'll simply go o u t , rake off the m u l c h cover (remember y o u r rototilling neighbor?), and start planting either at the regular time or early.
177
Grids in Winter
Y o u c a n r e m o v e , clean, f o l d , a n d h a n g u p the grids n o w o r leave t h e m o n the b o x e s all w i n t e r , w h i c h w i l l r e m i n d y o u o f h o w m u c h fun y o u have n o w w i t h gardening. W h a t I'm suggesting for the e n d of the season is really no different than w h a t I r e c o m m e n d y o u do all season long. K e e p y o u r garden neat, tidy, a n d attractive. If y o u keep it in tip-top c o n d i t i o n (and that's n o t too difficult w i t h a n o - w o r k garden), y o u will enjoy it so m u c h m o r e .
Take Notes
T h e o n l y t h i n g y o u m i g h t w a n t t o d o i s record i n a n o t e b o o k o r journal s o m e of the highlights of this past y e a r n o t e s for improvements, special varieties of plants, a n d tips for next year.
Decorate for the Holidays

You'll e n j o y S F G m u c h m o r e i f y o u k e e p y o u r g a r d e n neat a n d attractive at all times. Since y o u no longer have to h o e the weeds or dig and cultivate the soil, you'll have t i m e a n d energy for the pleasant things like t r i m m i n g o f f y e l l o w or dead lower leaves, dead blossoms, r e m o v i n g plants, or dead a n d pest-damaged leaves or entire plants. B u t w h a t a b o u t winter? N o t m u c h w o r k t o d o after p u t t i n g the garden to b e d , b u t y o u m i g h t t h i n k a b o u t decorating the garden so it still looks nice all winter l o n g or at least for the holidays.
Thanksgiving
M a k e a nice arrangement in o n e or m o r e boxes of a fall scene, like a stack o f c o r n w i t h p u m p k i n s . S o m e o f t h e b o x e s c o u l d just h a v e a bale or t w o of h a y or straw. M a y b e even a scarecrow in a box. T h o s e boxes c o u l d be covered w i t h cloth (like w h i t e garden floating covers) or old colored sheets tacked or stapled d o w n .
Christmas or Winter
H e r e are s o m e ideas that will m a k e y o u r S F G festive d u r i n g the bleak winter m o n t h s . 1 . M a k e C h r i s t m a s boxes o u t o f y o u r garden boxes b y using old c o l o r e d or striped sheets, a tarp or table c l o t h , or floating garden covers.
178
2 . T h i n k a h e a d w h e n y o u g o t o yard sales o r the thrift s h o p . M a n y covers c o u l d serve d o u b l e d u t y as frost covers in the fall, then decorative covers in the winter. 3 . U s e w i d e , c o l o r f u l r i b b o n , rope, o r c o n t r a s t i n g c o l o r e d strips o f sheets t o tie b o w s o n the boxes. T u c k i n greens a n d p i n e c o n e s , even lights i f y o u c a n get a n e x t e n s i o n c o r d t o the g a r d e n . ( R e m e m b e r now, y o u r g a r d e n n o l o n g e r needs t o b e w a y o u t back; it can be right near y o u r b a c k d o o r where you'll see it m o r e often.) 4 . D e c o r a t e y o u r vertical frames w i t h decorative lights, p i n e branches, pine cones, a n d bird feeders. After C h r i s t m a s , stick a discarded C h r i s t m a s tree in the center of each box, a n d m a k e t h e m into bird feeders, w i t h or w i t h o u t lights. T i e a string f r o m each b o x corner to the treetop for support.
Start Small
T h i s chapter teaches us h o w to extend all the seasons a n d h o w d o i n g that can give us an extra 50 percent of gardening time. H o w exciting! If y o u read t h r o u g h all this a n d felt a little discouraged or glazed-over, don't worry. If y o u h a v e never g r o w n o u t - o f - s e a s o n , a d d just a few features here a n d there as y o u gain m o r e confidence. It can be a really fun challenge to a n y gardenerregardless of experience. As w i t h all n e w g a r d e n i n g projects, m y r e c o m m e n d a t i o n i s t o start small i n order t o g a i n experience, c o n f i d e n c e , a n d p l e a s u r e t h e n e x p a n d . A n d just i n case y o u need m o r e c o n v i n c i n g , r e m e m b e r that A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g eliminates so m a n y gardening tasks so y o u have the time and energy to extend the seasons.
OUT WITH THE OLD

OLD WAY NEW WAY
1. Clean off summer residue 2. Turn over the soil 3. Perform a pH test 4. Add all the humus you can get 5. Add peat moss if no humus 6. Add new 3 to 6 inch layer 7. Dig in manure or leaf mold 8. Add some fertilizer 9. Use a fork, shovel, spade 10. Dig as deep as you can 11. Deeper is better 12. Break up clods, remove stones
Do this daily and it won't accumulate No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary-use trowel No longer necessary No longer necessary No longer necessary
Special Gardens snd Gardeners

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
No Yard
S o m e t i m e s a p r o p e r t y m a y h a v e l i m i t e d space for a garden. If you're in a n o - p r o p e r t y situation, t h i n k creatively a n d closer to y o u r front o r b a c k door. For instance, patios, d e c k s , a n d balconies always have r o o m for a small g a r d e n . A c o r n e r of a p a t i o or b a l c o n y c o u l d c o n t a i n several 2 x 2 - f o o t boxes. T h e s e c o u l d be stacked up creatively at different h e i g h t s to f o r m a v e r y attractive corner garden that w o u l d use less space t h a n a 4 x 4 - f o o t area. T h e boxes c o u l d b e p l a c e d o n l o w tables o f different heights o r o n s o m e t h i n g like m i l k crates or c i n d e r b l o c k s in order to give each o n e a different h e i g h t . If y o u install a vertical frame w i t h n e t t i n g a l o n g b o t h walls or just t a c k the n e t t i n g to the walls, it c o u l d fan o u t so it gets larger as it gets h i g h e r to e x p a n d the g a r d e n area even larger. A n o t h e r o p t i o n , o f course, i s a t the base o f a n d even o n t o p of a b a l c o n y or d e c k railing. Y o u c o u l d install 6- to 1 2 - i n c h w i d e boxes o n the floor o r b o l t e d t o the t o p o f o r h a n g i n g f r o m the railing o n b o t h sides. T h i s w o u l d create a l m o s t a wall o f gardens e n d i n g up in q u i t e a f e w available square feet.
Wooded Yard
I f y o u have a h e a v i l y w o o d e d yard, t h e n y o u don't h a v e t o o m a n y choices. O n e s o l u t i o n i s t o locate several boxes a r o u n d the h o u s e wherever they m i g h t receive e n o u g h sunlight. Y o u r boxes c o u l d be on the g r o u n d or even on legs next to the house. If y o u had a southern exposure w i t h e n o u g h sunlight, y o u c o u l d p u t a double-decker l o n g box against the house. O t h e r than that, the o n l y choice w o u l d be to m a k e a clearing in the w o o d s , b u t that w o u l d have to be a fairly substantial area t o get y o u r S F G boxes o u t o f the shade. I f these suggestions don't w o r k i t ' s shade gardening for y o u .
Hillsides
W h a t if the o n l y space y o u have for a garden is on a hillside or fairly steep slope?
180
Some easy-to-grow annuals include marigold, sunflower, and zinnia.
Special Gardens and Gardeners If its facing south, it m a y be w o r t h w h i l e to develop it for y o u r A l l N e w Square F o o t G a r d e n . T h e l i m i t i n g factors are h o w steep the slope is and h o w b i g y o u r garden is g o i n g to be. You're in l u c k w i t h a S F G because y o u can build boxes that will fit into the lay of the land. Basically, in order to have a level g a r d e n so y o u r soil a n d w a t e r don't r u n off, you're g o i n g to c u t a p a t h i n t o the hillside w i d e e n o u g h to m a k e a g a r d e n area. If y o u w a n t a 4 - f o o t - w i d e b e d , y o u will have to reach in f r o m b o t h sides and that can be t o o m u c h of a stretch f r o m the uphill side. H o w e v e r , w i t h a 3-foot w i d e box, w h i c h will be higher than the d o w n h i l l aisle, y o u will be able to reach in the full 3 feet f r o m the d o w n h i l l side because y o u are standing up rather than kneeling d o w n next to the box. To get a 3-foot w i d e level spot, y o u just cut into the hill and m o v e the soil d o w n h i l l to f o r m the 3-foot w i d e areas. T h i n k ahead a b o u t water availability, time, and the cost to d i g and then level a p a t h w a y w i d e e n o u g h to h o l d b o t h y o u and y o u r garden. T h e steeper the slope, the harder it b e c o m e s .
181
Decks
W h e n creating d e c k gardens in an apartment or c o n d o m i n i u m , be sure t o c o n s i d e r the p e o p l e b e l o w y o u a n d h o w you're g o i n g t o water. Y o u r g a r d e n m a y n o t b e a p r o b l e m w h e n i t rains, b u t w h e n i t i s s u n n y a n d b r i g h t a n d y o u r g a r d e n w a t e r drips d o w n o n the neighbors w h i l e they are at their barbeque below, they m a y n o t l o o k favorably u p o n y o u o r y o u r garden. T h e r e are several things y o u can do a b o u t this situation. First of all, since Mel's M i x holds water so well, it's h i g h l y unlikely y o u will overwater, w h i c h w i l l p r e v e n t a lot of d r i p p i n g or excess w a t e r leakage. Just i n case, t h o u g h , y o u c a n always c h o o s e n o t t o drill drain holes at consistent intervals over the entire b o t t o m of y o u r S F G , but o n l y a couple in o n e corner. T h e n , slightly slope the b o x towards this o n e corner and p u t a decorative vase or other container underneath to catch a n y drips that m a y leak out.
Lt's such a positive thing you're doing, helping people around the world to grow their own food."
Regan from the USA
Railings
A n o t h e r p o p u l a r l o c a t i o n for a garden is on a r a i l i n g p a r t i c u l a r l y on a w o o d e n railing. R a i l i n g b o x e s m a k e a v e r y decorative a n d excellent garden, particularly if y o u i n c l u d e trailing plants that a d d s o m e color a n d character. If y o u have railings that are flat, it is v e r y easy to set a b o x right on t o p of it. For stability, it s h o u l d be b o l t e d d o w n . If y o u can't b o l t y o u r boxes to the railing a n d you're higher than the first floor, I w o u l d place the boxes on the floor. C o n s i d e r the strength a n d size o f y o u r railing a n d the s u r r o u n d i n g e n v i r o n -
182
m e n t t o m a k e sure y o u r railing boxes aren't t o o big. T h e r e are various holders sold a t h o m e i m p r o v e m e n t stores that snap o n t o y o u r railings a n d c a n a c c o m m o d a t e standard-sized boxes. T h e s e boxes c a n h a n g over the outside o r inside o f y o u r railing, d e p e n d i n g o n y o u r preference. O n e advantage o f h a v i n g the b o x h a n g over the o u t s i d e e d g e i s the b o x w o n ' t take u p a n y o f y o u r v a l u a b l e d e c k space. I n a d d i t i o n , s h o u l d i t d r i p w h e n you're w a t e r i n g , the water w i l l bypass the d e c k below. T h e r e is o n e safety c o n c e r n a n d that is a n y t h i n g falling. If y o u r b o x is on the inside of the railing, it doesn't have far to fall a n d w o n ' t h u r t a n y o n e .
Grandparents
O n e of the greatest bonds that I have f o u n d between grandparents and grandchildren is formed d u r i n g a gardening project, even if the visit is short. G i v e y o u r grandchild a garden or just a square, let h i m write his n a m e on the grid, encourage her to plant her garden, and y o u m a y find y o u r grandchildren will keep in t o u c h more often just to find o u t h o w the garden is growing. T h i s , of course, can w o r k just the opposite w a y w h e n the grandparent visits the child's h o m e and they plant a garden there. A n d , of course, there will be great anticipation for the next visit and w h a t has h a p p e n e d in the garden. Selecting plants for children is quite simple; plants should be easy to grow, fast growing for q u i c k results, and s o m e t h i n g that will produce an exciting result.
Gardening for Seniors

S o m e people find it difficult to do hard, m a n u a l labor like d i g g i n g up the existing soil, as well as getting d o w n on the g r o u n d and then getting b a c k up again. W i t h S F G , the simple answer is to just raise the garden up to the gardener's height. It can be a sit-down garden, w h i c h is particularly adaptable for a p e r s o n in a w h e e l c h a i r or s o m e o n e that w a n t s to sit a n d g a r d e n . A little h i g h e r w o u l d be a s t a n d - u p g a r d e n if that makes it easier to t e n d ; since there is v e r y little m a i n t e n a n c e j u s t n u r t u r i n g y o u are n o t standing for l o n g periods of time. A n d the gardens, o n c e they have a p l y w o o d b o t t o m installed, c a n b e m o v e d t o a n y l o c a t i o n for the c o n v e n i e n c e a n d pleasure of the gardener. Y o u can n o w p u t various sizes of boxes on patios, near the p o o l , the b a c k door, or any pleasant area a r o u n d the house that is easy for a senior to a t t e n d to their garden. Of course, there is no l o n g e r the n e e d t o w a l k w a y o u t b a c k c a r r y i n g a b u n c h o f h e a v y - d u t y tools. N o w , it is just a matter of g o i n g to y o u r garden a n d t e n d i n g it w i t h the m i n i m a l a m o u n t of effort, w o r k , a n d tools. T h e r e is no w e e d i n g , a n d because we are starting w i t h a perfect soil mix, there is never any
Special Gardens and Gardeners
183
heavy digging. T h e r e is no need to even have shovels or forks or a n y large tools, just o n e trowel. Sometimes seniors enjoy out-of-season gardening because they have the time to tend their gardens d u r i n g the tricky, out-of-season weather. T h i s also gets t h e m m o v i n g a b o u t o u t of doors m o r e often, w h i c h is another asset.
Wheelchair, sitdown, or standup gardening is now a real possibility. The best support for a tabletop garden is a strong table with four legs, giving all-around access. The less desirable method is the use of sawhorses, which may be sturdy,
Special Needs Gardening

S F G s have g o n e a lot of places over the years. T h e y ' v e been placed on wheels; we k n o w of a veterans hospital where a S F G was built on a g u r n e y a n d w h e e l e d f r o m the r o o f d o w n the service elevator s o i t c o u l d b e taken t o b e d r i d d e n patients. T h e S F G F o u n d a t i o n has taught the blind; I designed a S F G for the H e l e n Keller Institute on L o n g Island w h e r e blind students learned gardening. We have also t a u g h t a t the s c h o o l for the d e a f i n Salt L a k e C i t y , U t a h . O t h e r w o r t h w h i l e places we have installed S F G s are in prisons and troubled y o u t h facilities. B u i l d i n g a small portable garden (in sizes f r o m 2 x 2 u p t o 4 x 4 w i t h a p l y w o o d b o t t o m added) allows people t o participate w h o otherwise m i g h t n o t have been able to garden.
but limit the access. The least desirable method is a table with just a center support, which could be unstable.
184
EVEN FOR SENIOR CITIZENS As we get older, it may become harder to do certain things. With SFG, you'll see another big advantage when you harvest 1 square foot and add that trowel full of compost. There's no heavy digging! You can readily visualize how conventional gardening would become too much work and too much effort, causing someone to give it up. SFG has the advantages of small space, no heavy equipment, and raised boxes; it almost boils down to just planting a few seeds, growing, and caring for them. Gardening then becomes a very simple, easy, and pleasant, task. So you'll never have to stop gardening if you're using the All New Square Foot Garden method.
Gardening in Schools
O n e t h i n g I've learned f r o m teaching S F G over the last thirty years is that kids love to garden. T h e y are so excited a b o u t g r o w i n g plants. F r o m the b e g i n n i n g , it was o b v i o u s that S F G is perfect for t e a c h i n g arithmetic a n d all kinds of m a t h and, that in fact, a n y t h i n g in the
Special Gardens and Gardeners scientific field is easily t a u g h t u s i n g g a r d e n i n g as the vehicle. B u t then I b e g a n to see that a teacher c o u l d readily relate all subjects to gardening. O n e of the best examples of this is a teacher in California n a m e d Sandy. She teaches every subject in the classroom t h r o u g h the class's Square F o o t G a r d e n s . O n e year, the f i n a l project w a s t o h a v e each student w r i t e m e a letter telling m e a b o u t their g a r d e n . T h e y each described w h a t t h e y l i k e d best a n d t h e n d r e w a picture illustrating it. T h e y w e r e l e a r n i n g p e n m a n s h i p , spelling, p r o n u n c i a t i o n , letter writing, and the ability to describe observations a n d feelings. D u r i n g the year, S a n d y c o v e r e d m a n y aspects of science a n d art, as w e l l as e c o n o m i c s , history, l a n g u a g e , c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d the e n v i r o n m e n t a l issues. T h e class p r o d u c e d a p l a y a n d v i d e o a b o u t S F G a n d invited parents a n d the rest o f the s c h o o l t o c o m e learn w i t h t h e m . T h i s , o f course, gave S a n d y the o p p o r t u n i t y t o teach p l a y w r i t i n g , acting, stage presence, c o s t u m e design a n d m a k i n g , advertising, publicity, p r o m o t i o n , a n d so m u c h m o r e . A side benefit is that, in addition to school subjects, the children learned the i m p o r t a n t values of sharing, nurturing, a n d responsibility. We have w o r k e d w i t h all age groups f r o m preschool t h r o u g h high school using gardening as a teaching tool. S u d d e n l y learning begins to have s o m e type of m e a n i n g in their lives, and they can begin to see the value of the subjects they have been learning in the past.
185
A Square Yard in the School Yard

T h e o n l y change in S F G for children is that we m a k e the b o x a little smaller because t h e y can't reach in as far. Instead they g a r d e n in a 3 x 3-foot b o x , w h i c h equals a square yard. As I m e n t i o n e d before, this is h o w we got the n a m e for our school program, "A Square Yard i n the S c h o o l Y a r d . " W e h a v e the d e s c r i p t i o n a n d p h o t o s o f m a n y school programs on our website on the S c h o o l G a r d e n i n g page. A plan needs to be m a d e on w h a t to do w i t h the gardens d u r i n g the s u m m e r vacation period. T h e r e are lots of s o l u t i o n s a l l y o u need to do is brainstorm w i t h the students, and the brainstorming itself becomes another learning experience!
Community Gardens
W i t h S F G , it is possible to have p o c k e t gardens a n y w h e r e in the c o m m u n i t y , even right in a city. It doesn't take an entire e m p t y lot now, and it doesn't have to be a h u g e project to convert space into a c o m m u n i t y garden. It is n o w possible to take just a corner of that lot or any other small s p a c e p e r h a p s even in an existing city p a r k a n d have a very small c o m m u n i t y Square F o o t G a r d e n . E a c h person can have from one 4 x 4-foot b o x up to an area of perhaps 12 x 1 2 , w h i c h
186
w o u l d enable t h e m t o h a v e four o r m o r e boxes. O n e o f the best t h i n g s a b o u t u s i n g S F G in a c o m m u n i t y garden is that since there are n o w e e d s , the g a r d e n doesn't b e c o m e a n o v e r r u n eyesore b y the m i d d l e o f the s u m m e r . T h i s m e a n s i t i s m u c h easier t o operate a n d get p u b l i c a n d official approval. I f y o u w a n t t o start a c o m m u n i t y g a r d e n , I w o u l d e m p h a s i z e the n e e d again to start small, g a i n e x p e r i e n c e , b e c o m e successful, a n d t h e n e x p a n d d u r i n g the s e c o n d season or year. C o m m u n i t y gardens do require a set of guidelines for w h a t participants c a n a n d c a n n o t g r o w s o t h e y don't interfere w i t h their
a
Your method is awesome. My 3-year-old and I have a blast with two4x 6boxes."
-Rich from North Carolina
neighbor's g a r d e n ; the guidelines s h o u l d also cover the h o u r s o f operation, use of water, and maintenance of the gardens so they l o o k neat a n d attractive. T h e use of pesticides a n d fertilizer w a s always a b i g c o n c e r n w i t h c o m m u n i t y gardens, b u t that issue c a n b e totally eliminated w i t h S F G . I n the l a y o u t o f the g a r d e n , i t w o u l d b e nice t o have several tables w h e r e p e o p l e i n w h e e l c h a i r s c o u l d w h e e l right u p t o their assigned g a r d e n p l o t . A l s o , several b e n c h e s a n d s o m e shade are always a g o o d feature.
Group Projects
A S F G c o u l d be a demonstration project for m a n y different groups, i n c l u d i n g children's gardens, scouts, 4 - H ' e r s , M a s t e r G a r d e n e r s , b o t a n i c a l gardens, a n d garden clubs. A g r o u p c o u l d create a salad garden w i t h all the f i x i n g s l e t t u c e , tomatoes, root crops, and edible flowers. E a c h square w o u l d have a nice sign stating w h a t is there and h o w it is used in a salad. A n o t h e r idea w o u l d be an herb display w i t h signs a n d an invitation to t o u c h the plants. T h e nice part a b o u t the idea of using a S F G is it requires so little m a i n t e n a n c e yet p r o d u c e s s u c h a spectacular showcase. It is an easy w a y o f attracting n e w m e m b e r s o r o f p u t t i n g o n a demonstration a t a function. A n o t h e r nice t h i n g a b o u t it is, at the e n d of a fair or show, f o u r p e o p l e c a n p i c k up the g a r d e n , p u t it i n t o a v a n , a n d take it h o m e . In that situation, y o u c a n e v e n i n c l u d e a s h o r t e n e d vertical frame so that it w o u l d still fit in the vehicle and yet w o u l d a d d a third d i m e n s i o n to y o u r display.
Humanitarian Projects
For some, gardening is an enjoyable hobby, but for m a n y it can m e a n the difference between life a n d death. O n e step up f r o m s t a r v i n g the w o r s t c o n d i t i o n i n the w o r l d i s p o v e r t y a n d c o n t i n u a l h u n g e r a n d that's w h e r e S F G c o m e s in. W e can h e l p solve the h u n g e r situation. We have a billion people w h o need help, and the
Special Gardens and Gardeners solution is to teach t h e m h o w to help themselves. T h e y need to be s h o w n h o w and then helped to start just one Square M e t e r G a r d e n of their o w n ; the rest will follow. We teach t h e m to use straight c o m p o s t i n their gardens because o f the l a c k o f peat m o s s a n d v e r m i c u l i t e i n m a n y o f these areas o f the w o r l d ; t h e y c a n create c o m p o s t for free, w h i l e i m p r o v i n g their e n v i r o n m e n t . W e believe that, instead o f our governments and humanitarian organizations sending food, they s h o u l d start e d u c a t i o n a l p r o g r a m s that teach p e o p l e h o w t o c o m p o s t and h o w to create a S F G garden. It w o u l d cost less, produce m o r e , allow p e o p l e to b e c o m e self-sufficient, take v e r y little effort, and yet deliver w o r t h w h i l e results. T h a t is w h y the S F G F o u n d a t i o n is so intent on taking Square Foot G a r d e n i n g w o r l d w i d e w i t h its international counterpart Square M e t e r G a r d e n i n g . We feel it can truly m a k e a difference in the everyday lives of so m a n y millions of people.
187
On My Soapbox
Well, here I a m , on my soapbox trying to solve w o r l d w i d e problems w h e n y o u just w a n t t o learn h o w t o h a v e a better g a r d e n i n y o u r yard. B u t w h a t this b o o k is all a b o u t is h o w S F G can reach a n d help so m a n y m o r e people. That's the significant and imperative message I w a n t to b r i n g to the w o r l d . W i l l y o u h e l p me? Y o u c a n b y e n c o u r a g i n g others t o start a S F G . G e t i n v o l v e d i n y o u r c o m m u n i t y o r stretch y o u r involvement to the entire w o r l d . A n y o n e , anywhere in the w o r l d can n o w have a small square meter garden right at their back door. T h e nutritional value of the children's diet will improve dramatically a n d step-by-step, and as they e x p a n d their garden, that family will be closer to self-sufficiency a n d i n d e p e n d e n c e from g o v e r n m e n t a n d private aid programs. Y o u k n o w the saying, " G i v e a m a n a fish a n d y o u feed h i m for a day. T e a c h a m a n to fish a n d y o u feed h i m for a lifetime." T h e w o r l d hunger p r o b l e m can never be solved until we help people help themselves, step-by-step, square-by-square. T h e n , maybe the saying will be, " S h o w a family h o w to Square M e t e r Garden, and they will feed themselves forever."
Appendix
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Basil and Beyond 189
At A Glance Vegetables
192
At A Glance Herbs & Flowers
193
Plant Profiles
194
Mel's Final Summary
246
Planting Charts
252
Glossary
260
Planting Grids
264
Mel's Mailbox
266
Index
268
Meet Mel Bartholomew
272
Basil and Beyond

A l t h o u g h we associate basil w i t h Italian c o o k i n g , it is an i m p o r t a n t ingredient in A s i a n cuisine t o o . ' S i a m Q u e e n ' is a spicy T h a i basil w i t h an intense flavor a n d fragrance. ' H o l y Basil' is a sacred herb in India w h e r e it is used in religious c e r e m o n i e s a n d p l a n t e d a r o u n d H i n d u temples. I n t r o d u c e d to E u r o p e in the sixteenth c e n t u r y as a culinary and medicinal herb, it m a d e its w a y to E n g l a n d and A m e r i c a in the mid-seventeenth century. Basil is used as the perfect c o m p l e m e n t to s u m m e r tomatoes. For a s u m m e r t i m e treat, c o m b i n e t o m a t o e s , basil, garlic, olive oil, a n d balsamic v i n e g a r in a f o o d processor, spread on crusty bread, a n d sprinkle w i t h Parmesan cheese. Six plants o f ' S w e e t G e n o v e s e ' w i l l y i e l d e n o u g h leaves t o m a k e pesto all year w i t h o u t o v e r d o s i n g on it. A m i x t u r e of basil, garlic, Parmesan cheese, a n d olive oil, pesto is a treat w i t h a distinctive Italian f l a v o r . T r y m a k i n g pesto b r e a d instead o f garlic bread, o r use pesto as an i m a g i n a t i v e s a n d w i c h spread. 2 cups basil leaves 2 cloves garlic V2 cup grated Parmesan cheese 2 tbsp. R o m a n o cheese
l
li c u p pine nuts or walnuts
dash of salt V2 cup olive oil water C o m b i n e basil, garlic, cheeses, nuts, a n d salt in a f o o d processor or blender. W i t h the m a c h i n e r u n n i n g , slowly a d d olive oil. T h i n w i t h a few drops of water until it reaches the consistency of o a t m e a l n o t too t h i c k b u t n o t runny. L e t s t a n d 5 m i n u t e s before serving. Toss with c o o k e d pasta; gemelli and p e n n e h o l d the pesto nicely. For a creamier taste a n d consistency, a d d 3 tablespoons of w h o l e m i l k ricotta cheese. For a c o l o r a n d taste sensation, a d d h c u p of
l
sun-dried t o m a t o e s . To freeze basil for p e s t o , w a s h a n d d r y 2 c u p s of leaves (a salad spinner works well), and c h o p t h e m in a small f o o d processor w i t h
190
/4 c u p olive oil. Scrape the mixture o n t o plastic wrap, fold it u p , a n d
p u t the resulting patty in the freezer. To use, defrost the patty, a n d p u t it in the f o o d processor w i t h all the other ingredients. Just r e m e m b e r that there is already U c u p of olive oil in the patty, so be sure to o n l y
l
use an a d d i t i o n a l /4 c u p to m a k e up the V2 c u p called for in the

1
recipe. S t o c k u p d u r i n g the p e a k g r o w i n g season, a n d use t h e m all year l o n g in the recipe above. Freezing basil in this w a y does no noticeable h a r m to the color or flavor, so y o u can have the taste of an Italian s u m m e r all year round. W h e n planting basil close to tomatoes and peppers, it is t h o u g h t t h e y w i l l all g r o w stronger a n d m o r e f l a v o r f u l , a n d the basil will prevent s o m e of the insects and diseases associated w i t h tomatoes. A layer of basil leaves over a b o w l of tomatoes will repel fruit flies. 'Spicy G l o b e ' d w a r f basil is a beautiful plant. It grows in adorable little balls perfect for a f r o n t - o f - t h e - b o r d e r accent, w i t h the a d d e d attraction of h a v i n g small leaves that are the perfect size for a d d i n g to herbed butters or vinegars. A l t h o u g h c i n n a m o n a n d licorice basil have a delicious scent, they are an acquired taste for s o m e people. T h e flavor of l e m o n basil, on the other h a n d , is an irresistible mixture of sweet and citrus that c o m p l e m e n t s the lighter foods of summer. T r y it in place of parsley w h e n c o o k i n g rice or chicken. Or m a k e a light, sweet pesto w i t h l e m o n basil, olive oil, l e m o n juice, a n d Parmesan cheese to t o p s u m m e r tomatoes, bread, or pasta. 'Sweet D a n i , ' an A l l A m e r i c a Selections w i n n e r in 1 9 9 8 , is as pretty as it is tasty. Regardless of w h a t y o u call it or w h a t y o u r heritage m a y be, if y o u are g o i n g to g r o w o n e h e r b this s u m m e r , basil is the o n e to c h o o s e . A n d i f y o u really m u s t g r o w o n l y o n e variety o f basil, m a k e i t 'Sweet Genovese.'
Growing and Caring for Basil

Start basil f r o m seed outdoors after the last spring frost (basil needs w a r m nights), or indoors a b o u t 4 to 6 weeks before. Or choose plants at y o u r local g a r d e n center, b u t k e e p t h e m sheltered u n t i l that last frost. O n c e h o t w e a t h e r sets in, basil plants will g r o w quickly, b u t t h e y w o n ' t a m o u n t t o m u c h i f t h e y get chilled early i n the season. Basil plants will turn black a n d die at the slightest hint of frost. S o w seeds or set transplants in y o u r S F G or a w i n d o w b o x in full sun a n d keep well watered t h r o u g h o u t the g r o w i n g season. P i n c h off flower b u d s to save the plant's energy for leaf g r o w t h . A l s o p i n c h o u t g r o w i n g tips to keep the plants bushy. To harvest basil, cut w h o l e stems just above a pair of lower leaves. T h e plant will g r o w n e w stems from that point. O n l y the leaves are used in fresh or frozen recipes; the stems go to the m u l c h pile.
Basil and Beyond To d r y basil, h a n g entire stems upside d o w n o u t of direct sunlight. R e m o v e the dried leaves f r o m the stems a n d store in an airtight container. C r u s h dried leaves i n t o y o u r favorite sauces for a subtle basil flavor. N o w let's talk a b o u t s o m e other plants.
191
192
Basil and Beyond
193
*In some parts of the country and under certain weather conditions, these can be grown in this season. N/A = Not advised to store seed.
194
Asparagus
Description
Fresh, tender asparagus spears f r o m the spring garden have no rival in the s u p e r m a r k e t a n d can be easily g r o w n in a Square F o o t G a r d e n . Because it is a perennial a n d takes a c o u p l e of years before the first harvest, p r o d u c i n g o n l y o n e crop a year, we suggest y o u p l a n t an entire 4' x 4' b o x o n l y in asparagus. T h e plants get very b u s h y t h r o u g h o u t the s u m m e r a n d need quite a bit of r o o m to spread o u t so leave g o o d aisle space a r o u n d it. W h e n y o u invest in an asparagus plant, consider the location very carefully, as it can last for up to 20 years.
Starting Location: Full sun.
Seeds Indoors:
l
10 to 1 2 weeks before last spring frost. Soak seeds overnight and plant at least
/2 inch deep. plant seeds that have been soaked in water
Transplanting: 2 to 4 weeks before last spring frost. Seeds Outdoors: 2 to A weeks before the last spring frost,
overnight in a hole between h and 1 inch deep.
x
Traditionally, y o u b u y and plant 2-year-old roots, one per square foot. B u t I've f o u n d that if y o u can afford to b u y e n o u g h of the roots, four per square foot will produce a m u c h bigger crop earlier. T h e c o n v e n t i o n a l w a y o f p l a n t i n g asparagus i s t o p u t a b o u t 3 inches o f y o u r Mel's M i x d o w n , m a r k y o u r spacing (either the one or four per square foot), m a k e little m o u n d s at the plant location, a n d t h e n drape the roots (purchased at the nursery or t h r o u g h mail order) over each o n e of those little m o u n d s . T h e n p o u r in the rest of the Mel's M i x (about 3 m o r e inches, to total 6 inches deep), w h i c h covers the roots an i n c h or t w o . If y o u have lots of time but little money, raise y o u r o w n transplants from seed. It takes an extra year or t w o , but costs peanuts.
Growing
Watering: Weekly, m o r e in the summer. Maintenance: C u t the foliage to the g r o u n d
in fall as it turns y e l l o w a n d before the berries ripen.
Asparagus self-sows readily, often w i t h less than perfect results.
Basil and Beyond
195
Harvesting
How: C u t the largest asparagus shoots at the surface of the soil w i t h a sharp serrated knife, m a k i n g a slanting cut.
When: Harvest
asparagus in late spring, w h e n the shoots are 4 to 6 inches tall, for a b o u t 6 weeks.
Spears taller than 6 inches can be t o u g h . H a r v e s t f r o m m a t u r e plants only: don't harvest from first-year plants, and only sparingly, say one or t w o shoots per plant, the second year. Three-yearold plants are considered mature.
Preparing and Using

Asparagus is best used as fresh as possible, but it can be stored for a couple of days in the refrigerator, standing on end on a w e t pad or in a jar of cold water. Asparagus can be eaten raw, steamed, boiled, grilled, roasted, or c o o k e d in casseroles and salads. Tall narrow asparagus kettles are designed to c o o k the spears upright, immersing the stems while the tender heads steam. C o o k asparagus briefly as it can b e c o m e m u s h y if overcooked.
Problems
Slugs, asparagus beetle, rust, Fusarium root rot.
Hints and Tips

After the spring harvest, the r e m a i n i n g shoots g r o w i n t o a large, lacy plant in the garden, a n d the fronds are lovely to use as filler in flower b o u q u e t s . M a l e plants are the m o s t desirable as they are the m o s t p r o d u c t i v e a n d do n o t set seed.
196
Description
Prolific a n d easy to grow, b e a n s w h e t h e r of the b u s h or p o l e v a r i e t y a r e a terrific c r o p for a n y garden. A lot of gardeners t h i n k that pole beans have better flavor, w h i l e the b u s h types taste m o r e like "green beans." B u s h beans g r o w lower to the ground; each plant yields o n e large crop all at once, w i t h a smaller c r o p a few w e e k s later. Pole beans, w h i c h are g r o w n on a vertical frame, take l o n g e r to grow, b u t p r o v i d e a steady c o n t i n u o u s y i e l d all season l o n g . A single p l a n t i n g of p o l e types is a d e q u a t e , w h i l e a d d i t i o n a l plantings of the b u s h types are n e e d e d to have a c o n s t a n t harvest.
Starting
Location: Full sun. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: Presoak seeds thirty minutes for faster sprouting. W a t e r soil and cover square w i t h a chicken-wire cage to keep o u t birds. Seeds sprout in 5 to 10 days; remove cage after t w o weeks. For a c o n t i n u o u s harvest of bush beans, plant a n e w square of a different color or variety every 2 weeks all s u m m e r long.
Growing
Watering: Beans m u s t have regular waterings. Do n o t allow the soil to d r y out, b u t keep the leaves dry. Maintenance: W e e d w e e k l y if y o u see a n y weeds sprouting.
Harvesting
How: Break or cut each stem h o l d i n g the bean p o d (there's no h a r m d o n e if the bean breaks a n d part o f the p o d stays o n the vine). D o n o t pull o n the plant w h e n harvesting. When: P i c k beans w h e n they are still small a n d tender. Do n o t allow t h e m to get so large that p o d s bulge w i t h seeds; the plant will stop p r o d u c i n g a n d the best flavor is past.
Preparing and Using

W a s h a n d refrigerate if n o t using immediately. Beans do n o t store well, so try to use t h e m the same day they are picked. In the old days, beans were called string beans a n d the string had to be pulled o f f before c o o k i n g . N e w e r varietiescalled snap b e a n s o n l y f o r m strings if y o u let t h e m get too t o u g h and large. Beans contain lots of vitamins A, B, a n d C, as well as calcium a n d iron. T h e r e are p r o b a b l y as m a n y w a y s to prepare a n d serve beans as there are varieties in the seed catalogs. Beans are g o o d eaten r a w w h e n t h e y are s m a l l r e m e m b e r , the smaller the b e a n , the m o r e tender it will be. R a w beans can be served w h o l e w i t h a d i p or cut into pieces for addition to a salad. C o o k a n y size b e a n . T h e y c a n b e s t e a m e d , b o i l e d , o r stir-fried, t h e n served i n d i v i d u a l l y w i t h a little seasoning, g r a t e d cheese, or parsley. Beans are excellent a d d i t i o n s to s o u p s , stews, or m i x e d vegetable dishes. Leftovers are easily m a r i n a t e d for a d d i t i o n to a salad or use as a relish; I've even heard o f p e o p l e a d d i n g m a r i n a t e d beans t o a s a n d w i c h , a l o n g w i t h lettuce, t o m a t o , a n d cheese! H o w does that s o u n d ?
Problems
A p h i d s , Japanese a n d M e x i c a n b e a n beetles, birds, rabbits, w o o d c h u c k s , a n d deer; b l i g h t , rust a n d m i l d e w . S o u n d s like a lot b u t t h e y are still w o r t h w h i l e .
Basil and Beyond
197
Hints and Tips

If your square of bush beans gets floppy and starts spreading over adjacent squares, just run a string around them as a g r o u p to keep t h e m in their square. It won't h a r m the harvest.
Description Beets are a w o n d e r f u l vegetable to g r o w because they're easy and b o t h the roots and the greens (tops) are suitable for eating. T h e y are m o s t l y pest- a n d disease-free a n d resistant to b o t h fall and spring frosts. T h e root gets very hard w h e n g r o w n in the h o t s u m m e r season. Starting
Location: Partial shade or full sun. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: E a c h seed in the packet
is actually a cluster o f t w o to five individual seeds, so several

l
sprouts will c o m e up f r o m each seed p l a n t e d . Plant o n e p r e s o a k e d seed in each space li inch deep three w e e k s before the last spring frost. To have a c o n t i n u o u s harvest, p l a n t a n e w square every three w e e k s except in the hottest part of the s u m m e r . A f t e r the sprouts are a b o u t 1 i n c h tall, c u t o f f all e x c e p t the strongest p l a n t f r o m each seed cluster. Growing
Watering: Plants need constant and even moisture. Maintenance: K e e p

Harvesting How: Pull up the entire plant w i t h the largest top. If you're n o t sure of bulb size, dig around the root with your fingers to uncover the top to c h e c k the size. To harvest greens, individual leaves can be cut at any time, but don't take m o r e than one or t w o from each plant. When: R o o t s are the m o s t tender w h e n h a l f size, so start p u l l i n g w h e n the roots are approximately the size of a P i n g - P o n g ball and c o n t i n u e until they are full size. Leaves are usable at any size. d a m a g e d leaves picked off, m u l c h in h o t weather, and w e e d weekly.
198
Preparing and Using

Use greens w h o l e or c h o p p e d in fresh salads, or c o o k them like spinach. Roots are rich in iron and v i t a m i n B. Serve h o t b o i l e d or s t e a m e d . M a r i n a t e leftovers for a salad or relish. T r y s a u t e i n g shredded raw beets quickly and serve hot, or try t h e m c o o k e d and chilled (shredded, sliced, or diced) in salads or m i x e d w i t h cottage cheese. Small w h o l e beets can also be c o o k e d and served w i t h an orange sauce, salad dressing, or a spoonful of sour cream.
Problems
C u t w o r m s , slugs and snails, leaf miners, rabbits, w o o d c h u c k s , and deer. Relatively disease-free.
Hints and Tips

T r y a square each of several varieties for different tastes, texture, and colors.
Broccoli
Description
Broccoli requires cool weather b u t is great in a Square Foot G a r d e n . It is very frost hardy and grows well in the spring and fall; it doesn't do well in the s u m m e r heat.
Starting
Location: N e e d s full sun. Seeds Indoors: Plant 5 to
10 seeds in a c u p o f vermiculite, or place o n e seed ' A i n c h d e e p in p o t t i n g
soil in each i n d i v i d u a l c o m p a r t m e n t of a seedling tray, a p p r o x i m a t e l y 12 w e e k s before y o u r last spring frost. Seed will s p r o u t i n d o o r s in 5 to 10 days at 70F. K e e p seed w a r m (70F) until s p r o u t e d ; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as the first shoots appear.
Transplanting: Plant outside approximately five weeks before the last spring frost. Seeds Outdoors: N o t satisfactory, as the season is too short before h o t weather arrives.
Basil and Beyond
199
Growing
Watering: L i k e all m e m b e r s of the c a b b a g e family, you're g r o w i n g leaves a n d flowers, w h i c h n e e d consistent moisture. N e v e r let broccoli d r y o u t or wilt. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; m u l c h in w a r m e r weather.
Harvesting
How: C u t o f f the m a i n central h e a d at its base w i t h a sharp, serrated k n i f e or clippers, leaving as m a n y leaves on the plant as possible. W i t h i n a few weeks, n e w side-shoots (miniature heads) will form and g r o w f r o m the original plant to provide y o u w i t h a second harvest. When: Harvest as s o o n as a h e a d appears full a n d tight. T h e h e a d is actually a flower head, w h i c h y o u w a n t t o harvest before the f l o w e r b u d s o p e n . I f y o u h a v e several plants, don't w a i t t o o l o n g to c u t the first o n e after the heads start f o r m i n g , even if it l o o k s a little small. It's still edible w h e n it's small.
Preparing and Using

Broccoli contains v i t a m i n s A , B , a n d C , a s w e l l a s c a l c i u m , p h o s p h o r u s , a n d iron. W a s h u n d e r running water and soak in c o l d salted water for t w o hours if there's any chance that a green cabbage w o r m is present in the head. Refrigerate if you're n o t using immediately. Broccoli can be served fresh a n d raw w i t h m a y o n n a i s e , o r a n y d i p , o r can b e c h o p p e d fresh i n t o a salad. T o c o o k it, y o u can steam, boil, or stir-fry. T r y it p l a i n w i t h just a little dressing, sour c r e a m , or t o p p e d w i t h a cheese sauce. C o o k e d leftovers can be marinated for addition to salads or relishes. It's an excellent addition to any stir-fried dish; m i x it w i t h interesting c o m b i n a t i o n s of meats a n d vegetables.
Problems
C u t w o r m s , root maggots, green w o r m s , and cabbage w o r m s ; club root.
Hints and Tips

After y o u c u t the m a i n stalk, don't r e m o v e the plant, as n e w smaller heads w i l l f o r m for a s e c o n d harvest. S o m e claim the smaller side-shoots are even m o r e flavorful than the central head.
200
Cabbage
Description
C a b b a g e is a very easy vegetable to grow: it's frost hardy and takes very little w o r k . C a b b a g e c o m e s in a variety of shapes, sizes, colors, a n d leaf textures, and can be g r o w n as an early- to late-season crop; the early-season variety is smaller and faster growing, while the late- or long-season variety is usually bigger. All varieties grow best in cool spring or fall weather.
Seeds Indoors:
Plant o n e seed '/4 i n c h d e e p in p o t t i n g soil in individual c o m p a r t m e n t s o f a seedling
tray 12 w e e k s before y o u r last spring frost. Seeds s p r o u t in 5 to 8 days at 70F. For a s e c o n d c r o p in the fall, repeat the process a n y t i m e in the m i d d l e of June (or b a c k up 16 w e e k s f r o m y o u r first fall frost date). In m o s t places y o u can usually start seeds of a n e w c r o p as s o o n as y o u ' v e harvested y o u r spring c r o p . K e e p w a r m (70F) until s p r o u t e d ; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as first shoots appear.
Transplanting:
D o n ' t let transplants get too large before planting t h e m outside. Late transplants d o not season is t o o short to plant seeds directly in the garden for the spring c r o p , a n d
form g o o d heads, and sometimes flower the first year if allowed to get too large.
Seeds Outdoors: T h e
starting the fall c r o p f r o m seed o u t d o o r s w o u l d tie up t o o m u c h valuable garden space that c o u l d be used m o r e productively. Start all seeds in individual containers for transplanting into the garden.
Crowing
Watering:
C a b b a g e needs lots o f water to head u p properly, but after the head is formed and while it is w e e k l y ; c u t a w a y a n y extra-large b o t t o m leaves if they are yellow. If large lower
g r o w i n g to full size, cut back on watering or the head will grow too fast and split.
Maintenance:^?:^
hurt the plant.
leaves are spreading to other squares, cut away any portions that are "over the line." T h i s will not
Harvesting
How: C u t off the entire head w i t h a sharp, serrated knife or clippers.
Basil and Beyond
201
When:
A n y t i m e the head starts to develop and feels firm. If y o u have several plants, don't wait until all
the heads are large. T h e y m a y split in h o t weather and go to seed, and you'll be left with nothing.
Preparing and Using

C a b b a g e is delicious c o o k e d or raw and contains a lot of vitamin C.
Problems
Slugs and snails, aphids, and cabbage w o r m s (their worst e n e m y ) .
Hints and Tips

C o v e r cabbages w i t h a b o n n e t of insect n e t t i n g or floating cover to k e e p o u t the cabbage m o t h . Otherwise, w a t c h for eaten leaves and then p i c k the green cabbage w o r m s off by hand.
Carrot
Description
Carrots are related to the wildflower Q u e e n A n n e ' s lace. T h e seeds are so small that planting t h e m can be very tedious; practice d r o p p i n g a p i n c h (2 or 3 seeds) on s o m e w h i t e paper until y o u get the hang of it. Carrots can be either l o n g and thin or short and stubby; p i c k the shape and size that best suits your garden. T h e r e is n o t h i n g m o r e exciting for kids (including kids my age) than pulling up a carrot they planted m o n t h s ago! It's sort of like fishingyou don't k n o w h o w big it is until y o u see it, but y o u hope it's a whopper.
Starting
Location: Full sun, but can stand partial shade. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s not transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts in t w o to three w e e k s
o u t d o o r s . Seeds are v e r y small; try pelleted seeds if
necessary. Plant t w o or three seeds in each of the 16 spaces in a square. Water soil and cover the square w i t h a plastic-covered cage. K e e p the g r o u n d m o i s t at all times, even if it means daily spraving in s u n n y weather.
202
Growing Watering: C a r r o t s m u s t have c o n s t a n t m o i s t u r e until they're a l m o s t m a t u r e to g r o w q u i c k l y a n d

c o n t i n u o u s l y . T h e n reduce w a t e r i n g s o the carrots don't crack f r o m overly rapid g r o w t h .
Maintenance: W e e d weekly; otherwise carrots are relatively work-free. Harvesting

How: Pull up those w i t h the largest tops. If you're n o t sure w h i c h are biggest, dig around the plant w i t h y o u r fingers to test the size.
When: P i c k t h e m early, w h e n they're o n l y half size and at their sweetest and most tender. Preparing and Using
S c r u b w i t h a vegetable b r u s h , b u t don't peel t h e m . M o s t of the v i t a m i n s are in the skin or close to the surface. R i c h in v i t a m i n A a n d t h i a m i n e (vitamin B i ) , carrots also c o n t a i n c a l c i u m . C a r r o t s are delicious fresh and r a w s h r e d d e d , sliced thinly, or cut into sticks for snacking. T h e y can be c o o k e d by s t e a m i n g or b o i l i n g . T h e y can be served in a variety of dishes, or a d d e d to soups a n d stews, b u t s e e m best w h e n served w i t h a dressing, a d a b of sour c r e a m , or sprinkled w i t h parsley a n d grated cheese. C a r r o t s are so versatile y o u c a n even m a k e a w o n d e r f u l l y m o i s t cake w i t h t h e m .
Problems
C a r r o t rust fly, rabbits, w o o d c h u c k s , deer, and voles. Virtually disease-free.
Hints and Tips

T h e l o n g and thin ones can be g r o w n in y o u r S F G w i t h the addition of a high-rise b o x (see C h a p t e r 4 ) . For a late w i n t e r harvest, m u l c h heavily to k e e p the g r o u n d f r o m freezing to protect y o u r fallplanted carrots.
Cauliflower
Basil and Beyond
203
Description
Even t h o u g h cauliflower is a m e m b e r of the c a b b a g e family, it is n o t as c o l d h a r d y a n d is m o r e susceptible to the heat. Fall is the best season for p l a n t i n g because the p l a n t will m a t u r e in the cool weather. W h i t e cauliflower is the m o s t p o p u l a r variety b u t the p u r p l e o n e is c o n s i d e r e d to b e m o r e f l a v o r f u l a n d does better i n the heat. T h e w h i t e variety needs 1 4 t o 1 5 w e e k s t o m a t u r e w h i l e the purple variety c a n take up to 19 w e e k s .
Starting
Location: Full sun, b u t will tolerate partial shade. Seeds Lndoors:Wi\\ s p r o u t in 5 to 10 days at 70F. Plant 5 to 10 seeds in a c u p of v e r m i c u l i t e , or plant o n e seed U i n c h d e e p in p o t t i n g soil in i n d i v i d u a l c o m p a r t m e n t s of a seedling flat ten
l
w e e k s before the last s p r i n g frost. For a s e c o n d c r o p in the fall, repeat the process a n y t i m e f r o m June 15 to July 1. K e e p w a r m (70F) u n t i l s p r o u t e d ; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as first shoots appear. Transplanting: Set o u t in the g a r d e n four w e e k s before t h e last s p r i n g frost. Place a c u t w o r m collar a r o u n d the stem, water, a n d p r o v i d e a shade cage. Be extra careful w h e n p l a n t i n g ; cauliflower suffers m o r e f r o m t r a n s p l a n t i n g t h a n a n y o t h e r c a b b a g e f a m i l y m e m b e r . Seeds Outdoors: N o t satisfactory; season is too short before h o t weather arrives.
Growing
Watering: N e v e r let plants d r y out. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; m u l c h in h o t weather.
Harvesting
How: C u t off the entire head at its base w i t h a sharp knife or clippers. When: Harvest as s o o n as the h e a d enlarges, is firm, a n d has a nice w h i t e color, before the b u d s separate or o p e n . Do n o t delay harvest, as the h e a d w i l l g r o w fast a n d pass the ideal harvest p o i n t in just a f e w days.
Preparing and Using

Serve florets fresh and raw w i d i any salad dressing or dip. C h o p p e d cauliflower is excellent in tossed salads. C o o k by steaming, boiling, or stir-frying. Serve h o t w i t h cheese sauce, salad dressing, or just sprinkled w i t h grated cheese. It makes a marvelous addition to any s o u p or stew; cauliflower soup is superb and quite unusual. Marinate any leftovers for addition to salads or relishes.
Problems
C u t w o r m s , root maggots, occasionally cabbage w o r m s , and cabbage loopers; club root.
Hints and Tips

For w h i t e varieties that are n o t s e l f - b l a n c h i n g , b e n d or break large leaves over the t o p w h e n heads start to form. T h e n tie or h o l d w i t h a rubber b a n d to cover and protect the head from exposure to the sun, w h i c h can turn the head yellow.
204
Chard, S w i s s
Description
Swiss chard is k n o w n best for its v i t a m i n - r i c h leaves a n d its s u c c u l e n t stems. It's o n e of the easiest vegetables to g r o w in a n y part of the country, a n d c a n be g r o w n in the sun or shade, all spring, s u m m e r , a n d fall for a c o n t i n u o u s harvest. In m o s t climates it c a n even be carried over the winter. C h a r d is available in white- or red-stemmed varieties and is also available in m a n y rainbow colors. It can have either s m o o t h or crinkled leaves, whichever y o u like; try both! It is also virtually pest- and disease-free.
Starting
Location: D o e s best in full sun, b u t can g r o w in partial shade. Seeds Indoors: Plant 10 seeds in a c u p o f vermiculite, or place
one seed lli inch deep in potting soil in
individual c o m p a r t m e n t s of a seedling tray 7 weeks before y o u r last spring frost. Seeds will sprout in 5 to 10 days at 70F. K e e p w a r m (70F) until sprouted; m o v e to full sunlight as s o o n as first shoots appear.
Transplanting: Plant
into the garden three weeks before the last spring frost. Water and cover w i t h a presoaked seeds V2 inch deep in each square three weeks before y o u r last spring
plastic-covered cage.
Seeds Outdoors: Plant
frost. Seeds sprout o u t d o o r s in t w o to three weeks. Water and cover w i t h a plastic-covered cage.
Growing
Watering:
Weekly, or twice w e e k l y in h o t weather. Like all leaf crops, Swiss chard needs lots o f water W e e d weekly; cut o f f any yellow or overgrown outer leaves.
for luxurious leaf g r o w t h .
Maintenance:
Harvesting
How: Carefully cut off each outer stem at the plant base w i t h a sharp knife w h e n the leaves are 6 to 9 inches tall. T h e smaller inner leaves will continue to grow.
When:
Start harvesting w h e n the outer leaves are a b o u t 6 to 9 inches tall (approximately eight weeks
after planting seeds), and c o n t i n u e harvesting outer leaves (stalk and all) every w e e k or so. Don't let outer leaves get t o o large before harvesting.
Basil and Beyond
205
Preparing and Using

Both leaves and stems are edible; leaves are very rich in vitamins A a n d C, calcium, and iron. T h e stalks can be c o o k e d and served like asparagus; the leaves are used fresh or c o o k e d , and are similar to, but milder in taste than, spinach. After harvest, rinse and pat dry like lettuce or spinach; refrigerate if not using immediately. C u t out the central stalk a n d use the leaves as fresh greens for salads, or boil or steam as y o u w o u l d spinach. A d d freshly c h o p p e d greens to a n y appropriate s o u p for a garden-fresh taste. C h o p the central stem or stalk into convenient-size pieces a n d boil or steam like asparagus or celery. Serve w i t h your favorite salad dressing, covered w i t h bread crumbs, or grated cheese. Marinate leftover stalks overnight for a salad or appetizers.
Problems
Slugs a n d snails, c u t w o r m s , a n d leaf m i n e r s ; occasionally rabbits, w o o d c h u c k s , a n d deer. Free of most diseases.
Hints and Tips

Harvest the outer leaves continuously. Plant a square each of all the colors a n d get o u t y o u r camera for great ground-level shots. Swiss chard will survive several frosts even if it's u n p r o t e c t e d , a l l o w i n g a fall harvest. If m u l c h e d w i t h loose hay it can be harvested into the winter in most climates. W i t h a complete m u l c h cover, it will also winter over and resprout the second year for a very early spring harvest. Gradually remove the m u l c h in early spring and be rewarded by the first fresh greens from y o u r garden. Plants will only produce a crop in early spring the second year; later they will go to seed, so start n e w plants every year.
Corn
Description
C o r n is a l o n g - t i m e favorite of m o s t gardeners. T h e taste of s t o r e - b o u g h t corn can't c o m p e t e w i t h h o m e g r o w n corn, so m a n y plant a w h o l e 4' x 4' S F G of just corn. M o s t of the varieties for h o m e use are planted 4 per square foot; o n l y one crop can be g r o w n per season because it needs a l o n g time to mature and lots of hot weather.
206
T h e r e m a n y colors and varieties of corn. T h e later season types taste better than the earlier season varieties; the "extra sweet" variety is u n u s u a l l y g o o d a n d keeps its sweetness even after p i c k i n g . T h e m o s t c o m m o n color of corn is yellow, b u t the best tasting are the bicolor and w h i t e varieties. As n e w varieties o f c o r n are d e v e l o p e d , c h e c k w i t h the seed c o m p a n i e s for the latest r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s o n h o w far apart to plant various types of corn so they don't cross-pollinate.
Starting
Location: Full sun; locate corn where it won't shade other crops because it gets so tall. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well. Seeds Outdoors:Sprouts in 5 to 10 days o u t d o o r s . P l a n t y o u r p r e s o a k e d seeds 1 to 2 inches d e e p , d e p e n d i n g on the weather, at the p r o p e r s p a c i n g . W a t e r the soil a n d cover w i t h a c h i c k e n w i r e cage to k e e p o u t birds. To get a c o n t i n u o u s harvest, p l a n t a n e w c r o p every t w o w e e k s w i t h several varieties o f different m a t u r a t i o n dates.
Growing
Watering: Weekly, m o r e in the h o t weather. Maintenance: Weed w e e k l y ; r e m o v e the c h i c k e n - w i r e cage w h e n the c o r n is 6 inches tall. Place a r a c c o o n - p r o o f fence a r o u n d y o u r squares w h e n the ears are starting to f o r m .
Harvesting
How: U s e t w o hands to h a r v e s t o n e to h o l d the stalk a n d the other to pull d o w n and break off the ear-otherwise y o u m a y break the stalk. If there are no other ears left on that stalk it's best to cut it d o w n to the g r o u n d . D o n ' t pull it o u t or y o u m a y disturb the roots of the s u r r o u n d i n g stalks. When: C h e c k the ears daily w h e n the silk first b r o w n s a n d the ears feel full a n d slightly b u m p y . T h e final test of each ear before harvesting is to peel a w a y a small strip of the h u s k to expose the kernels. T h e y s h o u l d be p l u m p a n d full. To see if the ear is ready, p u n c t u r e a kernel w i t h y o u r t h u m b n a i l . If m i l k y juice squirts o u t , it's ready; if the juice is clear, the c o r n is n o t quite ready to p i c k .
Preparing and Using

C o r n loses its sweet taste very q u i c k l y after b e i n g picked, so try to c o o k a n d eat it as s o o n as possible. If y o u can't use it immediately, husk a n d refrigerate it. Up to 50 percent of the flavor is lost in the first 12 hours of storage, m o r e if it's n o t refrigerated. If y o u harvest m o r e than y o u eat, cut the kernels off the c o b a n d freeze t h e m , a d d to a relish dish, or serve w a r m w i t h butter and parsley. Of course, corn is excellent a d d e d to a n y k i n d of s o u p or stew.
Problems
C o r n has m o r e p r o b l e m s t h a n a n y o t h e r g a r d e n c r o p , i n c l u d i n g c o r n borer, ear w o r m , birds, r a c c o o n s , a n d squirrels. T h e r e are relatively f e w diseases that b o t h e r the h o m e gardener.
Hints and Tips

C h a p t e r 4 has s o m e great tips on h o w to keep the critters o u t of y o u r corn patch. Since y o u r Mel's M i x stays so loose a n d friable, protect corn f r o m b l o w i n g over in late s u m m e r storms w i t h the s i m p l e a d d i t i o n of steel fence posts a n d a little t o m a t o n y l o n netting. D r i v e a p o s t
Basil and Beyond
207
in each corner of y o u r 4' x 4' garden and then stretch a 4' x 4' piece of netting between the 4 posts, about 3 feet o f f the g r o u n d . T h e plants will easily g r o w right up t h r o u g h the netting, w h i c h will support them w i t h o u t any extra w o r k on y o u r part.
Cucumber
Description
T h e c u c u m b e r is a g a r d e n favorite, a n d is v e r y easy to g r o w in w a r m weather. A l t h o u g h b o t h v i n e and bush varieties are available, b u s h c u c u m b e r s take a lot of r o o m a n d don't p r o d u c e like the v i n e types. Use the vertical m e t h o d to g r o w y o u r vine c u c u m b e r s . T h e r e are m a n y varieties r a n g i n g in size, shape, a n d use, i n c l u d i n g ones for p i c k l i n g or serving raw. T h e pickling varieties are p i c k e d m u c h earlier w h e n they are s m a l l e r j u s t the right size for the pickle j a r b u t they can also be eaten. T h e slicing types are g r o w n larger a n d are m o r e c o m m o n l y used for salads or s a n d w i c h e s .
Starting
Location: Full sun, although Seeds Indoors: Sprouts in 4
the vine types will toletate some shade. to 8 days at 7 0 F ; will sprout even faster at 80F. Plant o n e seed in
individual paper cups f i l l e d w i t h Mel's M i x . P u n c h holes i n the b o t t o m for drainage. K e e p w a r m (at least 7 0 F ) until s p r o u t e d ; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as the first shoots appear.
Transplanting:
Plant the c u p and all in the g r o u n d at the proper plant spacing. I f the c u p is w a x e d
cardboard or a heavy paper, tear away the b o t t o m carefully; avoid disturbing the roots. Water and cover w i t h a shade cage.
Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts
in five to ten days; place presoaked seeds at proper spacing, water, and keep
soil moist until seeds sprout.
Growing
Watering: Weekly;
twice w e e k l y in h o t weather. N e v e r let the soil d r y out. A v o i d w e t t i n g the leaves, as
this spreads any fungus disease that m a y be present. C u c u m b e r s have the highest water c o n t e n t of any vegetable, so plenty of moisture is required for proper g r o w t h .
Maintenance: W e e d weekly;
keep vines o n the trellis; w a t c h o u t for beetles; m u l c h in h o t weather.
208
Harvesting
How: C u t (don't pull) the stem c o n n e c t i n g the fruit to the vine.
When:
Harvest continually! N e v e r allow any c u c u m b e r s to b e c o m e yellow or overly large, or the plant
will stop producing. K e e p picking even if y o u have to toss s o m e on the c o m p o s t pile because y o u can't use them. Don't try the old practice of eating the large cukes and leaving the smaller ones on the vine, because in o n l y o n e or t w o days the little ones will be big. Instead, c o m p o s t the v e r y large c u c u m b e r s a n d eat the smaller ones.
Preparing and Using

W a s h and scrub w i t h a vegetable brush. Serve long, slender burpless varieties w i t h the skins left on. Peel the fatter varieties before slicing, c u b i n g , or c u t t i n g into l o n g sticks. Serve fresh, sliced on sandwiches w i t h o n i o n s a n d m a y o n n a i s e , o r m a r i n a t e for relish. M a n y gardeners like c u c u m b e r s simply soaked in vinegar overnight and served w i t h lots of pepper. T h e y also go well in any salad or arranged around a spoonful of cottage cheese.
Problems
C u c u m b e r beetles; mildew, wilt, and mosaic.
Hints and Tips

Don't let the fruit get too large; pick early and often. Try some of the long, thin varieties for a fun crop.
Eggplant
Description
E g g p l a n t is a n i c e - l o o k i n g p l a n t w i t h fruit that c o m e s in a w i d e variety of colors a n d shapes; m o s t types yield a rather large, e g g - s h a p e d fruit that is b l a c k to purple. H o w e v e r , s o m e of the n e w e r varieties are yellow, b r o w n , or w h i t e and are smaller and rounder. Eggplant yields a very large harvest a n d are used in m a n y different styles of c o o k i n g . T h e y are easily g r o w n , b u t take a l o n g t i m e to m a t u r e s o y o u need to start plants i n d o o r s in early spring or b u y transplants locally.
Basil and Beyond
209
Starting
Location: Full sun and lots of heat; p i c k y o u r sunniest spot for eggplant. Seeds Indoors: Sprouts in 12 days at 70F, b u t o n l y requires 6 days at 85F; won't sprout below 65F. Sprinkle 5 to 10 seeds lA i n c h d e e p in a c u p filled w i t h v e r m i c u l i t e 7 w e e k s before y o u r last
l
spring frost. K e e p w a r m (at least 7 0 F ) u n t i l sprouted; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as first shoots appear; t h e n p o t up in seedling trays as s o o n as plants are large e n o u g h (usually o n e to three w e e k s ) . K e e p a careful w a t c h over the plants, especially after t r a n s p l a n t i n g t h e m into seedling trays, because a n y pause or s t o p p a g e of the g r o w t h will affect the u l t i m a t e bearing capacity o f the p l a n t . Transplanting: Plant into the garden t w o weeks after the last spring frost; disturb the roots as little as possible. W a t e r a n d cover w i t h a shade cage. Since e g g p l a n t is so v u l n e r a b l e to c o l d weather, cover the w i r e cage w i t h a clear plastic cover as w e l l as a s u n shade to p r o v i d e a g r e e n h o u s e atmosphere if it is at all chilly. In a f e w days the sun shade c a n be r e m o v e d . Seeds Outdoors: N o t satisfactory, as the season is too short before h o t weather arrives.
Growing
Watering: Eggplant needs constant moisture, especially w h e n fruits are f o r m i n g and enlarging. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; a d d a t h i c k m u l c h w h e n h o t weather sets in. Provide a w i d e mesh, o p e n wire cage support w h e n the eggplant is half g r o w n ; the plants will g r o w right t h r o u g h it, and will be supported w i t h o u t staking.
Harvesting
How: Mways c u t the fruit f r o m the b u s h w i t h clippers; w a t c h o u t for sharp spines on the stems a n d fruits. When: Edible almost a n y t i m e after the fruit turns dark a n d glossy ( w h e n it's a b o u t 6 inches), don't let them get too large. If they turn a dull color they are overripe a n d the seeds will be large and hard.
Preparing and Using

Peel and slice or dice, t h e n stew, fry, stir-fry, or bake; a d d to casseroles, or bread a n d fry by itself. Eggplant mixes especially well w i t h tomatoes and onions. If you're n o t g o i n g to use the eggplant right away, don't refrigerate it; instead, store it on the kitchen counter a n d enjoy its g o o d looks! H a n d l e carefully or fruit will bruise.
Problems
C u t w o r m s and flea beetles; verticillium wilt.
Hints and Tips

M a n y cooks use eggplant as a substitute for meat in various dishes. S h o w the pretty flowers to y o u r children and then have t h e m w a t c h the fruit f o r m and g r o w bigger every day.
210
Lettuce
Description Lettuce is so easy to grow, very gratifying, and extremely suited for S F G i t grows quickly, prolifically and looks great. W h i l e it does g r o w best in the cool seasons and withstands cold weather, it tolerates s o m e heat and can be g r o w n nearly year-round. T h e r e are several types of lettuce: the solid head usually found in grocery stores; the loose head, or B i b b , a faster g r o w i n g , and smaller variety of head lettuce; R o m a i n e or cos, w h i c h is a loose head w i t h a rougher texture than the leaf types. T h e R o m a i n e leaf is comprised of m a n y tight, upright leaves and is probably the best pick for h o m e g a r d e n e r s b u t there are also so m a n y great types of leaf and B i b b lettuces that every gardener should try to g r o w at least four varieties at all times! T h e y do best as a spring or fall crop, but w i t h care and protection, they can be g r o w n in s u m m e r and even in winter in m a n y parts of the country. L o o k for the types that are suitable for s u m m e r or winter seasons. Starting
Location:
Full sun to partial shade; shade is w e l c o m e d in the h o t summer. A s w i t h all leafy vegetables, Sprouts in 2 to 3 days at 70F. Start 5 to 10 seeds o f several different varieties in c u p s
the stronger the light, the higher the vitamin C content will be.
Seeds Indoors:
filled w i t h v e r m i c u l i t e 7 w e e k s before y o u r last spring frost date. K e e p w a r m (70F) until s p r o u t e d ; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as first shoots appear; then p o t up in seedling trays as s o o n as plants are large e n o u g h (usually o n e to three w e e k s ) .
Transplanting:
M o v e plants into the garden anytime until they are half g r o w n . Plant a n e w square or
r w o o f lettuce every o t h e r w e e k until early s u m m e r . T h e h o t weather, l o n g days, w a r m nights, and d r y soil of s u m m e r cause lettuce to bolt to seed. Plant special varieties sold as heat- or b o l t resistant. After s u m m e r is over y o u can start planting the same varieties y o u did in the spring.
Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts
in 5 to 1 0 days. Seeds sprout q u i c k l y o u t d o o r s a n d g r o w fairly rapidly;
however, this m e t h o d is time-saving but space-consuming. If space is y o u r concern, start all seeds indoors or off to the side of the garden and m o v e plants into the garden w h e n they're half g r o w n . Transplants seem to bolt to seed more easily than direct-seeded plants, so plant the s u m m e r crop directly in the garden. Plant o n e or t w o seeds in each hole; water daily until they sprout.
Basil and Beyond
211
Growing
Watering: Try n o t to w e t the leaves; y o u m a y spread fungal diseases. D o n ' t water at night; m o r n i n g is the best followed by n o o n or late afternoon. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; don't let any weeds grow. Lettuce has such a shallow root system it can't compete w i t h weeds. Provide shade covers for plants in summer.
Harvesting
How: Y o u can cut individual outer leaves or the entire plant. If you're g o i n g to c u t outer leaves y o u can start w h e n the p l a n t is h a l f g r o w n . T h i s m a k e s a surprisingly large harvest w h e n c o m b i n e d w i t h a few leaves of beet, spinach, a n d Swiss chard. If y o u take just o n e leaf f r o m each plant, y o u can still harvest a lot a n d hardly notice w h a t has been harvested. When: Harvest leaf varieties at seven w e e k s , a n d B i b b varieties at nine w e e k s , or harvest outer leaves f r o m either o n e w h e n the p l a n t is h a l f g r o w n . Y o u c a n also c u t the entire p l a n t at a n y time; it doesn't have to g r o w to full size to be edible. If y o u w a i t until all y o u r plants reach full size y o u will have to harvest a l m o s t all of t h e m at o n c e or they will go to seed.
Preparing and Using

Rinse lettuce u n d e r c o o l water, spin or pat dry, a n d store in the refrigerator in a plastic b a g until you're ready to use it. L e t t u c e w i l l stay fresh a n d crisp for several days, a l t h o u g h it's even better to harvest almost daily for m a x i m u m n u t r i t i o n a l value. L e t t u c e c o n t a i n s v i t a m i n s A a n d B, c a l c i u m , and iron (especially the d a r k green outer leaves).
Problems
Rabbits, deer, w o o d c h u c k s , slugs, c u t w o r m s , s o w bugs, and wire w o r m s . T h e r e are n o t m a n y diseases to be concerned a b o u t unless the lettuce is quite w e t at g r o u n d level.
Hints and Tips

G r o w as m a n y different colors a n d textures as possible to have unusual salads. P i c k outer leaves daily to fill y o u r salad b o w l . . . in fact, take y o u r salad b o w l right o u t to the garden!
212
Melon (Cantaloupe, M u s k m e l o n , Watermelon)

AT A GLANCE
S e e d to Harvest/Flower: 12 weeks S e e d s Storage: 5 to 6 years Indoor S e e d Starting: 2 w e e k s before transplanting Earliest O u t d o o r Planting: 2 weeks after last spring frost Additional Plantings: no
Description
M e l o n s need about 3 m o n t h s of h o t weather to grow, but are a fun and exciting c r o p e v e n t h o u g h the yield isn't large, w h e n the harvest finally c o m e s , it all seems v e r y w o r t h w h i l e . T h e y s h o u l d be g r o w n o n vertical frames, a s t h e y will mature s o o n e r a n d save space. O f course, o n e o f the biggest rewards is seeing m e l o n s h a n g i n g 4 to 5 feet o f f the g r o u n d on y o u r vertical f r a m e t h a t ' s n o t s o m e t h i n g you're used to seeing in y o u r o l d single-row gardens!
Starting Location: Full sun; g r o w o n a vertical frame. Seeds Indoors: S p r o u t s in 5 to 10 days at 7 0 F ; the hotter the better, even u p to 90F for s p r o u t i n g .
Plant single seeds in individual paper cups. Plants do n o t transplant well, so don't start them until t w o weeks before planting outside.
Transplanting: Plant o u t d o o r s t w o w e e k s after the last frost date. S i n k the entire c u p in the g r o u n d
after tearing o f f the b o t t o m .
Seeds Outdoors: Won't sprout in soil below 65F; takes 5 days in 70F soil. Plant a presoaked seed in each
square foot, one w e e k after last frost. C o v e r w i t h a plastic-covered cage. R e m o v e weakest one later.
Crowing Watering: M u l c h heavily in hot weather. R e d u c e water w h e n melons are almost ripe to develop their
sweetness. K e e p the leaves dry to avoid fungal diseases and mildew.
Maintenance: Weed weekly; support the half-grown melons in slings; pinch out all new, small melons
near the end of the g r o w i n g season so that all the plant's strength goes into ripening the larger melons that are already set.
Harvesting How:Tw\st the m e l o n w i t h one hand while h o l d i n g the stem w i t h the other. If it resists parting, the
m e l o n is n o t ripe.
When: Harvest w h e n e v e r it has a strong m e l o n scent, and the netting pattern o n the rind (if it's a
cantaloupe) becomes very p r o m i n e n t . T h e stem will slip off easily w h e n the melon is rotated. If each m e l o n is held in a sling it won't roll around and accidentally twist itself off w h e n it's ripe.
Basil and Beyond
213
Preparing and Using

S o m e people like melons w a r m , some, chilled. C u t m u s k m e l o n s or cantaloupes in half, scoop out the seeds, and cut into wedges, or serve an entire half filled w i t h ice cream, blueberries, or custard. T h e flesh of all melons can also be scooped out using a melon-baller or cut into cubes and mixed w i t h or added to a fresh fruit salad. They're excellent for breakfast or served as a dinner dessert.
Problems
C u t w o r m s ; m i l d e w and wilt disease.
Hints and Tips

B e the f i r s t o n y o u r b l o c k t o g r o w m e l o n s ! T h e r e are s o m a n y varieties t o c h o o s e f r o m s t a r t w i t h the smaller, m o r e c o m m o n varieties. M e l o n s get v e r y heavy, so m a k e sure y o u r vertical frame is strong a n d w e l l - s u p p o r t e d .
Watermelon: A l l data and advice above is about the same for this giant o f a s u m m e r crop. O n e big
caution: m a k e darn sure y o u r vertical frame is strong.'lt w o u l d also be prudent to start b y g r o w i n g the smaller varieties; they p r o d u c e well, are very sweet, and w o u l d be a g o o d trial for y o u r experiment, as they grow well vertically. Pumpkin: T h e same scenario will a p p l y t o g r o w i n g p u m p k i n s o n y o u r vertical frame. Yes, p u m p k i n s ! Be prepared to attract a c r o w d , a n d get s o m e g o o d pictures!
Okra
Description
O k r a is a tall, w a r m - s e a s o n , a n n u a l vegetable. It is a pretty p l a n t w i t h large hibiscus-like y e l l o w flowers, heart-shaped leaves, a n d a t h i c k w o o d y stem. T h e edible part is a l o n g , ribbed, fuzzy p o d that can be yellow, red, or green. O n c e the flowers have b l o o m e d , the p o d s g r o w v e r y quickly, so c h e c k the plant daily for y o u n g p o d s as these have the best flavor a n d texture. O k r a loves h o t weather, and m a y n o t get a l o n g e n o u g h p e r i o d of heat to g r o w well in areas w i t h a short g r o w i n g season, but try it a n y w a y as it does g r o w very quickly d u r i n g the hottest days of summer. Y o u might also look for smaller, short-season varieties.
214
Starting
Location: Full sun. Seeds Indoors: 6 to 8 w e e k s before the last spring frost. S o a k seeds o v e r n i g h t a n d p l a n t at a d e p t h of 1 inch. Transplanting: Set seedlings o u t after the soil has w a r m e d , 7 to 10 days after the last frost. Seeds Outdoors: S o a k seeds overnight, then plant 1 i n c h deep, 2 weeks after the last frost, and at least 3 m o n t h s before the first fall frost.
Growing
Watering: K e e p soil fairly moist; m u l c h in very h o t weather. Maintenance: R e m o v e o l d , hard p o d s f r o m the p l a n t unless y o u are saving t h e m for seed or dried arrangements.
Harvesting
How: C u t pods from plants w i t h a pruner or knife. Breaking or pulling the pods can damage the plant. When: Harvest p o d s daily w h e n they are y o u n g , no m o r e than 4 inches long. O l d e r pods can be t o o t o u g h to eat.
Preparing and Using

O k r a c a n be stored in the refrigerator in a paper b a g or w r a p p e d in a p a p e r t o w e l in a perforated plastic b a g for 2 to 3 days; it m a y be frozen for up to 12 m o n t h s after b l a n c h i n g w h o l e for 2 minutes. C o o k e d okra can be stored in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. O k r a can be served raw, marinated in salads, o r c o o k e d o n its o w n , a n d goes w e l l w i t h t o m a t o e s , o n i o n s , c o r n , p e p p e r s , a n d e g g p l a n t . W h o l e , fresh o k r a p o d s also m a k e excellent pickles. A n d don't forget t o m a k e s o m e g u m b o !
Problems
A p h i d s a n d cabbage w o r m s , verticillium or fusarium wilt.
Hints and Tips

T r y s o m e t h i n g different: barbeque s o m e y o u n g p o d s at y o u r next party.
Basil and Beyond
215
Onion
Description
O n i o n s are easy to grow; they don't take m u c h care b u t are a little unsightly near the end w h e n the tops turn b r o w n a n d fall o v e r b u t that just m e a n s t h e y are n e a r i n g harvest t i m e . T r i m o f f the b r o w n , dead tops t o k e e p the g a r d e n l o o k i n g g o o d . O n i o n s c a n be p l a n t e d f r o m sets, plants, or seeds; the b u l b reaches harvest s o m e t i m e in the middle of the summer. T h e size of the b u l b is determined by the length of the g r o w i n g season before the s u m m e r solstice (June 2 1 ) . If y o u have a short g r o w i n g season, don't bother w i t h s e e d s g e t the plants or sets ( w h i c h l o o k like m i n i a t u r e o n i o n s ) . If y o u live in a m i l d e t climate y o u c o u l d try the seed m e t h o d . T h e r e are m a n y types of onions, from large, fat ones, to small, golf-ball-sized varieties. S o m e need to be used soon after harvest, w h i l e others are fine are for storing. C h e c k the seed catalog descriptions and pick y o u r favorites.
Starting
Location: O n i o n s like a s u n n y spot, b u t will tolerate some Seeds Indoors: S p r o u t s in 5 days at 70F. S p r i n k l e a b o u t
shade. 20 seeds o f each variety desired into cups
filled w i t h v e r m i c u l i t e 8 to 12 w e e k s before y o u r last spring frost. K e e p w a r m (70F) until sprouted; m o v e to full s u n l i g h t as s o o n as first shoots appear; t h e n p o t up in seedling trays as s o o n as plants are large e n o u g h (usually o n e to three w e e k s ) .
Transplanting:
Four weeks before the last spring frost, shake most o f the vermiculite from y o u r y o u n g
plants and gather t h e m t o g e t h e r i n small b u n c h e s . W i t h scissors, c u t o f f b o t h the tops a n d the roots so the p l a n t is b a l a n c e d w i t h a b o u t 2 inches of each. D r i l l a h o l e at each space in y o u r square w i t h a p e n c i l , a n d slip in a plant, firm the soil, a n d water.
Seeds Outdoors:
If the season is n o t l o n g e n o u g h for seeds, use sets. Push the tiny o n i o n sets into the
ground, pointed side up at the proper spacing, w i t h their tops just s h o w i n g above the soil. Water, and that's all there is to it.
Growing
Watering: W i t h h o l d water w h e n the tops start to fall over. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; w h e n bulbs start e x p a n d i n g use
y o u r finger to remove s o m e o f the soil
216
a r o u n d each b u l b and partially uncover it. T h i s makes it easier for the b u l b to expand. It will n o t h u r t if y o u can actually see the top of every bulb; in fact, it's k i n d of exciting to see t h e m getting bigger a n d bigger every week!
Harvesting
How: Pull the o n i o n s o u t of the g r o u n d a n d place on chicken wire or a w i n d o w screen laid out in the s u n for several days. T h e t o p s , roots, a n d o u t e r skin o f each o n i o n w i l l t h e n d r y thoroughly. B r u s h t h e m off and clean off any loose skins, dried tops, or roots by r u b b i n g t h e m between y o u r p a l m s , t h e n store for later use. A n y o n i o n s w i t h green o r t h i c k tops s h o u l d n o t b e stored b u t used immediately. When: A b o u t the middle of the s u m m e r you'll see y o u r o n i o n tops turning b r o w n and falling over. W h e n the majority have fallen, b e n d over the remaining ones w i t h y o u r hand. In a short while, the tops will d r y up w h i l e the bulbs attain their m a x i m u m size.
Preparing and Using

You'll find h o m e g r o w n o n i o n s m u c h milder a n d sweeter than store-bought ones. T h i s makes t h e m m o r e useful, especially for those folks w h o m u s t be careful of eating too m a n y onions. For a real treat, try a n o n i o n s a n d w i c h t h i n slices o f o n i o n w i t h m a y o n n a i s e a n d lots o f p e p p e r o n y o u r favorite bread. Or a d d fresh, crisp c u c u m b e r slices to the sandwich for a delightful c o m b i n a t i o n . H a n g dried onions in a m e s h bag, or braid tops together and h a n g in a cool, d r y area for storage all winter.
Problems
O n i o n fly m a g g o t . Resistant to m o s t diseases.
Hints and Tips

Scallions a n d g r e e n - b u n c h i n g o n i o n s are v e r y easy to g r o w using y o u r high-rise boxes, w h i c h will give y o u twice the w h i t e stalk.
Basil and Beyond
217
Parsley
AT A GLANCE
Botanical Information Family: Carrot Height: 6 to 12 inches S p a c i n g : 4 per square Growing Season Spring: yes S u m m e r : yes Fall: yes Winter: yes* Description Parsley is a w o n d e r f u l h e r b that looks great in the g a r d e n , yields a b i g c o n t i n u o u s harvest, is extremely n u t r i t i o u s , a n d doesn't need a great deal of care! Pests don't seem to b o t h e r it, and it's disease-resistant too. A l l in all, parsley is a very easy addition to y o u r S F G . T h e r e are m a n y varieties, but basically t w o kinds: flat-leaved and curly. It's said the flat-leaf varieties taste better, but the curlyleaf types are better l o o k i n g , and m o r e c o m m o n l y g r o w n . Starting S e e d t o H a r v e s t / F l o w e r : 14 w e e k s S e e d s S t o r a g e : 2 to 3 years W e e k s to Maturity: 7 w e e k s I n d o o r S e e d Starting: 12 w e e k s before last spring frost Earliest O u t d o o r Planting: 5 w e e k s before last spring frost
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: S p r o u t s in 1 0 to 1 5
days at 70F. Seeds are v e r y slow to g e r m i n a t e , a n d s h o u l d be
soaked in l u k e w a r m w a t e r for 24 hours before p l a n t i n g . S p r i n k l e ten p r e s o a k e d seeds in a c u p filled w i t h vermiculite 12 weeks before last spring frost. K e e p w a r m (70F) until sprouted; m o v e to full sunlight as s o o n as first shoots appear; then p o t up in seedling trays as soon as plants are large e n o u g h (usually one to three weeks).
Transplanting: M o v e
o u t d o o r s five w e e k s before the last spring frost or a n y t i m e plants are large
e n o u g h ; p l a n t t h e m at the same d e p t h they g r e w in the p o t .
Seeds Outdoors: Better to start indoors because seeds are slow a n d difficult to germinate.
Crowing
Watering: N e v e r let parsley d r y o u t completely because it becomes t o u g h a n d bitter and m a y bolt to

seed in the first year.
Maintenance: W e e d
weekly. M u l c h heavily for c o n t i n u a l harvest in winter, a n d for early-spring
g r o w i n g the f o l l o w i n g year. Harvesting How: C u t outer leaves as n e e d e d ; for a large harvest, c u t o f f the entire p l a n t slightly above tiny m i d d l e shoots. E i t h e r way, the p l a n t will c o n t i n u e t o g r o w w i t h n o h a r m .
When: H a r v e s t
as s o o n as the p l a n t gets 3 to 4 inches tall a n d a n y t i m e thereafter.
218
Preparing and Using

Parsley is g o o d in soups, casseroles, stews, and w i t h fish or any k i n d of meat; it's excellent over boiled vegetables, particularly potatoes. Parsley is loaded w i t h vitamins A and C. C u t up leaves w i t h scissors and sprinkle on food for that decorative g o u r m e t c h e f look!
Problems
Relatively free from pests and diseases.
Hints and Tips

Pot up a plant or t w o in the fall for a k i t c h e n w i n d o w s i l l g a t d e n , or even plan ahead a n d p o t up several for holiday, birthday, or C h r i s t m a s gifts.
Pea, Sugar Snap
Description
W h o doesn't like the taste of fresh peas? Yet until the introduction of sugar snap peas, it was hard to g r o w e n o u g h for m u c h more than a few m e a l s p e a s used to take time, space, and effort to harvest, n o t to m e n t i o n the shelling. Even w h e n you're all finished, it doesn't seem to add up to m u c h ! T h e sugar snap peas, o r edible p o d varieties, have c h a n g e d all o f that. T h e y are extremely high yielding, and y o u can eat the entire p o d . T h e y have about five times the harvest of conventional peas. Sugar snap peas are juicy, sweet, and crisp, and are absolutely wonderful. T h e y can be eaten raw or c o o k e d . T h e y are a m u s t in my garden, and I r e c o m m e n d them as the o n l y pea w o r t h growing. Very few of the pea pods even m a k e it to the kitchen now, because they are such a treat to eat right in the g a r d e n y o u m i g h t n e e d to m a k e a family rule: p i c k a n d eat all y o u w a n t b u t leave e n o u g h for dinner! O n c e the kids are told t h e y can eat right f r o m the g a r d e n , they'll b e c o m e m u c h m o r e interested in eating vegetables!
Starting Location: Full sun in spring; shaded toward s u m m e r if possible. Seeds Indoors: N o .
Basil and Beyond Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well.
219
Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts in 10 to 15 days o u t d o o r s . M i x p r e s o a k e d seeds w i t h l e g u m e i n o c u l a n t p o w d e r for an a d d e d b o o s t , t h e n p l a n t 1 i n c h d e e p a b o u t 5 w e e k s before the last spring frost. W a t e r a n d cover w i t h a plastic-covered t u n n e l .
Growing
Watering: N e v e r let the peas d r y out. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; keep water off the vines. K e e p the vines trained up the vertical frame; m u l c h as weather gets w a r m .
Harvesting
How: Carefully (with t w o hands) p i c k or cut p o d s o f f their stems. When: T h e beauty of these peas is that y o u can eat t h e m at any stage of g r o w t h . They're just as tasty (raw or c o o k e d ) w h e t h e r their p o d s are fully m a t u r e a n d b u l g i n g w i t h peas, or still thin a n d barely starting to s h o w the peas inside. M u n c h on a few every time you're in the g a r d e n w h a t a treat!
Preparing and Using

Just wash a n d they are ready to eat or c o o k . T r y to use t h e m as fresh as possible; store w h a t y o u can't use right away in refrigerator. Sugar snaps are rich in vitamins A, B i , and C, a n d contain p h o s p h o r u s and iron. As the p o d s get nearly full size, s o m e d e v e l o p a string a l o n g each e d g e , b u t it's easy to remove: just snap o f f the s t e m e n d a n d p u l l d o w n , a n d b o t h strings w i l l easily peel off. T h e p o d i s still v e r y crisp a n d tasty even w h e n full size. If the p o d s start to lose their nice pea-green color and turn b r o w n on the vine, they are overripe. P i c k t h e m i m m e d i a t e l y a n d a d d t h e m t o the c o m p o s t pile, because i f y o u don't harvest t h e m t h e y will cause the v i n e t o stop p r o d u c i n g n e w peas. T h e versatility of these tasty peas stretches the i m a g i n a t i o n . T r y t h e m r a w in salads, w i t h a d i p , plain, o r m i x e d w i t h o t h e r fresh vegetables i n v i n e g a r o r sour c r e a m dressing . . . o r c o o k t h e m b y b o i l i n g , s t e a m i n g , or stir-frying.
Problems
No pests to speak of (except those people in the family that eat t o o m a n y ) , b u t sometimes prone to p o w d e r y mildew, especially d u r i n g w a r m weather w h e n the leaves get w e t .
Hints and Tips

Let the kids g r o w t h e m and you'll have a vegetarian in the m a k i n g .
220
Pepper
Description
M o s t gardeners love to g r o w peppers: they're easy to grow, pest- and disease-free, and produce a lot for the space allotted. Y o u can b u y transplanrs locally, or start seeds yourself. T h e y look great in the garden, a n d s o m e p e o p l e g r o w several types for their decorative aspect. If all you've g r o w n are the green bell p e p p e r s , give the sweet y e l l o w b a n a n a varieties a try. Peppers c o m e in several different shapes, from the bell shape to the skinny, curved, hot chili peppers. T h e y range in color from green, red, orange and yellow. Select the type y o u w a n t for c o o k i n g and go for it!
Seeds Indoors:
Sprouts in 1 0 to 1 5 days at 70F. S p r i n k l e 5 to 1 0 seeds in a c u p o f v e r m i c u l i t e
approximately 7 weeks before the last spring frost, cover w i t h 'A inch m o r e vermiculite. K e e p w a r m (70F) until sprouted; m o v e to full sunlight as soon as first shoots appear; then pot up in seedling trays as s o o n as plants are large e n o u g h (usually one to three weeks).
Transplanting: Peppers need w a r m soil so don't transplant Seeds Outdoors: T h e season is too short to start outdoors.
Growing
until t w o weeks after the last spring frost.
Watering: D o n ' t w e t the leaves; this causes fungal and wilt infections. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; m u l c h in hot weather; cover half-grown
easily, so w o r k carefully a m o n g t h e m w h e n harvesting.
plants w i t h an o p e n - m e s h wire
cage to s u p p o r t plants w i t h o u t staking. Stems and branches of pepper plants are brittle and break
Harvesting
How: Carefully cut the fruit from the bush (don't pull or you'll accidentally break other branches). Leave a b o u t 1 inch of stem on each pepper for a longer storage life.
When:
Harvest at almost any stage o f development! Basically, if y o u w a n t green peppers p i c k t h e m as
soon as they are big e n o u g h for y o u r use. Y o u can leave them on the vine and they will turn red or yellow after they b e c o m e full g r o w n . Peppers can still be eaten w h e n red or yellow; in fact,
Basil and Beyond m a n y people prefer t h e m , as their taste is sweeter and n o t as spicy w h e n they lose their green color. Of course, the h o t chili peppers should turn color before y o u use them.
221
Preparing and Using

Use peppers raw or cooked. Peppers are excellent as a salad or casserole garnish. C u t them into strips, cubes, or thin slices as y o u w o u l d a tomato. Their shape is very attractive as a garnish. Peppers stuffed with a meat, rice, or vegetable mixture and then baked makes a great summer supper. Peppers are high in vitamins A and C.
Problems
Cutworms and flea beetles. No diseases to speak of except an occasional wilt or fungus problem.
Hints and Tips

If you like the hot pepper taste, just look through any seed catalog and pick your poison. Let each child or grandchild pick and grow a different color pepper plant. Grow enough to have some to grill on the barbecue.
Potato
Description
Potatoes need no introduction; we've all eaten t h e m at some point, in a recipe, baked, or out of a bag of chips or container of French fries. B u t g r o w i n g y o u r o w n potatoes is the best w a y to sample the large variety of p o t a t o shapes, sizes a n d colors. H a r v e s t t h e m early for small, tasty nuggets; or dig t h e m later for large tubers to store over the winter. A n d the p o t a t o p l a n t itself is b u s h y a n d pretty, d o i n g d o u b l e d u t y as an o r n a m e n t a l a n d an edible. T h e w h i t e flowers are the indicator that the small, n e w potatoes are ready to harvest o u t of the g r o u n d a n d o n t o the table.
Starting Location: Full sun. Seeds Indoors: N o . Planting: Don't plant seeds; cut u p potatoes in small pieces and let the eyes sprout, then plant those.
222
Outdoors: P l a n t in the s p r i n g w h e n the soil has reached 45F. U s e o n l y certified disease-free seed potatoes. Sprout potatoes a w e e k before planting time by placing t h e m in a tray where they will receive light (not sun) a n d temperatures of a b o u t 65F. A day or t w o before planting, cut potatoes into "seed pieces" a b o u t I V 2 " square w i t h at least one "sprouted eye" per section. R e m o v e about 5 inches of y o u r soil in that square foot, place four seed pieces at the proper spacing w i t h eyes u p , and just barely cover t h e m . W h e n sprouts appear, add e n o u g h Mel's M i x to again cover the green leafy sprouts. K e e p d o i n g this until the hole is filled back to the top. For an extra harvest, use the high-rise m e t h o d described i n C h a p t e r 4 . C o v e r the plants every w e e k o r s o w i t h m o r e Mel's M i x , u n t i l the plants b e g i n t o f l o w e r . M a k e certain a n y n e w p o t a t o e s that are f o r m i n g are w e l l covered, as u n c o v e r e d s p u d s w i l l t u r n green.
Growing
Watering: Increase watering d u r i n g flowering. Maintenance: Protect f r o m frost.
Harvesting
How: G e n t l y loosen the soil a r o u n d early potatoes a n d remove the largest tubers, leaving the smaller ones t o c o n t i n u e g r o w i n g . For later p o t a t o e s , g e n t l y d i g o u t s i d e the p l a n t a n d r e m o v e the potatoes as y o u find t h e m . T a k e care n o t to stab or cut the potatoes as y o u dig. If the weather is dry, leave the potatoes on t o p of the soil for 2 to 3 days to dry. If the weather is wet, bring the potatoes into a garage or basement to dry. T h i s will t o u g h e n the skin for storage. Store potatoes in a cool (40F.), dark location for 3 to 6 m o n t h s . Do n o t store potatoes near apples, w h i c h give o f f a chemical that will d a m a g e the potatoes. When: S m a l l early p o t a t o e s c a n be harvested as n e e d e d in early s u m m e r after the plants finish flowering. Later potatoes can be left in the soil until 2 to 3 weeks after the foliage has died b a c k in fall, a n d can be lifted all at o n c e for storing.
Preparing and Using

Potatoes c a n be boiled, fried, steamed, grilled, or baked. A l l potatoes should be c o o k e d or placed in water i m m e d i a t e l y after peeling to prevent discoloration. To peel or n o t to peel is generally a result of the preparation m e t h o d or personal preference. T h e exception is thin-skinned n e w potatoes, w h i c h should n o t be peeled. C h o o s e the t y p e of p o t a t o to use in a recipe based on its qualities. N e w p o t a t o e s are m o i s t a n d w a x y a n d are best for steaming, boiling, and in salads. O b l o n g mature w h i t e potatoes are rather d r y a n d starchy. T h e y are the m o s t p o p u l a r p o t a t o to use for French-fries a n d they are great for b a k i n g a n d m a s h i n g . R o u n d red p o t a t o e s h a v e a rather w a x y texture, m a k i n g t h e m ideal for b o i l i n g a n d m a s h i n g . R o u n d w h i t e p o t a t o e s are t h i n - s k i n n e d a n d h o l d their shape in salads as w e l l as b o i l i n g a n d roasting. Yellow-fleshed p o t a t o e s are g o o d for s t e a m i n g , roasting, a n d m a s h i n g . Potatoes do n o t freeze, dry, or can well.
Problems
Flea beetles, leaf hoppers, and slugs; blight, scab, and root k n o t n e m a t o d e . Tubers exposed to sunlight while g r o w i n g will turn green and are m i l d l y toxic.
Basil and Beyond
223
Hints and Tips

Let the plant continue to g r o w for a late harvest of bigger potatoes. T h e kids will love planting the blue or purple potato variety.
Radish
Description
Radishes are a great crop for all g a r d e n e r s f r o m experts to beginners. W h o can pass up a vegetable that matures in o n l y three weeks? Plus, they are zesty and tasty in any dish. Radishes c o m e in a m u l t i t u d e of shapes from small and round to l o n g carrot shapes. T h e y vary in color from red, pink, white, and even s o m e black varieties. Radishes planted in the spring are normally red or w h i t e colored, and will mature in 3 to 4 weeks. Fall radishes take 6 to 8 weeks and store very well; they're referred to as winter radishes. It's easy to plant too m a n y radishes. T h e y don't like being crowded, so the S F G m e t h o d is very suitable for this vegetable. D e c i d e h o w m a n y y o u can use each w e e k and then plant no more than double that n u m b e r every other w e e k for a c o n t i n u o u s , but controlled, harvest.
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s not transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts in five to ten days
outdoors d e p e n d i n g o n temperature. Plant a square foot

x
every o t h e r w e e k for a staggered b u t c o n t i n u o u s harvest. P l a n t li i n c h d e e p in spring, 1 inch deep in summer. If y o u really like radishes a lot, plant s o m e every w e e k of the g r o w i n g year, even through the h o t weather. T h e plants will still do fairly well then if y o u give t h e m some shade, lots of water, a n d a t h i c k m u l c h . W i n t e r or l o n g - k e e p i n g varieties need t w o m o n t h s to mature, so start t h e m at least that l o n g before the first fall frost.
Growing
Watering:
D o n ' t let radishes stop g r o w i n g or d r y o u t ; lack o f w a t e r causes hot-tasting and
p i t h y radishes.
224
Maintenance: W e e d w e e k l y ; keep covered w i t h screen-covered cage i f root m a g g o t s are a p r o b l e m ;

m u l c h i n h o t weather.
Harvesting
How: Pull up the entire p l a n t a n d trim o f f the t o p . Refrigerate edible p o r t i o n s if they're n o t used immediately.
When: H a r v e s t as s o o n as they are m a r b l e size u p to P i n g - P o n g ball size; the smaller y o u pull t h e m ,

the sweeter t h e y taste. T h e l o n g fall varieties can be left in the g r o u n d until frost, t h e n either m u l c h e d to keep the g r o u n d from freezing, or pulled and stored in d a m p peat moss or sand after the tops are removed.
Preparing and Using

Slice, dice, or cut into fancy shapes for eating o u t of h a n d or to a d d to salads, a n d for garnishes. If y o u have too m a n y all at o n c e , twist or cut o f f the tops and store in a plastic b a g in the refrigerator. Radishes will keep for up to a w e e k before g e t t i n g soft.
Problems
N o n e to speak of, except possibly root maggots.
Hints and Tips

Teaching a child to garden? T h i s is the perfect first crop; let each child p i c k a color, and take it from there.
Spinach
Description
Spinach is s o m e w h a t difficult to grow, but a very popular plant. It usually does well if it stays cool in the spring. A rapid grower, it can be g r o w n in a fairly small space and looks great in the garden. It will quickly bolt to seed in the s u m m e r heat, b u t grows very well in the early spring and then again in the fall. Spinach is very cold hardy and in m a n y areas of the c o u n t r y it will winter over; in w a r m e r climates, it can be g r o w n all winter.
Basil and Beyond
225
T h e r e are t w o types of s p i n a c h t h e smooth-leaved k i n d a n d a crinkly-leaved type called Savoy, w h i c h is more popular and m o r e attractive. N e i t h e r will endure heat and should be g r o w n in cool weather. S o m e varieties are m o r e resistant to frost a n d are particularly adaptable for g r o w i n g in the fall, and possibly into the winter season. C h e c k y o u r seed catalog for appropriate varieties.
Starting
Location: A n y location is suitable, full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts outdoors in o n e to t w o weeks. Plant seeds h inch deep, water, and cover
l
w i t h a plastic-covered cage. Plants can w i t h s t a n d any temperature between 2 5 F and 75F, so judge y o u r spring and fall planting accordingly.
Growing
Watering: B e i n g a leaf crop, spinach needs constant moist soil. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; m u l c h in w a r m weather. D o n ' t w o r k in the spinach square if the leaves are very w e t t h e y are brittle and break easily.
Harvesting
How: C u t outer leaves as needed; small inner leaves will c o n t i n u e to g r o w rapidly. When: Harvest as s o o n as the plants l o o k like they won't miss an outer leaf or t w o . K e e p picking and the plant w i l l k e e p g r o w i n g right up until h o t weather. If it's a s p r i n g c r o p a n d y o u t h i n k the plants are g o i n g to b o l t soon, cut off the entire plant for a little extra harvest.
Preparing and Using

W a s h carefully; soil tends to cling to the undersides, especially on the ones w i t h crinkled leaves. Spin or pat dry and store in refrigerator just like lettuce. Better yet, eat spinach right away. Serve fresh in salads, c o o k slighdy for a w i l t e d spinach salad, or c o o k by steaming lightly. Spinach goes great w i t h any meal, especially w h e n garnished w i t h a c h o p p e d , hard-boiled egg. It's high in vitamins A, B i , and C, and is a valuable source of iron.
Problems
L e a f miners a n d aphids. No diseases to speak of.
Hints and Tips

If y o u w a n t to g r o w s p i n a c h in the w a r m e r weather, search the seed catalogs for bolt-resistant varieties a n d p r o v i d e shade, a h e a v y m u l c h , a n d lots of water in the w a r m e r weather.
226
Strawberry
Description
P i c k i n g strawberries on a clear June d a y is a treat for y o u n g , o l d , a n d e v e r y o n e in b e t w e e n o n l y a b o u t h a l f the harvest actually m a k e s it into the basket! Since strawberries are so popular, m o s t families like to plant an entire 4' x 4' in strawberriesit's easy to protect a n d harvest. Y o u m i g h t also like to build a pyramid box and plant it in all strawberries. G r o w i n g y o u r o w n strawberries is fun and rewarding. Strawberry plants bear fruit for at least 3 or 4 years, then yields will decrease and eventually the plant will die. E a c h plant sends out runners that p r o d u c e a n e w plant, w h i c h can be used as the next generation of strawberries in the garden. However, I r e c o m m e n d y o u not let t h e m root, as they take so m u c h energy from the parent plant. I'll explain a better w a y for y o u r S F G . T h e r e are three m a i n types of strawberries: June-bearing, w h i c h sets fruit in June; ever-bearing, w h i c h will set fruit twice d u r i n g the g r o w i n g season; a n d day-neutral, w h i c h is n o t affected by the length of the d a y as the others are. A n d don't overlook the A l p i n e strawberry, w h i c h will reward y o u w i t h tiny b u t incredibly tasty fruit over a l o n g period!
Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: Early spring, as soon as the soil is not frozen. B e sure soil is n o t wet. Outdoors: M o s t gardeners b u y strawberry plants in packets o f a dozen or so. Soak first,
then trim off
the roots slightly, a n d p l a n t 4 per square foot. Leave a saucer-shaped depression a r o u n d each p l a n t for effective w a t e r i n g . K e e p the soil moist; increase w a t e r w h e n strawberries are fruiting.
Growing
Watering: W e e k l y ; m o r e d u r i n g d r y periods. Maintenance: C u t off all the runners as soon
as y o u see t h e m each week; that w a y all the energy will
stay in the parent p l a n t for an increased harvest each year. A f t e r 3 or 4 years w h e n the harvest starts to d i m i n i s h , it is best to p u l l o u t those plants a n d replant, perhaps in a different square w i t h b r a n d - n e w certified disease-free plants f r o m the nursery. It's true that those runners will p r o d u c e b a b y plants a n d it seems a waste n o t to use t h e m ; s o m e p e o p l e like to let t h e m
Basil and Beyond grow. However, the p r o b l e m c o m e s f r o m t o o m a n y runners p r o d u c i n g too m a n y baby plants
227
(because the gardener forgets to cut t h e m off); they take all the energy from the parent, reducing the harvest.
Harvesting
How: Pick the fruit leaving a short piece of stem attached; use scissors for a clean cut.
When: Harvest
as fruit ripens, for 2 to 3 weeks.
Preparing and Using

Use strawberries as soon as possible after picking; p o p a few right in y o u r m o u t h . T h e y can be used in fruit salads, on cakes, and in pies. Freeze w h o l e strawberries for use in s m o o t h i e s t h e y will be soft w h e n they defrost, but still flavorful.
Problems
Birds and slugs; verticillium wilt. People w h o p u t too m a n y in their m o u t h and too few in the basket.
Hints and Tips

Cover plants w i t h bird netting to preserve harvest.
Summer Squash
Description
S u m m e r squash needs a lot of r o o m to grow, b u t is unbelievably prolific. It is easy and fast to grow, but needs h o t weather to do well. T h e r e are m a n y colors and s h a p e s r o u n d , straight, c r o o k n e c k and f l a t e a c h w i t h its particular taste. M o s t of the varieties sold are the bush types, (especially zucchini), so you'll have to assign a larger space (a 3' x 3' area) to just one plant. However, those plants can p r o d u c e a vast a m o u n t of fruit, so most gardeners think it's w o r t h w h i l e , at least for one or t w o plants.
228
An alternate s o l u t i o n is to g r o w the v i n i n g types on vertical frames, w h i c h is quite a space saver. ( Z u c c h i n i can be trained to g r o w vertically, b u t it still takes a lot of r o o m because of those h u g e leaves a n d prickly stems.) C h e c k the seed p a c k e t or catalog to m a k e sure y o u are g e t t i n g a v i n e type; if the seed p a c k e t or catalog doesn't say so, call the seed c o m p a n y ' s toll-free n u m b e r a n d ask.
Starting
Location: Full sun. Seeds Indoors: D o e s n ' t transplant w e l l because of the l o n g t a p r o o t . It's best to start seeds o u t d o o r s . I f y o u d o w a n t t o start i n d o o r s , p l a n t o n e seed i n a paper c u p o f Mel's M i x 1 i n c h d e e p . P l a n t 2 w e e k s before y o u r last frost date. Transplanting: Plant outdoors on y o u r last spring frost date. Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts in 5 to 10 days o u t d o o r s . For b u s h types, p l a n t 2 p r e s o a k e d seeds in the center of a nine-square space. F o r v i n e types, also p l a n t 2 p r e s o a k e d seeds in the m i d d l e of a 2-square-foot space u n d e r y o u r vertical frame. M a k e sure y o u h o l l o w o u t a dish shape a r o u n d the p l a n t e d seeds to h o l d p l e n t y of water. Place a plastic-covered cage over the seeds to w a r m the soil. A f t e r s p r o u t i n g , c u t o f f the w e a k e s t p l a n t i f b o t h seeds s p r o u t .
Growing
Watering: K e e p the leaves d r y to prevent p o w d e r y mildew. Maintenance: W e e d weekly; keep vines trained up vertical frames or w i t h i n b o u n d s of the square.
Harvesting
How: C a r e f u l l y c u t t h r o u g h the fruit s t e m b u t d o n o t c u t the m a i n v i n e o r leaf stems. H a n d l e the squash g e n t l y as their skins are v e r y soft a n d easily d a m a g e d by fingernails or if d r o p p e d . When: Harvest as soon as the blossoms wilt, and until the fruits are 6 to 9 inches long. D o n ' t let t h e m g r o w a n y longer. S o m e t i m e s y o u have to harvest at least three times a week; they g r o w that fast. Squash loses flavor as the seeds inside mature.
Preparing and Using

Rinse l i g h t l y a n d serve sliced or c u t i n t o sticks, w i t h a d i p , or just as an appetizer a n y t i m e . C o o k lightly b y s t e a m i n g o r stir-frying, i n a n y n u m b e r o f dishes o r c o m b i n a t i o n s . Serve squash b y itself or w i t h o t h e r vegetables, seasoned w i t h a little dressing, grated cheese, or c h o p p e d parsley. S q u a s h is high in vitamins A, B i , and C.
Problems
Squash vine borer a n d squash b u g ; p o w d e r y mildew.
Hints and Tips

If y o u need or w a n t to tell the kids a b o u t the birds a n d bees, the garden is the right place to do i t a n d s u m m e r squash is the right p l a n t for y o u to use. P o i n t o u t to a n y eager faces the difference b e t w e e n the m a l e a n d female flower. T h e female already has a m i n i a t u r e fruit right before the blossom. T h e male blossom, w h i c h contains the p o l l e n o h , y o u k n o w the rest o f the story. Didn't y o u r m o t h e r or father talk to y o u in the garden?
Basil and Beyond
229
Winter Squash
Description
A s p a c e - h o g g i n g p l a n t that m a n y gardeners w o n ' t g r o w because of its large leaves a n d r a m p a g i n g vines, winter squash can take over the entire garden. T h a t ' s w h y we g r o w it vertically! T h e fruit can be picked in the late fall a n d stored w i t h o u t difficulty to be used d u r i n g the w i n t e r ; it retains its delectable flavor l o n g after b e i n g harvested. T h e r e are m a n y varieties to select from, b u t butternut and acorn are the most popular. All winter squashes have thick skins that harden in the fall, and are generally picked after the vines have been killed by frost. Y o u don't get y o u r c o m p e n s a t i o n until season's end, b u t since there is almost no fresh produce then, the winter squash is very w e l c o m e d . T h e fruit has a m i l d flavor and is fine grained.
Starting
Location: Full sun, b u t tolerates a little shade.
Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well because o f the l o n g taproot. Seeds Outdoors: Since the seeds s p r o u t quickly, y o u m i g h t as w e l l start
t h e m o u t d o o r s . Plant t w o
presoaked seeds in the center of 2 square feet. M a k e sure you've left a 2 - i n c h depression around the seeds to h o l d lots of w a t e r d u r i n g the season. C o v e r w i t h a plastic covered cage to w a r m the soil and encourage fast seed sprouting. C u t off the weakest plant if b o t h seeds sprout.
Crowing
Watering: K e e p soil moist.
Maintenance: W e e d weekly;
Harvesting
keep vines trained u p the vertical frame.
How: C u t the squash from the vine, leaving as l o n g a stem as possible, at least 2 inches. T h e n set the fruit out in the sun to cure for a few days, protecting it at night w h e n frost is in the forecast.
When:
Harvest after the first light frost, w h i c h will kill the leaves and vines, and after the main vine
wilts, b u t before a very hard frost.
230
Preparing and Using

Peel, cut in hall, s c o o p o u t seeds, a n d prepare for b o i l i n g or baking. Excellent served m a s h e d or in c h u n k s w i t h butter a n d parsley. W i n t e r squash can even be a d d e d to s o m e soups a n d stews. Butternut can be used in p u m p k i n pie recipes (many c o o k s say it's better tasting than p u m p k i n itself). Store winter squash in a c o o l , d r y place at 40 to 50F; c h e c k often and use if y o u see a n y bruised or rotten spots.
Problems
A few beetles; p o w d e r y mildew; and vines too rambunctious to control.
Hints and Tips

W i t h o u t a vertical frame, w i n t e r squash will take over y o u r g a r d e n , so m a k e sure y o u o n l y g r o w winter squash vertically. T h i s squash is so prolific and vigorous that it is a perfect plant for an arbor or extended vertical structure. W h e n picking the squash, handle the fruit carefully and cut the s t e m don't break it off.
Tomato
Description
If y o u don't plant a n y t h i n g else, y o u should plant t o m a t o e s a few different varieties at the very least. T h e r e is a h u g e selection available, some specifically suited for eating, juicing, c o o k i n g , or canning. They're available in early, midseason, or late types in different colors ranging from red, orange, pink, and yellow. Size also varies from the small cherry t o m a t o to the extra large 4 - p o u n d types that w i n awards at the c o u n t y fair. W h e n c h o o s i n g varieties, it's v e r y i m p o r t a n t to consider w h e t h e r they are pest- a n d diseaseresistant. This is very important, so make a note: resistant varieties are labeled V F N . V indicates the plant is resistant to Verticillium wilt; F indicates it will resist Fusarium wilt; and N is for nematodes, w h i c h are tiny, tiny w o r m s that infect the roots. T h e r e are s o m e v e r y g o o d non-resistant traditional varieties,
Basil and Beyond
231
but if y o u are hit w i t h any of these problems and lose y o u r plants virtually overnight just w h e n they're starting to produce, you'll understand the value of the varieties that are disease- a n d pest-resistant. T h e resistant varieties taste great a n d also m a t u r e in early, m i d s e a s o n , or late season. U s u a l l y the early season fruits are best suited to the colder climates in the n o r t h . If y o u live in a longer-season climate, y o u can g r o w a f e w different varieties that will p r o d u c e all season l o n g . Tomatoes have t w o different g r o w t h habits: determinate and indeterminate (in other w o r d s , b u s h or vine). Bush varieties that g r o w no m o r e than 3 feet tall are the determinate kinds. Indeterminate types, the v i n e types, are also the m o s t c o m m o n a n d usually m a t u r e i n m i d - t o late season. T h e y g r o w the biggest t o m a t o e s , take the longest to m a t u r e , a n d last until frost kills t h e m . Y o u c a n amaze y o u r family a n d friends b y r e m e m b e r i n g t h e n a m e o f the t w o different types this w a y : "It is indeterminate how tall the v i n e types w i l l g r o w . "
Starting
Location: Full sun. Seeds Indoors: Sprouts in o n e w e e k at 70F. Sprinkle 5 or so seeds of each variety y o u w a n t to g r o w in individual c u p s filled w i t h v e r m i c u l i t e six w e e k s before y o u r last s p r i n g frost. Just barely cover w i t h vermiculite a n d water; m o v e to full sunlight as s o o n as first shoots appear. T h e n p o t up in seedling trays or individual pots as s o o n as plants are large e n o u g h (usually 1 to 3 weeks). K e e p a careful w a t c h over the plants, especially after transplanting t h e m into seedling trays, because any check or stoppage of the g r o w t h will affect the ultimate bearing capacity of the plant. Transplanting: H a r d e n o f f transplants for o n e to t w o weeks, and plant outside on or after y o u r frostfree date. Plant one vine-type plant per square foot. B u s h types are planted in the center of a nine square f o o t area. T h e y take u p s o m u c h r o o m that I n o w g r o w o n l y v i n e - t y p e varieties. W a t e r and cover w i t h a plastic-covered wire cage for protection f r o m the c o l d a n d w i n d . Leave the cage on until the plants are at least 18 inches tall and p u s h i n g at the top. Seeds Outdoors: T h e season is t o o short to start outdoors.
Growing
Watering: K e e p water off the plant leaves. Maintenance: Prune off side branches (suckers) w e e k l y for vine types a n d guide plant tops up t h r o u g h netting. Prune o f f lower dead or y e l l o w leaves. K e e p a d d i n g m u l c h as the season gets hotter.
Harvesting
How: G e n t l y twist a n d pull ripe tomatoes so the stem breaks (if it's ripe it should easily break away), or even better, cut the stem so as n o t to disturb the rest of the remaining fruit. When: If you're n o t g o i n g to w a i t until they're red a n d ripe, w h y g r o w t h e m yourself? S o m e gardeners like to p i c k t h e m just slightly before that p o i n t (say a d a y or t w o ) if t h e y w a n t extra-firm t o m a t o e s for s a n d w i c h e s o r a particular dish. I f y o u leave t h e m o n the v i n e t o o l o n g t h e y w i l l t u r n soft a n d mushy, so inspect daily; it's o n e of the pleasures y o u ' v e b e e n w a i t i n g for all year.
Preparing and Using

T h i s is a subject fit for an entire b o o k , a n d in fact m a n y have been written. W h a t can one say in a few paragraphs? Tomatoes can be used in a multitude of ways. Y o u can enjoy plate after plate of sliced tomatoes seasoned w i t h lots of pepper a n d sometimes a little mayonnaise; try p o u r i n g y o u r favorite salad dressing over that same dish of sliced tomatoes. Soak a plate full in vinegar overnight for the next
232
day's treat. A d d thick slices of fresh tomatoes to any casserole and enjoy a flavor n o t experienced the rest of the year. If y o u have a lot of tomatoes, use t h e m fresh in c o o k i n g instead of canned tomatoes.
Problems
C u t w o r m , whitefly, and the big, bad, but beautiful t o m a t o horn w o r m ; various wilt diseases.
Hints and Tips

D o n ' t let a n y o n e , a n y t i m e ever s m o k e i n y o u r garden. T h e y m a y c o n t a m i n a t e y o u r plants w i t h a t o b a c c o disease. In fact, t h e y s h o u l d even w a s h their h a n d s before e n t e r i n g the garden if t h e y are g o i n g t o h a n d l e a n y o f the plants. ( O h , well, there goes all y o u r s m o k i n g friends.)
HERBS Basil
Description
Basil is a non-invasive m e m b e r of the m i n t family. 'Sweet Genovese' is the pesto basil. Basil is used not only in Italian c o o k i n g , but in m a n y Asian cuisines. In India, it is planted around the temples and is a part of m a n y religious ceremonies. Basil also comes in flavors such as c i n n a m o n , licorice, and l e m o n . G o ahead a n d s p l u r g e g r o w a few different k i n d s a n d discover the w o n d e r s o f this beautiful a n d delicious herb.
Seeds Indoors: Start seeds indoors 4 to 6 weeks before the last frost. Seeds germinate q u i c k l y Transplanting: Set o u t after all d a n g e r o f frost has passed a n d the soil has w a r m e d . Basil will
the w e a t h e r has settled.
stop
g r o w i n g if the w e a t h e r is c o o l a n d take a w h i l e to catch u p , so w a i t to transplant basil until
Seeds Outdoors: S o w
basil seeds where the plants are to be g r o w n in w a r m soil. Seeds germinate in 7 to
10 days, and the plants g r o w quickly.
Basil and Beyond
233
Crowing
Watering: Keep well-watered. Maintenance: P i n c h basil often
to keep the plant bushy. H a r v e s t i n g basil for c o o k i n g will also keep
the plant strong and bushy. For energetic, tasty plants, remove flower b u d s as they appear.
Harvesting
How: Pinch stems just above leaf nodes where n e w stems will sprout. Use o n l y the leaves in cooking.
When:
Harvest basil anytime. In fact, the m o r e y o u pinch o f f leaves and stems, the more it will grow.
Preparing and Using

Use fresh leaves in c o o k i n g , discarding stems. D r i e d basil does not retain its flavor. Excess basil can be processed with olive oil, w r a p p e d tightly in plastic wrap, and stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Problems
Aphids and Japanese beetles; Fusarium wilt.
Chive
Description
T h i s is a fun little plant w i t h a spiky hairdo. T h e slim, round leaves are h o l l o w and have a mild onion scent w h e n cut. T h e p i n k i s h - p u r p l e flowers are edible a n d appear in late spring and m a k e a pretty garnish for salads. C h i v e s are a m e m b e r of the o n i o n family, a n d o d d l y e n o u g h , it is o n e herb that hasn't really been used for m e d i c i n a l purposes d u r i n g its l o n g history. It is s i m p l y a u n i q u e garden plant that has e n h a n c e d the flavor of savory foods for centuries.
Seeds Indoors: Plant seeds indoors in late winter. Seeds can take u p to 2 1 Transplanting: Set plants o u t in spring. A l t h o u g h chives are cold-hardy,
after all danger of frost has passed.
days to germinate. it is best to set n e w plants out
Seeds Outdoors: Sprouts in late spring to early summer.
234 Growing Watering: K e e p soil moist.
Maintenance: Plants will spread,

Harvesting
so divide clumps every few years to rejuvenate the plants.
How: Snip the tips of the leaves as needed to garnish baked potatoes and creamed soups. D o n ' t cut off more than V3 of the plant at a n y o n e time.
When: Chives
can be harvested anytime after the n e w leaves have reached 6 to 8 inches. T o enjoy the
tasty p i n k flowers, don't harvest the p l a n t until y o u can see the flower b u d s , t h e n clip a r o u n d t h e m o r w a i t until they b l o o m . T h e f l o w e r s m a k e a lovely garnish. Preparing and Using C u t ' / 3 of the tops off all leaves if y o u like the flat-top look, or cut a few leaves d o w n to V.3 of each leaf. Snip the fresh h o l l o w leaves into salads, sauces, soups, or dips. Problems Insufficient water can cause leaf tips to turn b r o w n .
Cilantro
S e e d to H a r v e s t / F l o w e r : 5 w e e k s (leaves), 12 weeks (coriander seeds) S e e d s S t o r a g e : N/A W e e k s to Maturity: 5 w e e k s Indoor S e e d Starting: n o Earliest O u t d o o r Planting: after last frost A d d i t i o n a l P l a n t i n g s : 2-week intervals until early s u m m e r for continuous harvest Last Planting: not n e e d e d Description T h e fresh leaf of cilantro is p r o b a b l y the m o s t w i d e l y used of all flavoring herbs t h r o u g h o u t the world. It is used in M i d d l e Eastern, Indian, Southeast Asian, and S o u t h A m e r i c a n cuisines. Cilantro is a pretty plant that looks s o m e w h a t like parsley. Use it like parsley in smaller quantities for a unique tang. W h e n cilantro goes to seed, it becomes another herb altogethercoriander. A n c i e n t s used to c h e w coriander seeds to c o m b a t h e a r t b u r n ( p r o b a b l y after w e e d i n g their l o n g single-row gardens). T h e seeds are sweet w h e n they're ripe, but terribly bitter w h e n immature.
Basil and Beyond
235
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: N o . Transplanting: D o e s n o t transplant well. Seeds Outdoors: After last frost.
Growing
Watering: Weekly. Maintenance: Shelter

Harvesting
How: Pick cilantro leaves as y o u n e e d t h e m , even if the p l a n t is o n l y 6 inches tall. For coriander seeds, cut w h o l e plants and h a n g to dry, and then shake the dried seeds i n t o a paper bag. the plants from w i n d , otherwise cilantro needs little care beside watering.
When: Harvest
the cilantro leaves anytime after the plant has reached 6 to 8 inches. Harvest the seeds
(coriander) after the plants have turned b r o w n but before the seeds start to fall. Cilantro self-sows with abandon.
Preparing and Using

Cilantro leaves and coriander seeds are b o t h used in curries and pickles. T h e strong, spicy leaves can be added to salads, fish, or beans, and it is f o u n d as an ingredient in m a n y ethnic recipes. T h e milder, sweeter seeds can be g r o u n d and used in breads or cakes.
Problems
Cilantro is usually pest- and disease-free. T h e plant does suffer in h u m i d , rainy weather.
Mint
Description
M i n t , and other m e m b e r s of the m i n t family, has the distinguishing characteristic of square stems. You can see this best by l o o k i n g at the cut end of a m i n t stem. M i n t plants c o m e in m a n y flavors,
236
s u c h as spearmint, p e p p e r m i n t , apple, l e m o n , and chocolate, and all mints give o f f a lovely scent w h e n the leaves are crushed. B u t b e w a r e m i n t is invasive. It sends o u t t o u g h runners that g r o w roots and leaves every few inches, and will crop up anywhere it can. To keep m i n t plants in b o u n d s , c u t a 6-inch diameter circle around the plants in late spring a n d again in early fall, a n d pull o u t a n y runners outside the circle. T r y n o t to leave any small pieces in the g r o u n d t h e y t o o will sprout. In a Square Foot G a r d e n , sink a 1 2 - i n c h square or r o u n d plastic pail or clay p o t in that square; don't use a c o n v e n t i o n a l p o t w i t h holes on the side or a r o u n d the b o t t o m . If u s i n g a pail, drill s o m e small drainage holes in the b o t t o m . If u s i n g a clay p o t , cover the b o t t o m h o l e w i t h a piece of b r o k e n crockery or bottle cap. Pull the entire p o t up in the fall a n d take it inside as a houseplant. D o n ' t let this discourage y o u from g r o w i n g m a n y different kinds of mints, however, because the benefits truly o u t w e i g h the extra w o r k .
Starting
Location: S u n to partial shade. Seeds Lndoors: N o , does n o t c o m e true f r o m seed. Transplanting: Plant divisions a n y t i m e f r o m spring t h r o u g h fall. Seeds Outdoors: N o .
Growing
Watering: Weekly. Maintenance: C u t back to p r o m o t e bushiness.
Harvesting
How: C u t m i n t stems back to a pair of leaves. T h i s is where n e w branches will form. Use the leaves as a flavoring a n d sprigs as a garnish. When: H a r v e s t m i n t a n y t i m e after the p l a n t has reached 6 inches tall; do n o t harvest the leaves of creeping (groundcover) mints.
Preparing and Using

Use fresh m i n t leaves in sauces, m i n t jelly, salads, or to flavor herb teas. Float a sprig of m i n t in y o u r favorite s u m m e r drink, bruising the b o t t o m leaves a little to impart that refreshing flavor. T u c k a sprig of m i n t into a fruit c u p for color and scent.
Problems
M i n t is basically disease- a n d pest-free. Plants m a y wilt a n d turn b r o w n w i t h o u t sufficient water, b u t should spring right b a c k after a g o o d soaking.
Basil and Beyond
237
Oregano
AT A GLANCE
S e e d to H a r v e s t / F l o w e r : 16 weeks; hardy perennial S e e d s S t o r a g e : n/a W e e k s to Maturity: 8 to 10 w e e k s I n d o o r S e e d Starting: 6 w e e k s before last spring frost Earliest O u t d o o r Planting: after last frost A d d i t i o n a l P l a n t i n g s : anytime throughout growing season Last Planting: not needed Description W h a t w o u l d Italian food be w i t h o u t a sprinkling of oregano to give it flavor and color? O r e g a n o is a native of the M e d i t e r r a n e a n area a n d enjoys lots of sunshine. It is a pretty p l a n t w i t h r o u n d leaves tightly covering the stems. V a r i e g a t e d o r e g a n o is particularly lovely w i t h the leaves e d g e d in w h i t e or gold, b u t the variegated plants are n o t q u i t e as h a r d y as the green ones a n d are used m o s t l y as ornamental plants. G i v e oregano frequent trimmings to keep it neat and so y o u can dry the leaves. It is one of few herbs w h o s e flavor is stronger dried than fresh. W h e n the leaves have dried, c r u m b l e t h e m lightly a n d store in an airtight container. Starting Location: Full sun.
Seeds Indoors: 4 to 6 weeks before last spring frost. Transplanting: Plant divisions anytime after the temperatures reach 4 5 F Seeds Outdoors: Spring, after last frost; seeds need light to germinate.
Crowing
Watering: Weekly. Maintenance: W a t e r
sparingly; t o o m u c h w a t e r will cause root rot. H a r v e s t o r trim m a t u r e plants
often to keep t h e m in b o u n d s . D i v i d e every 2 to 3 years. Harvesting How: C u t stems back to a pair of leaves. T h i s is where n e w branches will form.
When: O r e g a n o
can be harvested anytime d u r i n g the s u m m e r m o n t h s , b u t the flavor is best after the
buds have formed but just before the flowers open. Preparing and Using O r e g a n o loses its distinctive flavor d u r i n g c o o k i n g , so always a d d it in the last few m i n u t e s . Use oregano in salads, casseroles, soups, sauces, poultry dishes, and of course, pizza. D r i e d oregano has a stronger flavor than fresh and goes especially well w i t h t o m a t o or rice dishes.
238
Problems
O r e g a n o is usually pest- and disease-free. T o o m u c h water can cause root rot.
FLOWERS Dahlia
Description
N a t i v e to M e x i c o , dahlias literally c o m e in all shapes a n d sizes. T h i s gets c o m p l i c a t e d . T h e y are g r o u p e d into nine sizes based on the diameter of the flower, and 18 classifications of form, from the daisy-like decorative f o r m , t o p o m p o m , cactus, a n d the fully d o u b l e stellar f o r m . Flowers c o m e i n every c o l o r except blue a n d g r e e n , a n d m u l t i c o l o r s a b o u n d . E v e n the leaves c o m e in colors, f r o m light green to deepest green to b u r g u n d y . Plus, they are said to guard n e i g h b o r i n g plants against n e m a t o d e s . T h e r e is i n d e e d a dahlia for e v e r y o n e . Border or d w a r f dahlias g r o w 12 to 24 inches high and rarely need staking. G a r d e n dahlias are in the 2 to 4 foot range, w h i l e giant f o r m s have been k n o w n to g r o w to 10 f e e t b u t n o t in a Square F o o t G a r d e n ! Start y o u r o w n plants f r o m seed (no guarantee w h a t c o l o r you'll get), o r b u y roots (called tubers) for special, especially s h o w y types. In the fall, d i g up the n e w l y f o r m e d tubers a n d store in a frost-free area until the next spring. W a r n i n g : dahlias can be habit-forming. If y o u get h o o k e d (I did), join y o u r local Dahlia Society and you'll fit right in!
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade for best results. Seeds Indoors: Start seeds 6 to 8 weeks before last spring frost.
Seedlings emerge in 5 to 2 1 days.
Basil and Beyond Transplanting: After last frost date.
239
Seeds Outdoors: N o , time is too short for seeds, b u t y o u can plant tubers anytime after the last frost.
Growing
Watering: W a t e r dahlia tubers w h e n first setting t h e m o u t , t h e n w a i t u n t i l y o u see shoots before watering again unless the soil is unusually dry. T h i s will prevent the tubers f r o m rotting. O n c e the root system is established a n d shoots begin to show, give dahlia plants daily water, especially during the hottest s u m m e r m o n t h s . Maintenance: W h e n the p l a n t reaches a b o u t 3 inches tall, p i n c h o f f the g r o w i n g tip to e n c o u r a g e b u s h y g r o w t h . M u l c h dahlias t o k e e p the soil m o i s t . S u p p o r t tall varieties. D e a d h e a d t o encourage r e b l o o m i n g . Since dahlias are easily g r o w n f r o m seed, y o u m a y n o t w a n t t o b o t h e r d i g g i n g u p the t i n y tubers o f s e e d - g r o w n plants. S i m p l y start t h e m f r o m seed again next year. I f y o u d o w a n t t o dig up the tubers, after the first frost has killed the foliage, carefully d i g dahlia tubers a n d let t h e m d r y for a f e w h o u r s . C u t o f f the stems, l e a v i n g a 2 - i n c h s t u m p , r e m o v e excess soil, a n d store in a b o x filled w i t h peat m o s s or v e r m i c u l i t e , in a c o o l , frost-free l o c a t i o n . C h e c k the dahlias each m o n t h over the w i n t e r a n d discard a n y rotten tubers. S p r a y a n y tubers that start t o shrivel w i t h w a r m water. Hint: Be careful of the w o r d "miniature" w h e n purchasing d a h l i a s i t usually refers to the flower size, n o t the plant size.
Harvesting
How: D a h l i a s have h o l l o w stems, a n d a sticky w h i t e substance will o o z e f r o m the cut. T h i s is a nutrient that the c u t flower needs to stay alive. To preserve the flower, sear the cut e n d w i t h a m a t c h or c a n d l e . A f t e r searing, p r i c k a h o l e in the s t e m just u n d e r the h e a d of the flower. R e m o v e a n y leaves that w i l l fall b e l o w the waterline. D a h l i a s will last 5 to 7 days in a vase. When: C u t dahlias w h e n the flowers are fully o p e n .
Problems
Earwigs and slugs; p o w d e r y mildew.
240
Dusty Miller
Description
O n e o f m y favorites for the Square F o o t G a r d e n ! T h e c h a r m i n g d u s t y m i l l e t has been g r o w n b y generations of gardeners, and for g o o d reason. T h e soft, silvery foliage is a beautiful addition to just a b o u t a n y g a r d e n t y p e , f r o m f o r m a l t o casual, a n d the c o l o r blends o r contrasts w i t h m a n y other leaves a n d flowers. Its carefree nature, u n i q u e color, a n d interesting texture m a k e it a gardener's favorite. T h e r e are a few different kinds of d u s t y miller, m o s t l y distinguished by the d e p t h of the "cuts" in the f o l i a g e s o m e are scalloped, s o m e are lacy. D u s t y miller plants have unattractive mustard-yellow flowers that g r o w on plants that have overwintered. T h e r e are other annuals, and even perennials, that are easily c o n f u s e d w i t h d u s t y miller. If the plant in q u e s t i o n has w h i t e daisylike flowers, it is probably Silver Lace. If it has purple flowers, then it is most likely a perennial Regardless of w h i c h plant y o u actually have, enjoy it as a lovely garden accent.
Centaurea.
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: 10 to 15 weeks before last frost; seeds need light to germinate. Transplanting: D u s t y miller is u n i q u e in that it can be set o u t into the garden Seed Outdoors: O n l y in
Crowing
truly frost-free areas as it is a slow grower.
2 to 3 weeks
before last
frost. W a i t i n g until other annuals are ready to be planted after the last frost is fine, too.
Watering: W a t e r Maintenance:
regularly w h e n y o u n g , weekly o n c e established. Even t h o u g h dusty miller is d r o u g h t
tolerant, it will do best if watered regularly. D u s t y miller is fairly hardy and will overwinter in m a n y areas, especially if cut back and m u l c h e d in the late fall. Prune second-year plants back severely to maintain the plant's shape and remove any flowering stems as they appear.
Harvesting
C u t branches at any time for flower displays.
Basil and Beyond
241
Problems
Rot can be a problem in w e t soil. O t h e r w i s e , dusty miller is nearly problem-free.
Marigold
Description
Just about everyone will recognize the p o m p o m flowers of the marigold. T h e most c o m m o n flower colors are orange, yellow, and red/orange bicolor, but they can be f o u n d in burgundy, red, and even a creamy white. Flowers can be single, double, or crested, and between 1 and 6 inches in diameter. Marigold leaves are d i s t i n c t i v e s l i m and l a c y a n d give off a p u n g e n t scent w h e n cut or crushed. T h e smaller marigold plants are sometimes called French marigolds, but all marigolds are native t o subtropical A m e r i c a a n d have b e e n g r o w n i n M e x i c o for t h o u s a n d s o f years. T h e d w a r f plants range in size from 6 to 8 inches tall. D o n ' t be fooled by the n a m e d w a r f refers to the plant size, not necessarily the flower size. T h e larger marigold plants are k n o w n as African marigolds, but like their smaller cousins, they are also indigenous to the Americas. G i a n t marigolds can g r o w to over 3 feet tall and are a little too big for a Square Foot G a r d e n . M a r i g o l d s are said to discourage n e m a t o d e s w h e n p l a n t e d near t o m a t o e s , potatoes, asparagus, strawberries, or roses, especially if they are g r o w n for several seasons in g r o u n d where nematodes are suspected. Marigolds also repel the M e x i c a n bean beetle w h e n planted around bean plants. Japanese beetles are attracted to the odorless varieties of marigolds, where they can be trapped and d r o w n e d in soapy water placed near the marigolds. I w a n t to tell y o u a little story about w h a t is g r o w n around the globe. W h e n e v e r we do a h u m a n i tarian project overseas, people ask m e , " H o w do y o u k n o w w h a t crops they can grow in that country?" I answer, " W e specifically tell the people we do not try to c o m p e t e w i t h the farmer or try to grow the basic things they normally eat as part of their Square M e t e r G a r d e n . We tell t h e m , " W e are g o i n g to grow n e w things so y o u r children can have m o r e nutrients a n d better health than they n o w have." A n d still we are asked, " B u t , h o w do y o u k n o w those things will grow there?"
242
T h e answer was illustrated w h e n I w e n t to India to attend the grand o p e n i n g ceremonies of Father A b r a h a m ' s n e w Square F o o t G a r d e n T r a i n i n g C e n t e r . T h e y gave u s garlands o f their locally g r o w n special flowerand guess w h a t it was? Marigolds! Even m o r e astounding, broccoli turned o u t to be their m o s t popular a n d bestselling vegetable. T h a t m a d e me realize that everything we g r o w in our U S A Square Foot Gardens can usually be g r o w n just a b o u t anywhere in the w o r l d .
Starting
Location: G r o w in a s u n n y location. Seeds Lndoors: M a r i g o l d seeds will g e r m i n a t e in a b o u t 7 to 14 days, ideal for a child's first foray into the w o n d e r s of g r o w i n g plants f r o m seeds. Transplanting: After last frost date. Seeds Outdoors: O k a y , b u t usually n o t practical as the season is too short.
Crowing
Watering: W e e k l y w h e n y o u n g , t w i c e w e e k l y w h e n larger. D o n ' t let m a r i g o l d s d r y o u t t h e plants w i l l w i l t a n d die quickly, a n d the stress will attract insects a n d diseases. Maintenance: P i n c h the g r o w i n g tips b a c k w h e n the p l a n t reaches a b o u t 3 inches tall to e n c o u r a g e b u s h i n e s s . P i n c h o r c u t o f f spent b l o o m s t o p r o l o n g f l o w e r i n g .
Harvesting
How: W h e n t h i n k i n g o f flowers t o c u t for the vase, m a r i g o l d s don't i m m e d i a t e l y spring t o m i n d . H o w e v e r , t h e y m a k e a c u t e b o u q u e t that c a n last for 7 to 14 days, as l o n g as the stems are n o t bent. M a r i g o l d stems are short, so try to cut where the flower stem meets a m a i n stem. R e m o v e the leaves that will be under water. To reduce the aroma, add a spoonful of sugar to the water. When: C u t marigolds w h e n the flowers are one-half to three-quarters o p e n . Fully o p e n marigolds will die q u i c k l y in the vase.
Problems
Slugs a n d mites; Botrytis blight and wilt.
Basil and Beyond
243
Pansy
Description
T h e best w o r d to describe pansy flowers is "adorable." T h e little "faces" l o o k up at y o u w i t h hope for a lovely spring after a cold winter, and as a last h o o r a h of color in the fall. Even the flowers w i t h o u t the actual black blotches l o o k like h a p p y faces. Pansies c o m e in so m a n y colors and color c o m b i n a tions that it's difficult to keep up w i t h the changes and even m o r e difficult to choose w h i c h ones to plant. T h e y are easy to grow, as l o n g as y o u remember that they like cool, moist conditions. W h e n the weather gets hot and dry, plan to either discard or m o v e y o u r pansies.
Starting
Location:
In hotter areas, l o o k for heat-resistant types a n d p l a n t in m o d e r a t e shade. Pansies can be pansies f r o m seed i n d o o r s can be a challenge. S o w i n d o o r s 1 4 to 1 6 w e e k s
planted in full sun w h e r e s u m m e r s are c o o l .
Seeds Indoors: G r o w i n g
before the last frost date. Barely cover the seed, t h e n refrigerate for 2 w e e k s . O n c e exposed to r o o m temperatures, seeds s h o u l d s p r o u t in 10 days.
Transplanting: Set
pansies o u t in early spring as soon as the g r o u n d can be w o r k e d , and again in early
fall to bring the gardening season to a colorful close. In w a r m e r climates, set t h e m o u t in fall for early spring b l o o m .
Seeds Outdoors: N o t practical.

Growing
Watering: Weekly; water m o r e often if the plants wilt and in the heat o f the summer. Maintenance: K e e p pansies c o o l a n d moist. D e a d h e a d pansies for c o n t i n u o u s b l o o m ,
leggy plants to stimulate n e w g r o w t h .
and cut b a c k
Harvesting
How: Pansies make a cute cut flower; keep in m i n d that the stems are quite short.
When: C u t
Problems
pansy flowers just after they unfurl.
Slugs and snails; insufficient moisture.
244
Petunia
Description
Petunias are o n e of the easiest annuals to grow, especially if they ate purchased as plants. T h e seeds are so tiny, a t e a s p o o n c o n t a i n s over 10,000 seeds! T h e y are b r a n c h i n g , c r e e p i n g plants w i t h lightgreen, hairy leaves that c a n b e sticky. T h e t r u m p e t - s h a p e d f l o w e r s c o m e i n just a b o u t every c o l o r i m a g i n a b l e , even the o n c e - i m p o s s i b l e yellow, a n d the flower f o r m s range f r o m single to d o u b l e , ruffled, striped, and scalloped. Petunia flowers c o m e in a range of sizesgrandifloras have 4 to 5 inch flowers, multifloras have 2 to 3 i n c h flowers, a n d millifloras have an a b u n d a n c e of t i n y 1-inch flowers. P i n c h petunia plants back by a b o u t one-third before planting, then keep t h e m deadheaded and pruned t h r o u g h o u t the g r o w i n g season for a nonstop performance.
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: Start seeds indoors Transplanting: Set
8 to 10 weeks before last frost, 1 2 to 1 4 weeks for slower g r o w i n g
varieties. D o n ' t cover the seeds. Petunias can germinate slowly, from 7 to 21 days. petunias o u t w h e n all d a n g e r o f frost has passed. P i n c h at transplanting for G r o w t h from seed takes too l o n g to be practical. better b r a n c h i n g .
Seeds Outdoors: N o .
Crowing
Watering: Weekly. Maintenance:

Harvesting
How: Petunia flowers m a k e an excellent c u t flower for v e r y small containers. T r y a t i n y vase on the k i t c h e n table or sink area w i t h just o n e stem in water. D e a d h e a d to encourage b l o o m , and prune back by half if the plant gets scraggly.
When: Just as the b u d is o p e n i n g .

Problems
A p h i d s ; gray m o l d and soft rot can occur in h u m i d areas.
Basil and Beyond
245
Salvia
Description
T h e r e are so m a n y different salvias that an entire garden can be d e d i c a t e d to t h e m w i t h o u t duplication.
Salvia splendens is
an a n n u a l salvia w i t h tall spikes o f red or w h i t e flowers, a l t h o u g h
hybridizers have c o m e up w i t h pink, salmon, and a deep purple that looks almost black. Also k n o w n as scarlet sage, salvia is actually a m e m b e r of the m i n t family, b e a r i n g the t r a d e m a r k square stem. T h e s e lovely plants are w o r k h o r s e s in the h o t , s u n n y g a r d e n , a n d are q u i t e d r o u g h t tolerant o n c e they're established. C u t the plant back by one-third at planting time, to a pair of leaves where y o u see n e w sprouts e m e r g i n g t o e n c o u r a g e bushiness, a n d k e e p i t d e a d h e a d e d t h r o u g h o u t the g r o w i n g season for a l o n g display of color, texture, a n d h e i g h t .
Starting
Location: Full sun to partial shade. Seeds Indoors: S o w seed i n d o o r s 6
to 8 w e e k s before the last frost. D o n ' t cover the tiny seeds, they soil has w a r m e d as they can be very frost sensitive.
need light t o g e r m i n a t e . K e e p the m i x just slightly m o i s t t o a v o i d d a m p i n g - o f f .
Transplanting: Set salvia o u t after the Seeds Outdoors: N o , n o t e n o u g h time.

Growing
Watering: Weekly. Maintenance:

Harvesting
How: To encourage a fall crop of b l o o m s , cut all the main stems back to a pair of leaves again in late s u m m e r and you'll have a late season showcase of color. D e a d h e a d often to p r o m o t e branching and uninterrupted flowering.
When: A s
Problems
soon as half the buds have o p e n e d o n the flower stalk.
Slugs, aphids and whitefly; mildew.
Mel's Final Summary

W e l l t h e r e y o u have it! T h e A L L N E W Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g System w i t h the latest updates a n d i m p r o v e m e n t s I've m a d e to the original system I invented thirty years ago. In c l o s i n g , I'd like to h i g h l i g h t the m o s t i m p o r t a n t features of S F G for y o u s o y o u truly u n d e r s t a n d w h y it's s o different f r o m the o l d - f a s h i o n e d , o u t d a t e d single-row g a r d e n i n g system we've all b e e n taught at o n e time or another. Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g is sort of like a picture puzzle of an attractive garden ready for h a r v e s t a n d there's o n l y sixteen large pieces t o fit t o g e t h e r t o p r o d u c e t h e f i n i s h e d picture (that is, the harvest). To p r o d u c e the same harvest-picture, the single-row garden has 4 8 9 tiny pieces to fit together! T h e features o f S F G will h e l p y o u u n d e r s t a n d h o w o n e t h i n g relates to another a n d h o w all the simplifications of S F G fit together to help each other p r o d u c e a m u c h better garden for y o u w i t h o u t a lot of w o r k and k n o w l e d g e . H e r e are the most i m p o r t a n t and far reaching of those features.
Location
Since Square F o o t G a r d e n i n g takes o n l y 2 0 p e r c e n t o f the space to p r o d u c e 1 0 0 p e r c e n t of the harvest, it c a n be l o c a t e d a l m o s t a n y w h e r e a n d the best location is close to the house. That's where you'll pass it m o r e often, notice a n d appreciate it m o r e and as a result, you'll take better care of it. T h i s w i l l p r o d u c e a better a n d m o r e productive garden.
Size
T h e same t h i n g applies t o p r o t e c t i n g y o u r g a r d e n f r o m just a b o u t a n y t h i n g h a r m f u l , w e a t h e r a n d pests b e i n g the m o s t destructive; the smaller size m a k e s e v e r y t h i n g easier to m a i n t a i n a n d c o n t r o l . Size also applies to w h o can garden; this m a n a g e a b l e size m e a n s e v e r y o n e e v e n those w i t h limited time o r e n e r g y c a n enjoy the benefits of the garden.
Soil Requirements
W e ' v e eliminated all the things y o u used to have to learn a b o u t soil a n d the special requirements for each individual v e g e t a b l e b e c a u s e
Mel's Final Summary n o w you're u s i n g n o t h i n g b u t Mel's M i x . I f y o u m a k e y o u r s a c c o r d i n g to the f o r m u l a a n d if y o u use a g o o d b l e n d e d c o m p o s t m a d e from at least five ingredients, you'll have a perfect soil for every single crop in y o u r garden. We won't have to tell y o u to screen for stones, or add extra h u m u s , or that this crop needs a higher pH or a well-drained s o i l . . . o r any o f those things that m o s t books have t o tell y o u . You're starting out w i t h a perfect soil for every single crop. So we don't have to give y o u different or special directions a b o u t soil for every single plant.
247
Location for Sunlight

All the vegetables need lots of sun: six to eight hours per day. If any of y o u r garden area gets m o r e sun than other areas, that's the place to p u t y o u r w a r m w e a t h e r o r s u m m e r crops. T h e s p r i n g a n d fall c o o l weather crops can get by w i t h less s u n , a n d in fact will do better in the s u m m e r if they do n o t have as m u c h s u n as the o t h e r s u m m e r crops. O f course, i f y o u r entire g a r d e n gets the same a m o u n t o f sunlight, plant c o o l w e a t h e r crops in the partial shade of a taller p l a n t o r provide t h e m w i t h one of the simple sun shades described in C h a p t e r 4.
Fertilizer
W e don't use fertilizer a n y m o r e . W e don't need it. Mel's M i x w i t h its rich c o m p o s t h a s all the natural nutrients, trace elements, a n d minerals that any o f the plants c o u l d possibly w a n t . Y o u won't need to learn that this p l a n t needs extra n i t r o g e n or that p l a n t needs extra p o t a s s i u m b e c a u s e M e l ' s M i x has e v e r y t h i n g e a c h p l a n t needs, and it is readily available for t h e m . T h o s e that n e e d it, take it. T h o s e that don't n e e d it, don't take it. It's t h a t s i m p l e ; it's that easy. Y o u w o n ' t h a v e t o learn a n y t h i n g a b o u t fertilizer o r t h e various formulas or w h a t N P K m e a n s . . . y o u w o n ' t have to go t o the store t o b u y fertilizer a t all. T h i n k o f the t i m e a n d m o n e y you'll save! T h e best p a r t i t ' s all natural a n d organic. Is that easy gardening or what? But besides all that, you're g o i n g to have a perfect garden because you're starting w i t h a perfect soil. I'm sure y o u are tired of h e a r i n g about it, but the value a n d importance of the proper soil m i x c a n n o t be overemphasized. After y o u b e c o m e successful w i t h y o u r garden and begin helping others start their n e w S F G , please be as e m p h a t i c as I am about the proper soil m i x . It virgually guarantees success.
Watering
T h e same goes for watering. T h e general directions for watering in the Square Foot Garden are to m a k e sure the soil stays moist, and give the plants as m u c h water as they need. A l t h o u g h that sounds nebulous at
248
first, y o u will soon b e c o m e acclimated to those directions, and you'll k n o w w h i c h plants require m o r e . ( O f course, i t all d e p e n d s o n size, season, weather, and the growth pattern of that particular plant.) A n y one can see that a large bushy plant needs m u c h m o r e than a y o u n g seedling just starting. N o matter w h a t m e t h o d o f watering y o u use, another important feature of Mel's M i x is that y o u or y o u r sprinkler system can't overwater, because this m i x drains o u t all the excess water.
Pests and Diseases

We also won't go into any detail of possible pests a n d diseases of each individual plant. I've h a d gardeners tell me that w h e n they read a l o n g list of potential threats, they often decide they don't w a n t to g r o w that c r o p a n d that's a shame, because in all likelihood, they'll never see that pest or disease. I t h i n k y o u have seen by n o w that S F G is n o t about all the problems and diseases of plant g r o w t h , it is a b o u t healthy productive plants g r o w i n g in a garden starting w i t h healthy natural soil. As we explained in an earlier chapter, if y o u have a p r o b l e m or s o m e pests (if y o u c a n first i d e n t i f y o r d e s c r i b e i t ) , call y o u r l o c a l c o u n t y e x t e n s i o n a g e n t a n d describe it. T h e y c a n n o t o n l y tell y o u w h a t i t is, b u t h o w t o get rid o f it. I n a d d i t i o n , t h e y k n o w y o u r e x p e c t e d frost dates a n d the best varieties to g r o w in y o u r local area. O u r feeling, o f course, i s that w i t h y o u r natural rich soil, y o u won't have m o s t problems; the plants will g r o w healthy and they'll be m u c h m o r e resistant to any disease or pest.
When to Plant
C h a r t s in this A p p e n d i x will give y o u all of the information y o u need to k n o w a b o u t w h e n to plant b o t h seeds or seedlings, indoors or out. T h e y also indicate w h e n t o replant a n a d d i t i o n a l c r o p i n order t o have a c o n t i n u o u s harvest t h r o u g h the g a r d e n i n g year.
How Much to Plant

Use extreme caution here. Remember, this is n o t single-row gardening w h e r e y o u usually p l a n t o n e r o w o f everything. Start o u t b y asking yourself, " H o w m u c h do I really w a n t to harvest ( n o t plant) in the time period that this crop will be ready?" For example, a planting of broccoli will all be ready to harvest over a period of just a couple of weeks in late spring (after that it will go to seed). So if y o u o n l y w a n t to have t w o heads a w e e k , then plant no m o r e than four or five plants for that t w o - w e e k harvest period. D o n ' t forget broccoli is a cool weather crop, so y o u get to plant it again in the fall, w h i c h has a l o n g e r harvest p e r i o d since it's g e t t i n g colder rather t h a n warmer.)
Mel's Final Summary For crops that give y o u a c o n t i n u o u s harvest like Swiss chard, parsley, t o m a t o e s , or p o l e beans, g r o w o n l y e n o u g h plants to give y o u as m u c h as y o u w a n t to harvest each w e e k . Y o u don't have to feed the n e i g h b o r h o o d a l t h o u g h s o m e t i m e s y o u have to offer a f e w tomatoes in order to get rid of y o u r z u c c h i n i .
249
Specific Questions
If you're the k i n d of person w h o needs to k n o w everything y o u can find out about the plant and its planting, g r o w i n g , a n d harvesting patterns in y o u r area, then it w o u l d be wise to call the c o u n t y agricultural extension agent. A s k t h e m for their leaflet o n w h a t e v e r c r o p you're interested i n t h e y have m o r e t h a n e n o u g h p r i n t e d inform a t i o n o n just a b o u t every single c r o p . T h e only thing y o u have to be careful a b o u t is they're still teaching single-row gardening, unfortunately. A l l the literature that the governm e n t spends all that m o n e y o n p r i n t i n g still s h o w s the h a n d - m e d o w n row system f r o m farming, so y o u have to be wise e n o u g h after reading this b o o k t o interpret those differences a n d c o n v e r t t h e m into the Square F o o t m e t h o d . It w o n ' t c h a n g e a n y t h i n g ; it'll just m a k e it m u c h easier. For example, y o u won't have to thin seedlings or improve soil by adding this or that special k i n d of fertilizer or h o e weeds or do all the other things we used to have to learn or d o . So just strike that out from any literature y o u get f r o m y o u r c o u n t y agent.
Harvesting Method
Be gende w h e n y o u harvest if you're p i c k i n g s o m e t h i n g w i t h a stem, like a pepper, t o m a t o , squash or even peas a n d beans. C u t the stem w i t h y o u r garden scissors w h i l e y o u h o l d the fruit w i t h the other hand. R e m e m b e r , w i t h S F G o u r plants are g r o w i n g in a v e r y loose and friable soil, so it's i m p o r t a n t to be careful and n o t t u g or y a n k on the plant. Since y o u won't be overburdened w i t h too m u c h harvest in y o u r S F G , y o u can take y o u r t i m e a n d e n j o y the actual harvest. It's a h a p p y c o n c l u s i o n t o g r o w i n g plants a n d s h o u l d b e quite different from the o l d days o f r o w g a r d e n i n g . B a c k t h e n , y o u h a d t o m o v e fast to p i c k a w h o l e t h i r t y - f o o t r o w of b u s h beans, t w i s t i n g a n d y a n k i n g the beans off. T h e n y o u h a d t o get the h o e o u t again t o f i n i s h the morning's w o r k o f w e e d i n g ! H a r v e s t i n g the S F G w a y i s k i n d of like the difference b e t w e e n l o a d i n g sand bags in the t r u c k versus p u t t i n g the children in their car seat. For leaf crops w h e r e you're p i c k i n g i n d i v i d u a l leaves o r s t e m s like lettuce, spinach, Swiss chard, or p a r s l e y d o the same t h i n g . C u t the leaf or stem w i t h y o u r scissors, t h e n place it in y o u r salad b o w l or harvest basket. A l o t of folks like to d i p their harvest in the water bucket to wash it o f f y o u c o u l d use a colander as y o u r harvest
250
basket. T h e n y o u can w a s h o f f y o u r harvest right in the garden a n d any water a n d soil will fall right back into the garden. W h i c h o n e of the three Rs is that?
Harvesting and Eating

T h e r e are so m a n y different ideas a n d recipes that I just w a n t to encourage y o u to spend m o r e time harvesting a n d using the produce. Y o u have the t i m e because y o u r garden is no longer a lot of w o r k . Eat m o r e things raw a n d fresh right o u t of the garden. You'll find yourself g r o w i n g s l i m m e r b y the d a y a s y o u f i l l u p o n all these g o o d i e s f r o m the garden. W h e n y o u d o c o o k , I w o u l d e n c o u r a g e y o u t o use less fat, leave the m e a t o u t , and saute and broil m o r e often. T r y n o t to c o o k in water and, of course, if y o u get the entire family to start o u t by eating half of the harvest raw a n d directly from the garden, you'll find that n o t o n l y y o u r family life will improve, b u t the kids will eat m o r e v e g e t a b l e s m o r e often t h a n y o u c o u l d ever i m a g i n e . T r y a f a m i l y p i c n i c s u p p e r s o m e d a y h e l d right i n the garden. See w h o c a n m a k e the m o s t u n u s u a l salad! We just had a letter f r o m a schoolteacher q u o t i n g a student w h o said, "I've never eaten a radish before, n o w I g r o w t h e m a n d love t h e m . " M o r e important, that student takes an interest in his garden, and derives a sense of a c c o m p l i s h m e n t and pride f r o m his efforts. It w o r k s for families t o o t h e w h o l e idea o f S F G i s t o m a k e gardening a family-oriented, healthy, h a p p y hobby.
A Word About Plant Families

I've m e n t i o n e d all t h r o u g h this b o o k h o w I feel that all of y o u r plants are just like y o u r children and should be treated as such. So it's fun a n d w o r t h w h i l e to visit s o m e of the plant families and get to k n o w t h e m a little better. S o m e members of different families will surprise y o u l i k e lettuce. W o u l d n ' t y o u t h i n k that w o u l d be in the leafy vegetable family? B u t n o , it's in the sunflower family . . . A n d w h a t a b o u t celery? It's in the carrot family! There's a lot y o u c a n learn f r o m this. Y o u can see that in the N i g h t s h a d e family, all the m e m b e r s b e l o n g to the h o t w e a t h e r or s u m m e r crop; so they all need the same requirements a n d conditions o f g r o w i n g . ( C h e c k the "At a G l a n c e " feature for m o r e i m p o r t a n t facts t o k n o w a b o u t s o m e o f the vegetables, f l o w e r s , a n d herbs y o u m i g h t b e g r o w i n g i n y o u r S F G . ) I f y o u b e c o m e familiar w i t h the p l a n t families y o u w o n ' t have t o learn a n d digest a s m u c h inform a t i o n a b o u t individual crops because, for e x a m p l e , all plants in the same family have the same pests, diseases, a n d p r o b l e m s related to g r o w i n g (not that we expect to e n c o u n t e r a n y of that in our natural a n d rich Mel's M i x soil). E a c h family m e m b e r usually has the same frost resistance a n d is in the same c o o l or w a r m weather category. In
Mel's Final Summary
251
CHART OF P L A N T FAMILIES A N D M E M B E R S
Carrot Carrot Celery Parsley Parsnip Goosefoot Beet Spinach Swiss Chard Gourd Cucumber Gourd Cantaloupe Pumpkin Squash Watermelon Grass Corn Lily Asparagus Mallow Okra Mustard Bok Choy Broccoli Brussel Sprouts Cabbage Chinese C a b b a g e Cauliflower Collards Cress Kale Horseradish Kohlrabi Mustard Greens Radish Rutabaga Turnip Nightshade Eggplant Pepper Potato Tomato Onion Chive Garlic Leek Onion Shallot Pea Beans Peas Sunflower Endive Chicory Globe Artichoke Jerusalem Artichoke Lettuce Sunflower
addition, they all require pretty m u c h the same type of care. So if y o u learn the families and the care of each family, you'll have a m o r e satisfying garden experience.
Conclusion
T h e s e are just a few of my favorites of the m u l t i t u d e of flowers, vegetables, and herbs y o u can g r o w in y o u r Square Foot G a r d e n . C a n y o u visualize h o w attractive a quilt-like g a r d e n can be w h e n y o u plant something different in every square foot? C a n y o u see h o w little y o u really have to k n o w about plants and gardening to be successful? Start small and expand as y o u gain experience and success. T h e n spread the w o r d and help others start their o w n S F G . S o g o o d luck w i t h y o u r g a r d e n a n d please let m e k n o w h o w you're doing. We love letters and pictures; this always encourages others to get started! T h a n k y o u for all y o u r support. T h i s is M e l B a r t h o l o m e w w i s h i n g y o u . . . H a p p y Gardening!
254
Charts
255
256
Charts
257
continued on following page
258
Charts
259
Glossary
i i i I i i i I i i 1 1 i i 1 1 i i 1 1 i i i I i i i I i i i 11 i i I i i i I i i i I i i i I i
acclimate. To b e c o m e a c c u s t o m e d to a different e n v i r o n m e n t . annual. A plant that lives its entire life in one season. It is genetically determined to germinate, grow, flower, set seed, and die the same year. beneficial insects. Insects or their larvae that prey on pest o r g a n i s m s a n d their eggs. T h e y m a y be flying insects s u c h as l a d y b u g s , parasitic w a s p s , p r a y i n g m a n t i d s , a n d soldier bugs; or soil dwellers s u c h as p r e d a t o r y n e m a t o d e s , spiders, a n d ants. biennial. A p l a n t that is genetically p r o g r a m m e d to g r o w over t w o seasons before setting seed a n d d y i n g . bolting. T h e t e n d e n c y of a leafy p l a n t s u c h as lettuce, spinach, or even cabbage to seed prematurely. O f t e n in response to v e r y h o t weather, s u c h a p l a n t sends up tall stalks that bear flowers, t h e n seeds; this usually affects the quality a n d flavor of the foliage crop. climber. A p l a n t that grows vertically by m e a n s of e l o n g a t i n g stems. It m a y twist, cling, or use holdfasts to c l i m b vertical surfaces or supports. cold hardiness. T h e ability of a perennial p l a n t to survive the w i n t e r c o l d in a particular area. compost. O r g a n i c m a t t e r that has u n d e r g o n e progressive d e c o m p o s i t i o n by m i c r o b i a l a n d m a c r o b i a l activity u n t i l it is r e d u c e d to a spongy, fluffy texture. A d d e d to soil of a n y t y p e , it i m p r o v e s its ability to h o l d air a n d w a t e r a n d to drain well. County agent/extension agent. An e m p l o y e e of the state university w h o is trained to p r o v i d e i n f o r m a t i o n a n d assistance to farmers a n d h o m e o w n e r s a b o u t agricultural a n d horticultural t e c h n i q u e s , soil analysis, a n d pest c o n t r o l . Usually, there is an office in every county.
Glossary deadhead. To remove faded flowerheads from plants to improve their appearance, abort seed p r o d u c t i o n , a n d stimulate further flowering. deciduous. T h e o p p o s i t e of evergreen; describes trees a n d shrubs that lose their leaves in the fall. direct-SOW. To s o w seeds directly i n t o the g a r d e n rather t h a n starting t h e m in small pots for later t r a n s p l a n t i n g .
x
261
division. Splitting apart perennial plants to create several smaller r o o t e d segments. Useful for c o n t r o l l i n g a plant's size a n d for a c q u i r i n g m o r e plants, it is also essential to the health a n d c o n t i n u e d f l o w e r i n g o f certain species. dormancy (dormant). T h e p e r i o d , usually winter, w h e n perennial plants temporarily cease active g r o w t h , a n d rest. S o m e plants, s u c h as s p r i n g - b l o o m i n g b u l b s , go d o r m a n t in the s u m m e r . drip irrigation. An efficient w a t e r d e l i v e r y s y s t e m t h r o u g h special lines, or hoses, laid t h r o u g h p l a n t e d beds. W a t e r either soaks t h r o u g h the hoses or leaks t h r o u g h special emitters inserted in t h e m to go directly to p l a n t roots. germinate. To s p r o u t ; to enter a fertile seed's first stage of development. handpick. To e l i m i n a t e pest insects or slugs a n d caterpillars by r e m o v i n g t h e m f r o m p l a n t foliage or k n o c k i n g t h e m i n t o a plastic b a g or jar of soapy or salty w a t e r to kill t h e m . hardening-off. T h e process o f gradually a c c l i m a t i n g i n d o o r plants o r seedlings raised indoors to o u t d o o r w e a t h e r c o n d i t i o n s . hardiness. See c o l d hardiness. herbaceous. Describes plants that have fleshy or soft stems that die b a c k w i t h frost; the opposite o f w o o d y . herbicide. A n y p r o d u c t or c h e m i c a l agent that kills plants. S o m e act on foliage and stem tissues, s o m e act on seeds. hybrid. A plant that is the result of either i n t e n t i o n a l or natural cross-pollination b e t w e e n t w o or m o r e plants of the same species or genus. T h i s pedigree is expressed by the m u l t i p l i c a t i o n s y m b o l in b e t w e e n the t w o w o r d s in its botanical (scientific) n a m e .
262
insecticide. A n y p r o d u c t , c o m p o u n d , o r garden aid f o r m u l a t e d specifically to kill insects. larva(e). An insect in its i m m a t u r e stage, after it hatches f r o m an e g g . T y p i c a l l y a w o r m or caterpillar f o r m of a butterfly, m o t h , or beetle, larvae are v o r a c i o u s l y h u n g r y ; this is the stage at w h i c h insects are m o s t destructive to plants. mulch. A layer of material over bare soil that protects the soil f r o m e r o s i o n a n d c o m p a c t i o n b y rain, a n d also d i s c o u r a g e s w e e d s . I t m a y be i n o r g a n i c (gravel, fabric) or organic ( w o o d chips, bark, p i n e needles, c h o p p e d leaves). nectar. T h e sweet f l u i d p r o d u c e d b y glands o n f l o w e r s that attracts pollinators s u c h a s h u m m i n g b i r d s a n d h o n e y b e e s , for w h o m the fluid is a source of energy. organic material, matter. A n y material or debris that is derived f r o m plants. C a r b o n - b a s e d material that is capable of u n d e r g o i n g d e c o m p o s i t i o n a n d decay. peat moss. O r g a n i c m a t t e r f r o m peat sedges ( U n i t e d States) or s p h a g n u m mosses ( C a n a d a ) , often used t o i m p r o v e soil texture. T h e a c i d i t y o f s p h a g n u m peat m o s s m a k e s i t ideal for b o o s t i n g o r m a i n t a i n i n g soil acidity w h i l e also i m p r o v i n g its drainage. perennial. A flowering plant that lives over three or m o r e seasons. M a n y die b a c k w i t h frost, b u t their roots survive the w i n t e r a n d generate n e w shoots in spring. pesticide. A n y p r o d u c t , c o m p o u n d , or device that kills pest insects, disease p a t h o g e n s , pest animals, or w e e d s . pinch of seeds. Just t w o or three seeds for each h o l e . photosynthesis. T h e process b y w h i c h plants, c o l l e c t i n g e n e r g y f r o m the s u n b y m e a n s o f the c h l o r o p h y l l i n their foliage, transform c a r b o n d i o x i d e in the air a n d w a t e r f r o m the soil i n t o carbohydrates that fuel their g r o w t h . pollen. T h e yellow, p o w d e r y grains in the center of a flower. A plant's m a l e sex cells, t h e y are transferred to the female p l a n t parts b y m e a n s o f w i n d , insects o r a n i m a l p o l l i n a t o r s , t o fertilize t h e m a n d create seeds.
Glossary potbound. See r o o t b o u n d . rootbound (or potbound). T h e c o n d i t i o n of a plant that has b e e n confined to a container t o o l o n g , its roots h a v i n g been forced to w r a p a r o u n d themselves a n d even swell o u t o f the container. Successful transplanting or r e p o t t i n g requires u n t a n g l i n g a n d t r i m m i n g a w a y s o m e o f the m a t t e d roots. root zone. T h e area that the roots of a g i v e n p l a n t currently o c c u p y or can be expected to spread to w h e n mature. W a t e r a n d m u l c h are m o s t effectively applied to the soil surface over the root z o n e . seed leaf. As a seed sprouts, the first leaves to appear are the seed leaves. Usually r o u n d or b r o a d , these leaves eventually fall o f f the plant. T h e next leaves, a p p e a r i n g above the seed leaves, are the true leaves. succession planting. T h e practice o f p r o m p t l y replacing f o o d crops that have passed peak p r o d u c t i o n w i t h seeds or transplants of a different crop. M o s t effective in raised beds w h e r e the soil is rich e n o u g h to support several crops over a season, it maximizes production in a limited space. sucker. A n e w g r o w i n g s h o o t . U n d e r g r o u n d p l a n t roots p r o d u c e suckers t o f o r m n e w stems a n d spread b y m e a n s o f these s u c k e r i n g roots to f o r m large plantings, or colonies. T o m a t o plants p r o d u c e a sucker in the crotch of the m a i n s t e m a n d a leaf. T h i s sucker will g r o w into a side b r a n c h , m a k n g the p l a n t v e r y bushy. thinning. T h e process of r e m o v i n g extra s p r o u t s f r o m a single p l a n t i n g o f a p i n c h o f seeds o f n e w l y g e r m i n a t e d seedlings t o create sufficient space for the r e m a i n i n g o n e to g r o w a n d m a t u r e . transplant. A y o u n g p l a n t that is m a t u r e e n o u g h to be p l a n t e d o u t d o o r s in a garden b e d or decorative container. true leaves. T h e second set of leaves that appear on a y o u n g seedling. T h e y resemble the leaves of the species. variegated. H a v i n g various colors or color patterns. U s u a l l y refers to plant foliage that is streaked, e d g e d , b l o t c h e d , or m o t t l e d w i t h a contrasting color, often green w i t h cream or w h i t e . vermiculite. A natural mineral that, g r o u n d up a n d heated to over 2,000 F, expands into a l i g h t w e i g h t , w a t e r - a b s o r b e n t material ideal for soil mix.
263

Square Foot Gardening

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Square Foot Gardening

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

SFG, New and Improved

Plan Your Garden

J Building Boxes and Structures

Mel's Mix, Essential for Square Foot Gardening Success . . . 87

How to Plant Your All New Square Foot Garden

Growing and Harvesting

Extending the Seasons

Special Gardens & Gardeners

For Experts Only

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Two Hours or Two Weeks

75 Million vs. 10 Million

Twenty-Five Years and One Million Books Later

First Red Flag

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Too Many, Too Much

Because That's the Way

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

One Thousand Seeds

Single Row, Double Row, Triple Row

Shorten the Rows

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Never Walk on Soil

The Seven-Year Itch

Start Right in a Single Day

The 4x4-Foot Garden

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Stagger the Harvest

Stop Planting So Much

Up Close and Personal

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

The Square Foot Gardening Story

Sharing Ideas, 1978 to 1980

You have forever changed gardening for me.

First, t h e local n e w s p a p e r asked me to w r i t e a g a r d e n

Garden Consulting, 1981 to 1984

PBS One Minute, 1981 to 1986

Thirty-Minute PBS TV Series, 1982 to 1986

More Television Opportunities

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Discovery Network 1989 to 1991

California Schools, 1996

Utah Schools, 1998

Thanksgiving Point, 1999 to 2001

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

Square Meter Gardening: SFG Humanitarian Efforts Go Global, 2001 to 2002

SFG International Training Center in Homestead, Florida

Single Rows Throughout the World

Certified SFG Teachers

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

The Story Goes On And On

Why an All New Square Foot Gardening Book Now?

Ten Major N e w Improvements to the Original Square Foot Garden Method

GridsProminent and Permanent

9. New IdeaDon't Waste Seeds 1 0 . New OpportunitiesTabletop Gardens

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

N e w Location-Close to the House

Single-Row Gardens Are Too Big

Split It Up for Best Location

SFG, New and Improved

2 N e w DirectionUp, Not Down!

ALL NEW SQUARE FOOT GARDENING

h Blended C o m p o s t I f y o u don't have y o u r o w n c o m p o s t